Tractor Design and Testing

Tractor Design
and Testing
Dr. Manjit Singh

Dr. L. N. Shukla
Tractor Design and Testing
-: Course Content Developed By :-
Dr. Manjit Singh

Research Engineer
Department of Farm Machinery and Power Engg., PAU,
Ludhiana
Content Reviewed by :-
Dr. L. N. Shukla
Retd. ADR (Engg.)
PAU, Ludhiana
INDEX
Lesson Name Page
No.
Module 1. Introduction about design and development of Agril. Tractor
Lesson 1. Hierarchical Development in Tractor Design 5-9
Lesson 2. Different Type of Tractors Available in India/abroad & 10-16
it’sImportance in Agriculture
Lesson 3. Recent Trends in Tractor Design 17-23
Module 2. Study of special design features of tractor engines and
their selection
Lesson 4. Selection of engines available in the market and their 24-29
performance
Lesson 5. Design requirements for tractor engine components and 30-36
systems.
Lesson 6. Engine design changes for emission reduction 37-42
Module 3. Study of basic design parameters for traction,mechanics
of chassis 39 and stability of tractors
Lesson 7. Soil machine systems for off-road vehicles 43-50
Lesson 8. Traction mechanics and its prediction 51-62
Lesson 9. Mechanics of tractor chassis and stability analysis 63-74
Module 4. Selection of different mechanical power transmission
units of 71 Agril. Tractor
Lesson 10. Tractor clutches and brakes 75-87
Lesson 11. Different types of gear and power transmission systems 88-107
in tractors.
Module 5. Study of tractor steering and suspension systems
Lesson 12. Introduction and selection of different components for 108-114
steering systems.
Lesson 13. Study of tractor suspension system 115-120
Module 6. Design and analysis of tractor hitch system geometry
Lesson 14. Design of various components of three point hitch 121-129
systems.
Lesson 15. Kinematic and force Analysis of hitch system geometry 130-132
Module 7. Design of a tractor hydraulic system
Lesson 16. Study of tractor hydraulic systems and controls 133-139
Lesson 17. Hydraulic system design considerations 140-143
Lesson 18. Design of main components of a hydraulic System 144-150
Module 8. Study of electrical, electronics and guidance system of a
tractor
Lesson 19. Electrical System of tractor 151-162
Lesson 20. Electronics and guidance system of tractor 163-166
Module 9. Ergonomics, controls and safety features of an
agricultural tractors158
Lesson 21. Importance of ergonomics in tractor and agricultural 167-171
machinery design.
Lesson 22. Human engineering in tractor design 172-187
Lesson 23. Tractor noise, vibration and other environmental factors 188-196
Lesson 24. Safety features including ROPS in tractor 197-199
Module 10. Tractor testing
Lesson 25. Standardization and importance of testing for tractors 200-203
Lesson 26. Procedure of testing and standard code for testing of 204-209
tractor performance
Module 11. General revision
Lesson 27. Indian Tractor Industry 210-214
Lesson 28. Cost estimation and selection of tractor 215-225
Lesson 29. Optimization of Tractor Field Efficiency to Save 226-227
Energy/Fuel
Lesson 30. Alternative Fuels for IC Engines 228-234
Module 1. Introduction about design and development of Agril. Tractor
Lesson 1. Hierarchical Development in Tractor Design
1. Introduction:
In 1917, Henry Ford introduced the Fordson tractor weighing one ton. The Fordson soon
ruled the tractor industry, accounting for 75 percent of the U.S. market share and 50 percent
of the worldwide share. Nevertheless, the tractor business remained a competitive field, at
least for a few decades, and competition helped foster innovations. Tractors themselves got
smaller and more lightweight and were designed with a higher ground clearance, making
them capable of cultivation through the standing crop.
I. Engines:
Experiments with engines were conducted date back many centuries, but James Watt is
credited with patenting the first practical steam engine in 1769 (Gray 1954b). A steam engine
for agricultural work was in use by 1849 (Norbeck, 1976). It was pulled from place to place
using draft animals. Development of power trains and crude steering systems transformed
the steam engines into tractors that could be used for heavy drawbar work. By 1858, J. W.
Fawkes had produced a steam tractor that can pull eight plows at 4.8 km/h in virgin sod
(Gray, 1954b).
By 1907, tractors with internal combustion (IC) engines were beginning to appear.
Competition between the two types of tractors was fierce and climaxed in the tractor trials
that were held in Winnipeg, Manitoba, Canada in 1908-1911 (Goering et. al. 2003), where the
limitations of the steam tractors became apparent. Steam tractors required an operating crew,
including two men to run the tractor and two to haul coal and water. The firebox of steam
tractors was usually fired with coal, and the open-cycle engine required periodic
replenishment of the boiler water. A tractor with an IC engine required only one person to
operate.
After the Winnipeg trials, steam tractors rapidly gave way to tractors with IC engines. The
transition helped transform agriculture. Steam tractors were large and clumsy, lacking the
versatility that tractors with IC engines provided. Steam tractors could not be used until the
fire was started in the fire box and the water was brought to a boil. When the job was
finished, the energy stored' in the heated water was wasted. Conversely, IC engines could be
started and stopped quickly and, not having a firebox or boiler, could be made much -
smaller.
5 www.AgriMoon.Com
II. Pneumatic Tires/Traction:
Rubber tires designed for agricultural use came along in 1933, making it much easier for
tractors to function even on the roughest, muddiest ground. An Allis-Chalmers Model U
tractor belonging to Albert Schroeder of Waukesha, Wisconsin, was outfitted with a pair of
Firestone 48X12 airplane tires in place of lugged steel wheels. Tests by the University of
Nebraska Tractor Test Laboratory found that rubber wheels resulted in a 25 percent
improvement in fuel economy. Rubber wheels also mean smoother, faster driving with less
wear and tear on tractor parts and the driver. Minneapolis Marine Power Implement
Company even markets a "Comfort Tractor" with road speeds up to 40 mph, making it usable
on public roads or hauling grain or transporting equipment and ever mindful of the power
plant.
As manufacturers seek better productivity through improvements in transmissions, tires, and

engine power, some tractors have become heavy again. To avoid soil compaction problems,
modern tractors are sometimes '4 wheel driven' (4WD), with the weight evenly distributed
over the four wheels. Dual or twin wheels are sometimes fitted to further reduce ground
pressure. Four-wheel drive tractors began to appear in the 1960s. Some four-wheel drive
tractors have the standard "two large, two small" configuration typical of smaller tractors,
while some have four large, powered wheels. The larger tractors are typically an articulated,
center-hinged design steered by hydraulic cylinders that move the forward power unit while
the trailing unit is not steered separately.
III. Power Take Off (PTO):
Experimental power take-offs (PTOs) were tried as early as 1878, but in 1918, IRC was first to
install a PTO on a production tractor (Goering, 2004). This option was on their Mode115-30
tractor in 1920, when it was the first tractor with a PTO to undergo a Nebraska tractor test.
However, that PTO was not tested; rather, belt pulley power was measured in those days.
Another early innovation, introduced by International Harvester in 1922, was the so-called
power takeoff. This device consisted of a metal shaft that transmitted the engine power
directly to a towed implement such as a reaper through a universal joint or similar
mechanism; in other words, the implement "took off" power from the tractor engine.
An early question was whether the PTO speed should be keyed to ground speed or engine
speed. In 1925, experience in rice-producing states demonstrated the wisdom of linking PTO
speed, to engine speed. The rice crop was heavy and traction was poor, but the grain binders
could run at full speed while travel speed was reduced to accommodate the heavy crop. In
1926, ASAE adopted the first PTO standard that specified the direction, speed, size, shape
and location of the PTO shaft. The first standard speed was 536 rpm, which got rounded-off
to 540 rpm. Later, when power demands rose, the 1000 rpm PTO was developed. The John
Deere Company followed in 1927 with a power lift that raised and lowered hitched
implements at the end of each row—a time- and labor-saving breakthrough. Engineers in the
1930s came up with diesel engines, which provided more power at a lower cost.
6 www.AgriMoon.Com
IV. Hydraulic System:
Irish mechanic Harry Ferguson developed a tractor that incorporated an innovative

hydraulic draft control system, which raised and lowered attached implements—such as
tillers, mowers, post-hole diggers, and plows are automatically adjust their needed depth.In
1917, Henry Ford had formed a company (Ford and Son) separate from his automobile
business to manufacture farm tractors (Wendell, 1979). Their Fordson tractor was
manufactured and sold until 1928, at which point Ford & Son was merged back into the Ford
Motor Company. The David Brown Company in England was the first to build the tractor,
but Ferguson also claim it to Henry Ford in the United States. With a handshake agreement,
Ford manufactures Ferguson‘s tractor and implements from 1939 to 1948. The three point
hitch was developed by Harry Ferguson by 1935, after 17 years of experimentation. In 1936;
he began selling a light tractor equipped with the hitch in the British Isles and Norway. The
Ferguson system included an automatic draft control system that was very effective. In 1938,
Ferguson demonstrated his tractor to Henry Ford in the U.S. (Gray 1954b). A few years later
Ferguson‘s company merged with Canadian company Massey-Harris to form Massey-
Ferguson.
Tractor sales continued to climb, peaking in 1951, when about 0.8 million tractors were sold
in the United States.Pulled and powered by tractors, an increasingly wide variety of farm
implements were mechanizing just about every step in the crop-growing process, from seed
preparation, planting of seed to the harvesting of the final seed/fruit.
Equally important developments were occurring on the other side of the hitch system. Until
the three-point hitch standard was developed by ASAE in 1959, each tractor producer had a
different method of attaching implements to their tractors. Typically, it was difficult or
impossible to mount one manufacturer's implements on another manufacturer's tractor. A
decade later, Henry Ford was ready to re-enter the farm tractor business. He liked Ferguson's
three-point hitch and entered into a verbal agreement to manufacture tractors equipped with
it. These Model 9N tractors entered the market in 1939 when a dispute ended the verbal
agreement in 1946, Ford formed the Dearborn Motors Company to produce Ford tractors.
Harry Ferguson began producing his Ferguson tractor at a new Ferguson Park plant in
Detroit. In 1953, Ferguson‘s company merged with Massey Harris and production of the
Massey Ferguson tractor began (Wendell, 1979). In the early 1950, Oliver introduced a three
point hitch without draft control.
After ASAE developed their three point hitch standard in 1959, most other tractor
manufacturers adopted it, as a result, it became possible to use the implements produced by
any manufacturers on nearly any tractor. Development of the three point hitch also spurred
the trend to larger average farm sizes. Implements fully mounted over roadways at higher
speeds on road than would have been possible with pull type implements.
Open-center hydraulic systems include a fixed-displacement pump supplying an actuator

through a tandem-center directional-control valve. Such systems are inexpensive and
function well with a single actuator. When more than one actuator is used, the system
pressure rises to that of actuator with the lowest pressure demand, which could create
problems. International Harvester Company (IHC) in 1960, developed a sickle bar mower
powered by a hydraulic motor. In a field test, the mower worked well in cutting heavy grass
7 www.AgriMoon.Com
until the operator raised the hitch, at which point the mower stalled. The hitch lift cylinder
had a lower pressure demand than the hydraulic motor powering the mower. Thus, the
hydraulic fluid took the path of least resistance and stopped flowing to the hydraulic motor.
The phenomenon is called sequencing, i.e., when two actuators have different pressure
demands, the one with the heavier demand has to wait until the one with the lighter demand
stops receiving hydraulic fluid. Over the years, improved hydraulic systems were developed.
When John Deere introduced their "New Generation of Power‖ in 1960, they introduced a
constant-pressure system featuring a 'variable-displacement pump that adjusted its stroke to
maintain constant system pressure at a level designed to handle the heaviest load. The
constant pressure systems were later succeeded by load-sensing systems. These systems
include a variable-displacement pump in which a stroke control valve senses the highest
pressure demand in the system and increases the pump stroke enough to meet that demand.
Constant pressure and load-sensing system work, if the total fluid demand can be supplied
by the pump operating at part stroke. With the touch of a lever, the operator can now control
the movement of very heavy loads. When coupled with electronic system, hydraulic systems
also enable automatic control of steering and other functions, control that would have been
very difficult to provide without hydraulics.
V. Fuels:
One advantage of using draft animals was that farmers could grow their own "fuel," i.e., feed
for the animals. With tractors, it was necessary to buy the fuel. Between 1900 and 1960,
gasoline was the predominant fuel, with kerosene (the Rumely Oil Pull was the most notable
of this kind) and ethanol being common alternatives. Generally, one engine could burn any
of those, although cold starting was easiest on gasoline. Often, a small auxiliary fuel tank was
available to hold gasoline for cold starting and warm-up, while the main fuel tank held
whatever fuel was most convenient or least expensive for the particular farmer. Dieselisation
gained momentum starting in the 1960s, and modern farm tractors usually employ diesel
engines, which range in power output from 18 to 575 horsepower (15 to 480 kW). Size and
output are dependent on application, with smaller tractors used for lawn mowing,
landscaping, orchard work, and truck farming, and larger tractors for vast fields of rice,
wheat, maize, soybean and other crops.
Diesel engines made an early appearance about 1930, but the required precision-made fuel
metering parts made them too expensive for most farm tractors and starting was also a
problem. Diesel powered tractors usually included a small, gasoline-powered "pony" motor
to crank the diesel engine. Minneapolis-Moline introduced their Model U diesel tractor in
1952. The International Harvester Company (IHC) Model MD tractor used a unique starting
system. A spark plug for each cylinder was in a small auxiliary chamber linked through a
third valve to the main chamber.
Opening this cam-operated valve reduced the compression ratio and allowed the engine tn
be started on gasoline supplied via a carburettor: the valve was closed and the carburettor
bypassed to switch to diesel operation. Diesels steadily gained market share in the 1950s, and
virtually all new tractors since 1976 have had diesel engines. Electrical systems had
developed enough by that time to allow electric starters to replace pony motors. Diesel
engines provide much higher fuel efficiency than gasoline engines. The switch to diesels had
a letter effect on biofuels development, when farmers again began to grow fuel. Ethanol is
8 www.AgriMoon.Com
not a suitable fuel for typical, unmodified compression-ignition (Cl) engines. The biofuel
developed for Cl engines are calledbiodiesel, the subject of a recent ASABE lecture (Van
Gerpcn et al., 2007).
VI. Safety Features:
Around 1985, it became mandatory to fit tractors with 'roll over protection structures' to
lessen the high risk of fatal injury if the tractor rolled over.This basic design has remained
unchanged for a number of years, but enclosed cabs are being fitted now on modern models,
for reasons of operator safety and comfort.
VII. Recent Advances:
After 1994, space technology has been incorporated into agriculture in the form of GPS
devices, and robust on-board computers installed as optional features on farm tractors. These
technologies are used in modern, precision farming techniques. The spin-offs from the space
race have actually facilitated automation in plowing and the use of light bar or autosteer
systems on tractors, the idea being to neither overlap and use more fuel nor any missing
when performing jobs such as cultivating. Global Positioning System (GPS) receivers on
tractors to record precise locations on their farms to determine which areas need particular
quantities of water, fertilizer, and pesticides.
9 www.AgriMoon.Com
Lesson 2. Different Type of Tractors Available in India/abroad & it’sImportance in

Agriculture
1. Introduction
There are evidences of the revolution in agriculture brought by mechanization. Beginning

with the internal combustion (IC) engines and moving on to rubber tires. Mechanization also
improved the farm implements designed for planting, harvesting, and threshing. At the end
of 20thcentury, precision agriculture became the practice, combining the farmer's down-to-
earth know-how with space-based technology. Now a days tractor is the major farm power
source used Worldover for different farm operations.
The name tractor came from Latin word ―trahere‖ means to pull and latter became one word
from combination of traction + motor. Tractor is a wheeled or tracked self-
propelledengineering vehicle specifically designed to deliver a high tractive effort (or torque)
at slow speeds as well as for the purposes of hauling a trailer or machinery used in
agriculture or construction. Most commonly, the term is used to describe a farm vehicle that
provides the power and traction to mechanize agricultural operations. Agricultural
implements may be towed behind or mounted with the tractor and the tractor may also
provide a source of power through power takeoff (PTO) or belt pulley,if the agricultural
machinery is stationary.
This basic design has remained unchanged for a number of years, but enclosed cabs are being
fitted now on modern models, for reasons of operator safety and comfort.
2. Development
The tractor evolved in the second half of the 19th century and first half of the 20th into its
present, conventional, two wheel drive form and four wheel drive variation. This form owes
much to history but also the fact that it is an inherently logical arrangement. Designers
followed early tractor designs that were simply replacements for horses or other draught
animals. The layout takes advantage of the transfer of weight to the main driving wheels at
the rear, as the drawbar pull on the tractor increases. The layout is inherently stable in the
horizontal plane because the implement commonly being pulled behind the tractor tends to
follow the latter and to pull it into straight line operation. Rear mounted implements offer a
minimum offset loading and moment in the horizontal plane; this contrasts with side
mounted implements.
I. Type of Tractors Available in India/Abroad
Farm Tractors are classified as Follows;
10 www.AgriMoon.Com
(A). According to use, modern farm tractors are classified in three groups:
1. General purpose (land utility) tractors
General purpose or land utility tractors are used for major farm operations, which are
common to the cultivation of most crops, such as tillage, harrowing, sowing and harvesting.
These tractors are characterized by a low ground clearance, increased engine power and
good traction due to their wide tyres or tracks enabling them to develop a high pull.
2. Universal row crop (row crop utility) tractors
Row-crop tractors are for the inter-cultivation operations of crops sown in rows. Inter-
cultivation can take place anytime from crop germination to harvest. Several rounds of
cultivation may be done over the season. A row-crop tractor essentially brings together a
farm tractor and its cultivator into one machine, The earliest tractors were to mechanize
agriculture to reduce the heavy efforts of plowing and harrowing before planting, which was
done by humans and draft animals. Early tractors were used mainly to alleviate this
drudgery, but they tended to be very big and heavy, so were not well-suited in getting into a
field of already-planted row crops for weeding, spraying etc. Row-crop tractors are generally
light, affordable and reliable with more ground clearance and wide wheel track that can be
adjusted to suit the particular inter row distance. Modern row crop tractors have rollover
protection systems in the form of a reinforced cab or a roll bar for better safety.
3. Special purpose tractors
Special purpose tractors are modification of standard land or row crop utility tractor models
and are used for definite or special crops/jobs (e.g. in cotton, garden, orchard, vineyard
fields) or for various jobs under certain conditions (e.g. on marshy soils, hillsides). The
agricultural tractor is sometimes modified for use under special conditions where the
standard type is not suitable. The narrower tractor is a basic small tractor which has been
modified to pass through the rows of orchard trees and vineyards. The high clearance tractor
is usually a standard tractor which has high ground clearance for spraying, fertilizer
broadcasting and other operations at later stage of crop growth. High clearance tractor with
air conditioner cab was developed by the PAU, Ludhiana for collection of spectral images of
the crop and for intercultural operation in wide row crops (Fig. 2.1). Light, low HP, 4WD
tractors work in paddy field, where the combination of light weight and 4WD is desirable.
Other special purpose tractors provide engine and transmission systems for special purpose-
built machines, such as for pipe laying, drainage and mechanical harvester.
11 www.AgriMoon.Com
Fig. 2:1 High clearance tractor in field
Garden tractors (mini tractors) are small, light weight tractors designed for use in gardens,
orchards and small estates (Fig. 2.2).The engines are generally a one- or two-cylinder petrol
(gasoline) or diesel engines. Typically, diesel-powered garden tractors are larger and heavier-
duty than gasoline-powered unit. Tractors designed for orchards, have features suited to
passing under tree branches easily. These include a lower overall profile; reduced tree-
branch-snagging risk (via under slung exhaust pipes rather than smoke-stack-style exhaust,
and large sheet metal cowlings and fairings that allow branches to deflect and slide off rather
than catch); spark arrestors on the exhaust pipes; and often wire cages to protect the operator
from snags. Recently HMT has also developed a Tranter (Transport + Tractor), which can be
used for farm work as well as for the transport purposes (Fig. 2.3). It‘s having seating
capacity for 5 peoples to sit comfortably during transportation.
Fig. 2.2: Mini tractor for garden/orchard Fig. 2.3: Tranter type of tractor
(B). As per traction unit the tractors are divided into
12 www.AgriMoon.Com
1) Crawler (track laying) type

2) Semi-tracked type
3) Wheeled type
(a) 2 wheeled tractors (Power tillers)

(b) 4 wheeled, 2 wheel driven (2WD) tractors
(c) 4 wheeled, 4 wheel driven (4WD) tractors
(d) 8 wheeled, 8 wheel driven (8WD) tractors
Tracked tractors are equipped with tracks instead of wheels. They are generally used on
farms where soils are difficult to cultivate, such as heavy clays, or where seasons are shorter
and wet conditions predominate. More power can be transmitted to the drawbar than
wheeled tractors. Maintenance costs are however higher than for wheeled tractors. Also,
unlike wheeled tractors, they must be transported from field to field by a 'low loader'.
Recently, a tractor manufacturer designed a high powered, high speed tracked tractor that
runs on rubber tracks and can be driven on the road. This model may make the tracked
tractor more popular in future. Tracked tractors have power ratings of 65-700 HP (48.47-522
kW).
Two wheeled tractors are often called 'walking tractors or power tillers. The small hand held
units with rotary cultivators are usually driven by petrol engines. Larger units are often
coupled to 2 wheeled trailers and driven by diesel engines. Engines of 5-15 horsepower are
common for power tillers. Four wheeled, 2WD tractors are the most common type of tractor.
The two rear wheels are given engine power. The front wheels are much smaller and are
used for steering. Engine power ranges from 25 to 120 HP (18.64 to 89.48 kW). The 4WD
tractor is similar to the 2WD tractors, but all 4 wheels of 4WD tractor are powered for better
traction. The front wheels are half the size of the rear wheels. The 4WD tractors usually have
power ratings of 70 HP (52.2 kW) and above, although some lower horsepower units are
made for special purposes especially in Japan for wet fields. The 8WD tractors are the top of
the range in terms of weight and power. There is lesser soil compaction and wheel slip by
distributing weight and power over 8 wheels. They are articulated in the middle, and an axle
is mounted to each of the jointed halves, with both axles driven. Each axle has 2 dual wheels
at each end, or 4 wheels per axle. 8WD tractors usually have engines of 200 HP (149.14 kW)
or more.
(C). As to the type of undercarriage, tractors are divided into
1) Framed
2) Semi-framed
3) Frame-less
Tractors may be framed, semi-framed or frameless. The body of framed tractors is essentially
a riveted or welded frame, that of semi-framed tractors is made up of two short longitudinal
beams (side members) bolted or welded to the rear axle housing, while in frame less tractors,
the body is formed by bolting together the casings of individual tractor mechanisms.
(D). As indicated by 3-point linkage categories
There are five different hitch sizes, called categories (Table 2.1). The higher category hitches
have sturdier lift arms and larger connector pins. There is some flexibility in the tractor hp at
which one category hitch ends and the next begins.
Table 2.1: Specifications of different categories of three point linkage system
13 www.AgriMoon.Com
Top Link Pin Diameter Lift Arm Pin Diameter

Category Tractor HP (kW)
In mm Inch mm
0 Up to 20 ( 10.44) 5/8 15.88 5/8 15.88
I 20 to 45 (10.44 to 33.56) 3/4 19.05 7/8 22.23
II 40 to 100 (29.82 to 74.57) 1 25.40 1⅛ 28.58
III 80 to 225 (59.65 to 167.78) 1¼ 31.75 1 7/16 26.99
IV 180 to 400 (134.23 to 298.28) and above 13/4 82.55 2 50.80
Category II is most widely used in india, but category I is used for many implements
designed for use with small to medium tractors. Fortunately many mounted implements and
machines are now designed for use with either category I or II tractors and this is point to
note in selecting equipment.
3. Global Variations in Tractors:
 Rice-land tires are used in Japan.
 Power/weight ratios are greater for tractors in Japan.
 Radial-ply tires are common in Europe for better traction.
 Tractors outside of North America have up to four PTO speeds.
 In North America 4WD is used mainly tractors of over 100 kW are mainly used but in
Japan tractors of 10 KW may have front wheel assisted 4WD
 In Europe and Japan, 4WD with front wheels smaller than the rear is common but in
North America all 4WD tractors have equal size wheels
 Crawler tractors are more popular in Europe and UK.
 Power tillers are common in Asia.
4. Future Engine Designs
 CI engine is well established and not likely to be replaced soon.
 Ceramics materials which have high heat resistance as well as anticorrosion and anti-
water properties are likely to be incorporated into designs of the future for increased
operating temperature and reduced wear.
 Look for electric drives for cooling (air and water movement) and lubrication.
14 www.AgriMoon.Com
5. Trends in Tractor Design:
The future tractor design greatly depends on technological and social advancement in
agricultural and economic sector including energy and environmental systems. Tractors
continue to have a greater power/mass ratio, which results in the tractors travelling at a
faster speed, since improvements in traction have not kept pace with the increase in power. It
is also clear that the power output of tractors has continued to increase. The growth however
in power and weight of tractors will probably not continue at the same rate as in the past. The
major reason for limiting the increase in size of future tractors is increase in soil compaction
affecting soil conservation as well as plant growth. However, Gohlich (1984) presents an
excellent discussion on the trends of the tractor design as:
 Total weight reduction of tractor and implements: More emphasis will be concentrated
on reducing the total weight of the tractor implement system in order to minimize the
ground pressure and soil compaction, particularly during seed bed preparation
 Front and rear mounted implements: It will contribute increasingly to better, more
convenient and more economical field operations.
 Lighter tractors will transfer power through PTO: Instead of the standard heavy
tractors of today, for most of the required field operations a lighter, second tractor
power unit with low pressure tires, which would transfer the majority of its power
through the power take off (PTO) rather than through the ground drive may be a
desirable approach on the future farm
 Power transfer will be controlled automatically: The optimization of power transfer

will be facilitated by driver information displays as well as by control circuits that may
eventually over take some of the present manual functions.
 Driver comfort and safety will be improved: The roll-over protection structure (ROPS),
seat belt, AC Cabin etc. will be provided in all future tractors for safety and comfort
of the driver.
 Introduction of information and space technologies systems like GPS devices, and
robust on-board computers installed as optional features on farm tractors. These
technologies are used in modern, precision farming techniques. Use of light bar or
auto-steer systems on tractors, the idea being to neither overlap and use more fuel nor
leave streaks when performing jobs such as cultivating.
6. Importance of Tractors in Agriculture:
Power availability coupled withother advanced technologies has linear relationship with the
food grain productivity (Fig. 2.4). Power availability varying from 0.60 kW/ha in Orissa state
having food grain productivity of about 1000 kg/ha as compared to the 4000 kg/ha in Punjab
state having a power availability of 3.5 kW/ha. Tractor is the main power source for almost
all agricultural operations. The farm tractor is used for pulling or pushing agricultural
machinery for plowing, tilling, disking, harrowing, planting and similar tasks, can be used
for providing rotary power to implements like rotavator, strip till drill etc. and for
15 www.AgriMoon.Com
transportation. A farm tractor can also be used for stationary purpose like to power a pump
for irrigation, to thresher etc.
Fig. 2.4: Power availability relationship with food grain productivity in India
Although it is able to undertake a multitude of specific tasks at farms, the functions of the
tractor can be reduced to the following (Reece 1971):
(i) The provision of up to full power in the form of a large drawbar pull (compared to the
weight of the tractor) at low speeds. The highly variable loading that occurs in agricultural
operations requires consideration of tractor performance at part load, particularly with
respect to fuel consumption.
(ii) The provision of power for driving and control of a range of implements and machines
performing various tasks and attached in a variety of ways.
(iii) The provision of power as the basis for a transport system in both on- and off-road
conditions.
16 www.AgriMoon.Com
Lesson 3. Recent Trends in Tractor Design
1. Introduction
Withall the developments in the last hundred years, most tractors today still look much like
small steam traction engines. The growth, however in power and weight of tractors will
probably not continue at the same rate as in the past. The reason for limiting the increase in
size of future tractors is due to increase in soil compaction affecting soil conservation as well
as plant growth. The future will see more sophisticated tractors with greater reliability,
manoeuvrability, comfort, and safety. Gradual evolution in design is more likely than radical
change. Currently, more number of speeds with faster highway towing speeds, comfort,
safety, more information systems are being developed for tractors. The modernfarm tractor
has become a marvel of engineering with features that would be beyond the imaginations of
early tractor designers. How could they have imagined a future operator sitting in an air
conditioned cab, using an internet-connected computer to check crop prices while a GPS
signal guided the tractor across the field. Further, the tractor has transformed agriculture.
Modern tractor is made up of different systems. System wise recent trends in tractor design
are explained below,
I. Power Generation System i.e. Engines:
Average power of tractor used in India is 35 HP (26.10 kW), but trend in the tractor
manufacturing is that average power of the tractor is increasing. Piston engine is not likely to
be replaced immediately with other types of energy conversion systems. Most of the tractor
engines in India are designed with 2 to 4 cylinders. New engines for current tractor models
contain changes or modifications made by improvement in design, fuels or materials to make
it more efficient, economical, more durable with low exhaust emissions. Some major
principles set by the French engineer for an IC engine that combustion chamber should have
smallest possible surface to volume ratio, expansion process should be rapid and
compression at the start of expansion should be as high as possible must be strictly followed.
Average tractor engine bore ratio in India is about 1.33. There is the tendency to further
reduce this stroke bore ratio hence recent engines have a smaller stroke bore ratio which
allows higher engine speeds, running in more compact size and reduced vibrations.
II. Transmission:
A modern tractor drive train is a complex arrangement of several basic components that are
used to control and transmit the power delivered by the engine. Most older farm tractors use
a manual transmission. They have several gear ratios, typically three to six, sometimes
multiplied into two or three ranges. This arrangement provides a set of discrete ratios that,
combined with the varying of the throttle, allow final-drive speeds from less than one to
about 40 km/h, with the lower speeds used for working the land and the highest speed used
17 www.AgriMoon.Com
on the road. Tractor manufacturers are giving more attention so that there should be more
number of speeds available on their models. In most of the Indian tractors, now available
speeds are 8 or 10 (4/5 low + 4/5 high) forward with 2 reverse speeds instead of 4 or 6
forward speeds used previously. When a limited number of speeds are available on the
tractor, it will not be possible to use the maximum engine power available, especially when
the load is highly variable. Hence, the tractor should be provided specific speeds and the ease
with which these speeds can be selected are the most important features determining that
how well the transmission meets the farmer's needs. Ideally any forward speed upto 40
kmph and 15 kmph reverse speed could be selected under any load with a simple adjustment
of a control lever. Previously, Tractors were with only sliding or constant mesh type gear
boxes with few speeds in their transmission systems. But, now some manufacturers have
incorporated partially synchronized or fully synchronized type gear boxes with many speeds
for their tractors. Consequently, the transmission is a compromise between what is designed
and what can be provided with available technology at a reasonable cost. Unsynchronized
transmission designs were replaced with synchronization or with continuously variable
transmissions (CVTs). Either a synchronized manual transmission with enough available
gear ratios (often achieved with dual ranges, high and low) or a CVT allow the engine speed
to be matched to the desired final-drive speed, while keeping engine speed within the
appropriate speed range for power generation. Fully synchronized gear box technology was
introduced by Bajaj Tempo in their OX-35 & 45 models. The advantage of a synchronized
transmission is that gear changes can be made easily without damaging the transmission,
even when the tractor is moving. In new Holland tractors there is the partially engaged
synchronized gear box in which speed equalization occurs at higher speeds. Optional four
wheel drive (4 WD) technology is also provided by some local manufacturers. Net tractive
coefficient and tractive efficiency are more for a 4 WD tractor than a 2 WD tractor. Hence,
four wheel drive tractors are able to produce more drawbar power. Dual clutch and live PTO
are now common for the Indian tractors.
III. Chassis Design
Present non-cab design of Indian tractor generally make use of the cast iron unit frame
construction. Chassis of the tractor consists of the engine, transmission system, suspension
system, road wheels, steering, brakes etc. suitably mounted. Application of power systems, to
drastically reduce control efforts, for brakes and steering used in tractors. Hence, instead of
disc brakes available in many tractors, now hydraulic brakes are introduced in HMT 7511
and oil immersed brakes are used in the OX model of Bajaj Tempo. Hydraulic braking system
are simple in construction, self-lubricating type with equal braking effort at all the wheels.
There are complete water sealed brakes in HMT range of tractors suitable for paddy fields. In
most of the Indian tractor models, reciprocating ball and nut type steering system was
provided. Optional power steering/hydrostatic steering is also now provided by many
manufacturers of India. Generally, the power steering system provides automatic hydraulic
assistance to the turning effort applied to the manual steering system.
Eicher tractors introduced straight rear axle in one of their model. To increase the driver's
comfort and convenience operator's seat was improved in many ways. The vehicle seat
should be adjusted to provide the operator with an easy control of the steering mechanism.
Deluxe and Rail Fender type seats with horizontal and vertical adjustments are now being
provided by all of the tractor manufacturers. Some research studies had shown that the
18 www.AgriMoon.Com
predominant vibrational motion of a wheel tractor is vertica1 and that the seated operator is
most sensitive to vertica1 acceleration. Hence, M&M ltd. has introduced shock absorbing
type suspension system to reduce the vertical vibration for tractor seat.
IV. Hydraulic Systems:
The agricultural tractor is only one half of a machine combination and cannot start to solve its
purpose until the other half the implement added. Implement can be added with three point
linkage systems operated hydraulically. The mounted implement, 3-point linkage and
hydraulic draught controls pioneered by Ferguson are the fundamental to most of the
world's tractors.The ford 9N tractor with the Ferguson three-point hitch, introduced in 1939,
was equipped with a hydraulic system. Harold Brock, at the age of 93 reported on his
experiences in working with Henry Ford, to develop the hydraulic system on the Ford 9N at
the ASABE centennial celebration in Minneapolis.There is a continuous improvement in the
hydraulic system of a tractor. Now a day, Automatic Depth and Draft Control (ADDC)
system is available on all the recent models introduced by Indian manufacturers of a tractor.
Bosch type control valve has been used in the hydraulic system of the OX-35 &45 models of
the Bajaj Tempo.
V. Traction Improvements:
Because the drawbar is one of the most used but least efficient methods of using tractor
power, traction has been the subject of much research, resulting in traction improvements.
Pneumatic tires improved traction by allowing drawbar power to be developed with more
speed and less pull. Added ballast reduces slip in drive wheels. When pneumatic tires were
introduced in the 1930s, B.F. Goodrich discovered that use of water in the tires helped
improve traction (Gray, 1954b) and calcium chloride was added to prevent freezing. Radial
introduced on tractors in 1980s, tolerate lower inflation pressure and provide a bigger soil-
tire footprint to improve traction. In addition, use of mounted implements rather than pull-
type implements helps increase the loading on the drive wheels, thus improving traction.
Traction limits the amount of drawbar power that can be delivered by tractors driven by only
rear wheels. In 1958, the Steiger tractor with four-wheel drive (4WD) and 175 kW of engine
power was introduced (Larsen, 1981), and soon other companies also began producing 4WD
tractors. These were unsuitable for row crop work, but in 1979, IH announced their 2+2
tractor that was a 4WD tractor capable of row crop work (Larsen, 1981). While production of
4WD tractors continues, a movement has begun toward rear wheel drive tractors
supplemented with front wheel assist (FWA). The Europeans were offering FWA in the
1950s, with FWA in the American market coming later. Initially, the front wheels were driven
hydrostatically, but this quickly gave way to mechanical FWA.
Crawler tractors, i.e. tractors with steel tracks, have excellent traction but have had limited
success in agriculture because of their limited mobility and travel speed. They cannot be
driven on highways. In 1987, Caterpillar introduced their Challenger tractor. Its rubber tracks
allowed the high, ground contact area of a crawler tractor with the mobility of a wheeled
tractor. In 1997, John Deere introduced a similar rubber-tracked tractor. Caterpillar sold their
Challenger line of tractor to AGCO in 2002.
19 www.AgriMoon.Com
The steel wheels and lugs of early tractors greatly limited travel speed. Because drawbar
power is the product of pull and speed, these tractors needed a lot of mass to support high
pull and appreciable drawbar power. The first reported use of rubber tires on tractors was in
Florida orange grooves; steel lugs were damaging tree roots, so tire casings were attached to
the wheels to protect the roots. These tires had no tubes i.e., were not pneumatic (Gray,
1954b).
The higher speeds permitted by pneumatic tires helped to transform agriculture, in that
higher speed allowed the average farm size to grow much larger. Thus, when farmers
wanted to increase the size of their farming operations, they could include land parcels so
widely separated that reaching them with steel lugged tractors would have been impractical
with average farm size thus increasing, fewer people remained in farming operations, a trend
that was accelerated by the use of pneumatic tires on farm tractors.
VI. Comfort and Safety:
Early tractors were not known for comfort and safety. For example, starting one of these
tractors usually required turning a hand crank at the front of the tractor or spinning a
flywheel at the side of the tractor. If the tractor was inadvertently left in gear and started
easily, the-person starting the engine could suddenly find himself standing directly in front
of a moving, tractor, with his life on the line. Tractor seats were typically of the steel pan
type, with no cushioning. The logic of tractor controls varied from manufacturer to
manufacturer. Some tractors had a. foot-operated clutch, while other clutches were hand-
operated. Even hand-operated clutches differed; some were engaged by pushing them
forward, while others were engaged by pulling them backward. An operator, moving from
one tractor to another, could easily become confused and get into life-threatening situations.
The tractor PTO, if unshielded, was also dangerous. There have been numerous press reports
of injury or death when people became entangled in unshielded PTO shafts. The danger was
recognized early on when, in 1926, PTO Standard S203 was developed. It included a section
on shielding the PTO shaft. Unfortunately, the metal cover shielding the PTO line between
the tractor and implement was often discarded by farmers. It was not until decades later that
the driveline safety shield was made an integral part of the driveline: and could not be
discarded.
In US, tractor-related injuries account for approximately 32% of the fatalities and 6% of the
nonfatal injuries in agriculture. Over 50% is attributed to tractor overturns. Early tractor
owners were not enthusiastic about comfort and safety features. As Larsen (1981) pointed
out, "If a farmer placed a pad on the seat or raised an umbrella to protect himself from the
sun, he was generally viewed as a sissy." Consequently, tractor manufacturers gave little
thought to operator comfort. The Minneapolis-Moline Comfort tractor was likely the first to
cater to operator comfort. Its enclosed cab was designed to protect the operator from rain,
snow, and cold weather. When that tractor was introduced in 1938, few farmers were willing
to pay for the added cost of the enclosed cab, and not many Comfort tractors were sold.
Extension agricultural engineers developed scale-model tractors that could be used to show
how tractors could upset when used improperly (Larsen, 1981). When John Deere introduced
their New Generation of Power in 1960, the tractors included numerous comfort and safety
20 www.AgriMoon.Com
features. Dr. Janet Travell, personal physician to President John Kennedy, helped Deere
design the tractor seat. In addition, the location and operation of tractor controls were
designed to reduce operator error. The control logic to achieve that result is stated in ASABE
Standard S335, Operator Controls on Agricultural Equipment, i.e., "This standard is based on
the principle that a given direction of movement of any control should provide a consistent
and expected result." Thus, for example, moving a throttle lever forward should increase, not
decrease, the engine speed. ASABE has two other related documents that help- tractor safety.
These are S304, Graphical Symbols for Operator Controls and Displays on Agricultural
Equipment (first adopted in 1967), and EP443, Color Coding Hand Controls (first adopted in
1984). The symbols are designed to be widely understood. For example, the turtle symbol is
used to indicate SLOW, while the rabbit symbol indicates FAST. In color coding, for example,
red is used only for single function engine stop controls. While John Deere was cited as an
introducer of numerous comfort and safety features in 1960, other tractor manufacturers
were also adding such features about the same time.
Row crop tractors necessarily have a high center of gravity, so overturns can easily occur. In
the late 1960s, work was underway in Sweden on what became Roll Over Protective
Structures (ROPS), (Larsen, 1981). ROPS was highly effective in preventing fatal overturn
accidents. Initially, ROPs was offered as an option, but when John Deere introduced ROPS as
standard equipment 'on their tractors, farmers went looking elsewhere for new tractors. The
situation changed when John Deere offered their technology to other companies in exchange
for an agreement to install ROPS on their tractors, and farmers began to accept tractors with
ROPS (LeffingweIl, 1994): While ROPS began as a roll bar, ROPS strength was later
incorporated into tractor cabs. The independent left and right wheel-braking augments the
steering of the tractor when only the two rear wheels are driven. This is usually done when it
is necessary to make a sharp turn. The split brake pedal is also used in mud or soft soil to
control a tire spinning due to loss of traction. The operator presses both pedals together to
stop the tractor. For tractors with additional front-wheel drive, this operation often engages
the 4-wheel locking differential (diff-lock) to help stop the tractor when traveling at road
speeds.
Modern tractors have a ROPS to prevent an operator from being crushed if the tractor turns
over. The ROPS does not prevent tractor overturns; rather, it prevents the operator from
being crushed during an overturn. This is especially important in open-air tractors, where the
ROPS is a steel beam that extends above the operator's seat. For tractors with operator cabs,
the ROPS is part of the frame of the cab. A ROPS with enclosed cab further reduces the
likelihood of serious injury because the operator is protected by the sides and windows of the
cab.
For the ROPS to work as designed, the operator must stay within its protective frame. This
means the operator must wear the seat belt; not wearing it may defeat the primary purpose
of the ROPS.
A fifth pedal is traditionally included just in front of the driver's seat to operate the rear
differential lock (diff-lock), which prevents wheel slip. The differential normally allows the
outside wheel to travel faster than the inside wheel during a turn. However, in low-traction
conditions on a soft surface, the same mechanism could allow one wheel to slip, further
reducing traction. The diff-lock overrides this, forcing both wheels to turn at the same speed,
21 www.AgriMoon.Com
reducing wheel slip and improving traction. Care must be taken to unlock the differential
before turning, usually by hitting the pedal a second time, since the tractor with good traction
cannot perform a turn with the diff-lock engaged. In modern tractors, this pedal is replaced
with an electrical switch.
VII. Levers and switches:
Many functions once controlled with levers have been replaced with some model of electrical
switch with the rise of indirect computer controlling of functions in modern tractors.
The three-point hitch was controlled with a lever for adjusting the position, or as with the
earliest ones, just the function for raising or lowering the hitch. With modern electrical
systems, it is often replaced with a potentiometer for the lower bound position and another
one for the upper bound, and a switch allowing automatic adjustment of the hitch between
these settings.
VIII. GPS/Navigation:
Space does not permit inclusion of many other parts of tractor history. Among the important
omissions are lubrication systems, air cleaner, and numerous drive train variation, Other
tractor improvements loom on the horizon, and only two will be mentioned. Automatic
tractor guidance based on the Global Positioning System (GPS) and/or machine vision, is
nearing commercial reality. In Europe, work is underway on tractors with spring-mounted
cabs and/or axles to protect the operator when the tractor is used at high speeds, and such
tractors are also entering the U. S. market.
The modernfarm tractor (Fig. 3.1) has become a marvel of engineering with features that
would be beyond the imaginations of early tractor designers.
22 www.AgriMoon.Com
(Source:http://images4.wikia.nocookie.net/__cb20120621203660/tractors/images/2/2e/VT
Z_504_MFWD_ (Foton) _-_2012.jpg)
Fig. 3.1 Modern farm tractor
(Source: http://daddystractor.com/category/social-studies/page/2/)
How could they have imagined a future operator sitting in an air conditioned cab, using an
internet-connected computer to check crop prices while a GPS signal guided the tractor
across the field? Further, the tractor has transformed agriculture. It has so improved worker
productivity that now less than 2% of the U. S. population are needed to be farmers.
23 www.AgriMoon.Com
Module 2. Study of special design features of tractor engines and their selection
Lesson 4. Selection of engines available in the market and their performance
1. Introduction
Many sizes and types of engines are available for automobiles including engine for tractors.
Selection of engine for automobiles depends mainly upon their uses. Engine used for on-
road vehicles like car, trucks etc. are different than the engines used for off-road vehicles like
tractors. Main emphasis will be given on the design requirement of different components of
the engine and selection of engines for the tractors. Design of each part of an engine for a
tractor is out of the preview of this book.
2. Difference between tractor and automobiles:
Automobile engines are generally unsuitable for tractors due to the difference in uses of both
vehicles. The main design differences between tractors and automobiles are explained in
Table 4.1.
Table 4.1: Main design differences between tractor and automobile:
Parameter Automobile Tractor
Designed for high torque and the

Designed to produce maximum power the engine
Engine type engine is expected to be able to
will produce at the best speed.
produce it for longer times.
Functional Designed for Speed (Maximum Speed Designed for Brake Power or Traction (Maximum
Design of 5000 RPM) Speed of 2500 RPM)
Surface of Hard Surface like concrete being on- Soft and undulated terrain of soil being off-road
Operation road vehicle vehicle
There is weight transfer from front to rear wheels

Weight No weight transfer being Single part
being 2-3 parts system (tractor-hydraulic unit-
transfer system
implement or tractor-straw reaper-trailer)
Type of Fuel Diesel or Petrol Mostly Diesel engine or Biodiesel
Working
Better environmental conditions Harsh conditions like dust etc.
conditions
All four wheels may or may not be same specially

Wheels All four wheels of same size
small HP tractors
24 www.AgriMoon.Com
3. Engine Selection:
Mostly four stroke cycle diesel engines are used for the tractors. An engine produces power
by providing a rotating crankshaft which can exert a given amount of torque on a particular
load and speed. The amount of torque the engine can exert usually varies with speed. Torque
is defined as a force around a given point, applied at a radius from that point. The unit of
torque is kg-m. To better understand, let us take an example, two cars of equal weight, one is
having a 2-liter twin-cam engine that makes 300 HP (223.71 kW) at 8000 RPM (27 kg-m) and
400 HP (298.28 kW) at 10,000 RPM (29 kg-m) will run faster as compared to a 5-liter engine
that makes 300 HP (223.71 kW) at 4000 RPM (54 kg-m) and 400 HP (298.28 kW) at 5000 RPM
(58 kg-m). In fact, in cars of equal weight, the smaller engine will race better because it's
much lighter, therefore puts less weight on the front end. and, in reality, the car with the
lighter 2-liter engine will likely weigh less than the big V8-powered car, so will be a better
race car for several reasons.
4. Tractor vs. Automobile Engine:
 Tractor engines tend to have longer stroke as compared to bore - than a car or pickup
truck engine. Long stroke allows good low-end torque.
Tractor engines are designed for the highest torque at low RPM's or tractors have high
torque for a given horsepower or tractor produce their rated horsepower at low rpm.
An auto engine might make its max rated hp at 4500 rpm where-as a tractor engine
makes its max power at anywhere from 975 to 2200 rpm. Although, once it gets to the
rear wheels, the engine torque is irrelevant because gear reduction has made the
torque at the axle identical for the high rpm/low torque engine as for the low
rpm/high torque engine.
 Tractors are made to sustain max power all day long in the field under load and will
do it for years. If a car engine is run in a tractor‘s field under load at 4500 rpm or
higher if so rated, and see how long it will move. If throttle is put back to 2000 rpm to
make it last then it won't have enough torque to pull through that field or mud.
 A car engine is designed to have great reserve power for just short spurts when
needed it and the rest of the time it "loafs". Tractor engines are made to work all day
and car engines are made to loaf all day unless needed to get through a yellow light or
occasional drag race.
 Torque is a more important part for the loads on a tractor as compared to power
relates to speed in a car engine. A car engine only makes good power at high RPM's.
Different engines use their available horsepower as cars uses only 30%, the road trucks
use 60% and Tractors use 90% of their available power.
 Tractor engines are subjected to usually large and fluctuating loads during most field
operations. The important engine parts including castings like cylinder blocks, heads,
crankshaft, connecting rods, piston, valves and other parts are heavier and stronger
than automotive engines, as in a tractor, weight is not an issue in fact a heavier engine
would add ballast to the machine.
25 www.AgriMoon.Com
 Mostly, tractor engines have replaceable cylinder liners (sleeves) that, theoretically,
allow an engine block to be overhauled an unlimited number of times and on each
overhaul the engine will be brought back to original factory specifications.
 Tractor engine are often part of the tractor frame. They have bolt holes in the side of
the lower front part of the engine block. Some manufacturers attach the front axle
mounting brackets directly to the front of the block, thus eliminating the need of a
frame. Generally smaller tractors are frameless
 A tractor with 4 cylinder engine give 90 HP(67.11 kW) and a car with 2 cylinder engine
give 120 hp. It depends upon the cylinder capacity as more cylinder capacity means
more fuel will enter as more fuel will enter in engine, output will be more. Hence,
bigger size of cylinder will produce more power not the number of cylinders. Suppose
4 cylinders are sucking 50 mg fuel at one stroke and one cylinder consuming 100 mg
will produce more power.
5. Power and Torque for an Engine:
Torque and speed are measured but power is calculated. A dynamometer measures the
power produced by applying a load to the engine output shaft by means of a water brake, a
generator, an eddy-current absorber, or any other controllable device capable of absorbing
power. The dynamometer control system causes the absorber to exactly match the amount of
torque the engine is producing at that instant. Torque and RPM of the engine shaft are
measured and from those two measurements, it calculates observed power. Various factors
like air temperature, barometric pressure, and relative humidity are measured in order to
correct the observed power to be measured at standard atmospheric conditions, called
corrected power.
Force (F) = Torque (T) ÷ Radius (R) ... (4.1)
Distance per revolution = 2 π R
Distance per minute = 2 π R x RPM
Power (P) = F x Distance per minute
P = (T ’ R) x (2 π R .RPM)
P = 2 π T. RPM
As 1 HP = 75 kg-m/sec or 4500 kg-m/min
Or HP = 2 π T. RPM ’ 4500
HP = Torque x RPM ÷ 5252 (Torque is in pounds-ft) (1HP = 33000 pounds-ft/sec)
It means if torque is measured in pounds-ft/sec then HP will be equal to torque at engine

speed of 5252 rpm.
HP = Torque x RPM ÷ 716.5 (Torque is in kg-m) (1 HP =75 kg-m/sec) ... (4.2)

26 www.AgriMoon.Com
But if torque is measured in kg-m then HP will be equal to torque at engine speed of 716.5
rpm
The modern diesel engine for tractor has every advantages as regards convenience of
operation, being a reliable starter, lower fuel consumption and immediately ready for hard
work. Its good torque characteristics‘ are widely appreciated. The measure of tractor‘s power
or capacity for field work are the net engine power and draw bar horse power. The net power
of an engine or tractor is the power that anengine can deliver for the performance of work at
the crankshaft.
6. Power and Torque Curve for an Engine:
For measuring the power developed at various speeds and loads, the engine is first started
with no load, and the speed of the shaft is measured by tachometer. The load is then
increased in stages. At each stage, the speed and the torque are recorded by dynamometer.
Beyond a certain limit, it will be found that additional loads reduce the speed of the engine to
such an extent that it is in the danger of stalling. When this point has been reached, no further
load should be applied. By plotting the values of the power for various speeds or loads, a
curve indicating the maximum power is obtained.
In order to design an engine for a particular application, it is helpful to plot out the optimal
power curve for that specific application, then from that design information, the torque curve
is determined which is required to produce the desired power curve. Typically, the torque
peak will occur at a substantially lower RPM than the power peak. The reason is that, in
general, the torque curve does not drop off (% wise) as rapidly as the RPM is increasing (%
wise). For a race engine, it is often beneficial (within the boundary conditions of the
application) to operate the engine well beyond the power peak, in order to produce the
maximum average power within a required RPM band.
An example of that concept is shown in Fig.4.1. The three dashed lines represent three
different torque curves, each having exactly the same shape and torque values, but with the
peak torque values located at different RPM values. The solid lines show the power
produced by the torque curves of the same color.
27 www.AgriMoon.Com
Fig. 4.1: Power and Torque curve for different engines
Note that, with a torque peak of 587 lb-ft (795.86 N-m) at 3000 RPM, the pink power line
peaks at about 375 HP (375.63 kW) between 3500 and 3750 RPM. With the same torque curve
moved to the right by 1500 RPM {black, 587 lb-ft (795.86 N-m) torque peak at 4500 RPM}, the
peak power jumps to about 535 HP (398.95 kW) at 5000 RPM. Again, moving the same torque
curve to the right another 1500 RPM {blue, 587 lb-ft (795.86 N-m) torque peak at 6000 RPM}
causes the power to peak at about 696 HP ( 519 kW) at 6500 RPM.
Using the black curves as an example, note that the engine produces 500 HP (372.85 kW) at
both 4500 and 5400 RPM, which means the engine, can do the same amount of work per unit
time (power) at 4500 as it can at 5400. However, it will burn less fuel to produce 450 HP
(335.56 kW) at 4500 RPM than at 5400 RPM, because the parasitic power losses (power
consumed to turn the crankshaft, reciprocating components, valvetrain) increases as the
square of the crankshaft speed.
The RPM band within which the engine produces its peak torque is limited. You can tailor an
engine to have a high peak torque with a very narrow band, or a lower peak torque value
over a wider band. Those characteristics are usually dictated by the parameters of the
application for which the engine is intended.
As shown in figure, blue torque curve has been altered (as shown by the green line) so that it
doesn't drop off as quickly. Note how that causes the green power line to increase well
beyond the torque peak. That sort of a change to the torque curve can be achieved by altering
various key components, including (but not limited to) cam lobe profiles, cam lobe
separation, intake and/or exhaust runner length, intake and/or exhaust runner cross section.
Alterations intended to broaden the torque peak will inevitable reduce the peak torque value,
but the desirability of a given change is determined by the application.
28 www.AgriMoon.Com
The torque exerted by an engine is a measure of the moment which it can continuously exert.
For a given gear ratio in the transmission of a tractor, any increase in load on the engine calls
for a corresponding increase in engine torque. If the maximum torque available is
insufficient, the engine will stall. Because tractors are designed to operate in widely varying
load conditions, it is essential for satisfactory performance that maximum torque should be
developed at a lower engine speed than that corresponding to maximum power. Torque and
power curve of a tractor engine are shown in Fig. 4.2. It is indicated that peak torque i.e. 810
lb-ft (1098.21 N-m) of engine was available at an engine speed of 1500 rpm of the engine. But
peak power was 130 hp (96.94 kW) at 2200 rpm of engine, at that speed the torque was 650
pound-ft (881.28 N-m). The peak torque at 1500 rpm is about 25% more as compared to the
torque at peak power position.
Fig.4.2: Power and Torque curve for Tractor Engine
If another engine is having flat torque speed curve having maximum torque only 4% higher
than at maximum power. In the field if 10% overload occurs, the first engine will slow down
and the driver has time to change down to a lower gear if desired, the engine is capable of
taking the tractor. But the second engine will cause the tractor to stall with very little
warning. An engine with a considerable reserve of torque is particularly useful for
agricultural works specially operation of combine/forage harvester, where a troublesome
blockage occurs if the engine stalls.
29 www.AgriMoon.Com
Lesson 5. Design requirements for tractor engine components and systems.
1. Introduction
New engines correspond essentially to current models but contain changes or modifications
made possible by improvement in design, fuels, lubricants or materials. The first step of any
design problem is to select the speed, type, number and size of cylinders and the
arrangement of the cylinders for the required output. The second step is to calculate the sizes
and materials of the parts to withstand the stresses.
As yet, there appears no alternate to the CI engine for tractors and the diesel will continue be
the main source of engine fuel. Piston engine is not likely to be replaced immediately with
other types of energy conversion systems. Tractor engines are designed for a high load factor,
that is, the power output may be 85 to 90% of the maximum brake power at rated speed and
the engine is expected to be able to produce this power for long periods of time.
Most of the tractor engines in India are designed with 2 to 4 cylinders (Table 2). Single-
cylinder engines are now used in large numbers on power tillers or on lawn and garden
tractors. New engines for current tractor models contain changes or modifications made by
improvement in design, fuels or materials to make it more efficient, economical, more
durable with low exhaust emissions. Maximum engine speed for tractor is generally between
between 2000-2500 rpm. Average hp of tractor used in India is 35 hp ( 26.1 kW) but trend in
the tractor manufacturing is that average hp of the tractor is increasing, hence manufacturers
are introducing tractors upto 75 hp (55.93 kW) having displacement volume of about 4000 cc.
with 4 cylinders. In some cases like for larger areas and competitive agricultural conditions
where farmers seeks more power, tractor manufacturers are increasing engine displacement,
use higher engine speeds and other systems to increase power.
2. Stroke-Bore Ratio:
Major principles set by a French Engineer for an IC engine that combustion should have
smallest possible surface to volume ratio, expansion process should be rapid and
compression at the start of expansion should be as high as possible must be strictly followed.
Stroke-bore ratio in engines is a design consideration because higher compression ratios are
generally permissible with small bores and higher thermal efficiencies may be attained with
the higher compression ratios. However, assuming equal compression ratio and
displacement per stroke, a cylinder with a large stroke-bore ratio will have a higher surface to
volume ratio. Obviously, a decrease in the length of the stroke necessitates an increase in the
bore in order to maintain the same displacement. This larger surface ratio permits more heat
transfer to the combustion chamber walls, resulting in a decreasing efficiency. The short
stroke engine having less piston travel has lesser friction. The breathing capacity or
volumetric efficiency of high speed engines can be improved by decreasing the stroke bore
30 www.AgriMoon.Com
ratio, which permits the use of larger or multiple valves. This ratio for tractors tested at
Nebraska in 1982, the average stroke to bore ratio in tractor engines was decreased to 1.01
from 1.29 in the year 1920. Average stroke-bore ratio of the tractor engine in India was about
1.33 in 2001 (Table 2). There is the tendency to further reduce this stroke-bore ratio hence
recent engines have a smaller stroke-bore ratio which allows higher engine speeds, resulting
in more compact size and reduced vibration. One model Swaraj 744 and three models of
Escorts range of tractor viz. Farmtrac 45, 50 & 55 have stroke-bore ratio equal to one (Table 2).
Even in one model of Escort, this ratio is less than one i.e. 0.95. Technology of turbocharging
the engine has also been introduced recently in the Indian tractors.
3. Specific Fuel Consumption (SFC):
Fuel efficiency is becoming an increasingly important factor in farm economics. Obviously,

tractors with the lowest SFC are the most efficient. There is the continuous effort by all the
manufacturers to reduce the SFC for their newly introduced models. Among the six major
players of tractor in India, the Mahindra 575DI has the lowest SFC at max. power i.e. 233
g/kWh. It is clear from the table 2 that wt/power ratio of the tractors in India is being
reduced, which results in the tractors travelling faster, since improvements in traction have
not kept pace with the increase in power. Efforts are needed to improve the traction of the
tractor. Indian manufacturers have vastly improved the weight to power ratio of their prime
mover by either the slimming process on castings derived through CAD/CAM designs or by
change of designs to accommodate higher break mean effective pressures reaching peak
values close to 23 bars.
4. Compression Ratio:
The thermal efficiency of an engine does not approach the theoretical efficiency of an Otto
cycle engine as is given by
... (5.1)
Where
r = Compression ratio
n = Cp/Cv (Ratio of specific heat of air at constant pressure and constant volume)
Hence, it is apparent that the efficiency of an ideal otto cycle increases as the compression
ratio increases.
There are many reasons why the actual efficiency is substantially below the theoretical
efficiency. Some of the discrepancies can be accounted for by the following factors
1. The compression and expansion of gases is not adiabatic
2. There are friction losses in the engine
3. Work is required to draw in and exhaust the gases
31 www.AgriMoon.Com
4. For a free breathing engine (not supercharged) the volumetric efficiency will be less
than 100%
5. Complete combustion does not occur
Large changes in the compression ratio of diesel engines are not practical. Most diesel
engines have compression ratios that range from 16:1 to 22:1
5. Design of Combustion Chamber:
The shape and size of the combustion chamber has a decided effect upon the proper mixing
of the fuel and air and also upon the fuel detonation. In general the combustion chamber is
designed to create turbulence of the mixture for better combustion and greater flame
propagation velocity, thereby decreasing the combustion time and improving antiknock
characteristics. A short and compact combustion chamber generally requires lesser time for
combustion and improves the antiknock characteristics of fuel
There are many variations in the design of combustion chamber of diesel engines fitted in the
tractors. Some variations are due to the different methods of starting the combustion
chamber process in the cylinder. Because the fuel to air ratio is very low as the fuel is first
injected into the cylinder, ignition will not begin until the ratio is in the combustible range.
Thus if the fuel were injected directly into the combustion chamber, there would be an
unnecessarily long delay before ignition begins, resulting in a very high initial pressure.
Four types of combustion chambers are used in diesel engines namely direct injection (DI),
pre, swirl or turbulence and auxiliary combustion chambers. Most common method of diesel
injection is the direct-injection (Dl) in which combustion chamber generally employs a
concave piston head. M&M ltd. has to introduce in tractor engines to increase the thermal
efficiency, results to lower the fuel consumption claimed this method of injection first. In DI
engines there is also tine atomisation of the fuel in the combustion chamber. Two
manufacturers HMT and Eicher have claimed the turbulence or swirl combustion chamber in
their tractor engines. Due to turbulence or swirl action in these type of combustion chamber
there is a greater utilisation of air therefore higher mean effective pressure is attained at the
clean exhaust from the engine. These engines are also called indirect injection (IDI) engines.
IDI engines are also quieter than the DI engines and can be run on fuel with a lower cetane
number. In the swirl combustion chamber, burning of fuel-air mixture is caused by swirl
action thereby improving the mixing and subsequent combustion in the main combustion
chamber. The swirl chamber contains from 50 to 90% of the compressed volume when the
piston is on top dead center (TDC). Eicher ltd. gave the term Ricardo type engines to these
IDI engines, since Ricardo first used that design. With the better swirl control in these
engines, noise level was also reduced in greater extent. Some of the models of different
tractor with their specifications shown in Table 5.1.
6. Fuels:
Almost all of the fuels commonly used in farm tractors are products of crude petroleum.
Crude petroleum is made of combined carbon and hydrogen in approximately the
proportion of 86% carbon and 14% hydrogen. The atoms of carbon and hydrogen may be
combines in many ways to from many different hydrocarbon compounds from crude oil. The
two grades of diesel fuels commonly used in US are Grade No. 1-D and 2-D. Grade no. 1-D
32 www.AgriMoon.Com
diesel fuel is volatile fuel is applicable for use in engines used for relatively wide variations in
loads and speeds. Grade No. 2-D type fuels are lower volatile used for the engine used
relatively at high loads and uniform speeds or in engines not requiring fuels having the
higher volatility. Fuel quality is specified because engine design and operation affect the type
of fuel best suited for an engine.
I. Cetane number:
The ignition quality of diesel fuel is determined by its cetane number/index. In general, high
cetane fuels permit an engine to be started at lower air temperatures, provide faster engine
warm-up without misfiring or producing white smoke, reduce the formation of varnish and
carbon deposits and eliminate diesel knock. Generally diesel fuels marketed in USA have a
range from 33 to 64 cetane numbers but for tractor diesel fuels having 38 to 52 cetane
numbers are generally used.
Proper viscosity or resistance to internal flow of the diesel fuel is required. The injector
pumps perform best when the fuel has proper viscosity. If the viscosity is too low, more
frequent maintenance and repair of injection system may result. If the viscosity is too high,
excessively high pressures may result in the injection system. The desired kinematic viscosity
for diesel fuel is 1.5 (Min) to 4.0 (Max) centistokes at 40o C temperature.
A diesel fuel often has a tendency to form carbon deposits in the engine. Carbon residue tests
are very effective in predicting carbon formation of base fuels, but they may be in error when
the fuels contain additives such as ignition improvers like hexyl nitrates. Carbon residue in
diesel fuel generally ranges from 0.15 to 0.35%.
II. Flash point:
The flash point is not directly related to engine performance. It is however of importance in
connection with legal requirements and safety precautions involved in fuel handling and
storage and is normally specified to meet insurance and fire regulations.
Diesel engine injectors are precision made and therefore are quite sensitive to any abrasive
material in the fuel. Since the ash content is directly related to wear of the injection system, it
must be kept low. Diesel fuel has a maximum allowable ash content of 0.01%.The additives in
diesel fuel are for engine protection and to improve engine performance. Antioxidants, metal
deactivators and corrosion inhibitors are used in diesel fuels.
III. Biodiesel:
As fossil fuels become scarce, other fuels like bio-diesel will have to be used. There are many
factors that must be considered in the selection of an alternative fuel. Some of these factors
are cost per unit of work done, availability, compatibility with the engine, safety, storage,
management and convenience.Biodiesel is a clean, oxygenated fuel made from renewable
agricultural resources such as Jatropha, soybeans, rapeseeds etc.. It is simple to use,
biodegradable, and free of sulfur. Using biodiesel fuel reduces particulate emissions, as well
as decreases dependence on crude oil. It can be used as blend with diesel as B2 fuel (2 percent
biofuel and 98 percent diesel). John Deere has approved B5 fuel for tractor engines and many
other manufacturers in the industry are following the lead. The technical problems often
33 www.AgriMoon.Com
reported include excess carbon deposits on pistons and exhaust valves, fuel filter cogging
and engine oil dilution with the use of plant oils for IC engines. These problems must be
solved before plant oils can become a viable alternative fuel.
IV. Fuel Injection Systems:
Generally three types of fuel injection systems used in tractors are: individual or in-line type,
distributor type and unit injector type (Fig. 5.1). In function the distributor system and inline
or individual pump systems are the same. The difference is that the distributor system
replaces the individual pumps with a single pump plus a distributor rotor. Because of
compact nature of the distributor type pump, its principle of operation is more difficult. The
distributor pump performs the different functions like metering the quantity of fuel
determined by the governor, delivering the fuel at high pressure in the range from 10000 to
20000 kPa to the injectors and timing of the fuel injection that is the function of engine speed.
Unit injector combines the function of high pressure pump and injector into one unit. One
advantage of such a system is that there is no high pressure line to complicate the timing and
metering of the fuel. The unit injector is commonly driven by a separate cam shaft. TAFE
and New Holland have introduced rotary type FI pump in the fuel injection system of their
tractors.
Fig. 5.1: Fuel injection system

(Source: CIGR Handbook of Agricultural Engineering Volume III)
7. Air Cleaning System:
Dust entering a tractor engine is often the principal cause of wear. The location of the air inlet
affects the quantity of dust to be removed by the air cleaner. The dust concentration was
highest near the engine and lowest in the region directly above the engine. For this reason,
tractor designers usually select an air inlet above or near the top of the engine housing. Dry
type and wet type or oil bath type air cleaners are generally used for the tractors (Fig.5.2 and
5.3). Efficiency of dry type air filters exceeds that of the oil bath type. Because a tractor
operates most of the time at less than full load, the relative cleaning efficiency at one half load
is significant. At less than rated airflow the efficiency of the oil bath cleaner tends to decrease,
whereas that of the dry type filter remains high. Almost by all the manufacturers 3-stage air
34 www.AgriMoon.Com
cleaning first by pre-cleaner followed by oil bowl and paper element has been introduced for
tractor engines.
Fig. 5.2: Oil bath type air cleaner
(Source: http://vintagetractorengineer.com/2009/01/oil-bath-air-cleaners-for-tractors/)
Fig. 5.3: Oil bath type air cleaner assembly

(Source: http://www.metlonics.com/images/TRACTOR/L7.jpg)
8. Cooling System:
The proper design and maintenance of a cooling system (Fig. 5.4) are extremely important
because the amount of heat to be dissipated is high. The heat rejected to the cooling water by
a diesel engine at 2000 rpm is approximately 0.58kW for each kW of output. Because a tractor
usually operates at a high load factor, a relatively large cooling capacity must be supplied
compared to that for an automobile. Water flow for the cooling system ranges from 0.7 to 1.4
35 www.AgriMoon.Com
l/kW of engine output and pumps are usually selected to deliver 25 to 90 ml/s per kW. Fan
power is normally 5 % of gross engine power, with a range of 2.5 to 10%. Radiator frontal
areas of 19 to 29 sq.cm/kW engine power output. Temperature drop through the radiator can
be assumed to be 5.5 to 8.5 Degree C.
Fig. 5.4: Cooling system

(Source: http://www.crankshaftcoalition.com/wiki/File:Engine-cooling-system.jpg)
(http://web.utk.edu/~tprather/FoothillsTractorClub/TechTips/cooling.gif)
9. Governing System:
The engine control device is called a governor. The governor can be mechanical or an
electronic device. In general, governors for IC engines are of the centrifugal-force, spring
loaded type.
A good governor for agricultural tractor engines is taken to be one giving performance such
that the difference between no load speed and maximum load speed is less than 100 rpm.
The maximum load and no, load are at maximum governor settings on both sides. As with
the increase of load the crankshaft torque rises to a peak and that maximum torque is
developed at a speed well below governed speed and therefore well below the speed at
which maximum power is obtained. It is an important phenomenon. When the engine is
operating at the full throttle, its speed and power are controlled solely by load and some
reserve is provided by governor in order to cope with sudden increase of load. If at any
particular speed of engine set by the operator, the increase or decrease in load will decrease
or increase the speed is regulated by the governor without changing the gear. But a tractor
fitted with a suitable diesel engine having more than 500 rpm in reserve that is the difference
in maximum power speed and maximum torque speed, will possess good slogging ability.
36 www.AgriMoon.Com
Lesson 6. Engine design changes for emission reduction
1. Introduction
The technology absorption process move towards lower polluting emissions is gathering
momentum with all tractor manufacturers. Three years back Kirloskar started designing and
developing a modem 3-cylinder 100-mm bore engine for Punjab Tractors Ltd. (PTL). The
cost-effective design was tailored to meet the Indian tractor users and satisfy Indian pollution
norms and regulations. Main pollutants coming in engine exhaust gases are Oxides of
Nitrogen (NOx), Carbon mono-oxide (CO), Oxides of Sulfur (SOx), Hydro-carbon (HC) and
Particulate matter (PM). All these pollutants are polluting the environment as;
NOx – Oxides of nitrogen, which react in the atmosphere with hydrocarbons to form
particulate matter
CO – Carbon monoxide, a product of incomplete combustion
SOx – Oxides of sulfur, which contribute to acid rain
HC – Hydrocarbons, another product of incomplete combustion
PM – Particulate matter, a non-gaseous product of combustion and atmospheric reactions
2. Emission Standards:
The different emission norms Bharat (Trem) for stage I, II and III for diesel agricultural
tractors in India are given below in Table 6.1.
Table6.1. Bharat (Trem), Emission standards for diesel agricultural tractors in India
Engine Power CO HC HC+NOx NOx PM

Date
kW g/kWh
All 2005.10 5.5 - 9.5 - 0.80
Bharat (Trem) Stage III A
P<8 2010.04 5.5 - 8.5 - 0.80
8 ≤ P < 19 2010.04 5.5 - 8.5 - 0.80
19 ≤ P < 37 2010.04 5.5 - 7.5 - 0.60
37 www.AgriMoon.Com
37 ≤ P < 75 2011.04 5.0 - 4.7 - 0.40
75 ≤ P < 130 2011.04 5.0 - 4.0 - 0.30
130 ≤ P < 560 2011.04 3.5 - 4.0 - 0.20

Emissions are tested over the ISO 8178 C1 (8-mode) cycle. For Bharat (Trem) Stage III A,the
useful life periods and deterioration factors are the same as for Bharat (CEV) Stage III, Table
6.2.
Table 6.2: Bharat (CEV) stage III with useful life periods
Useful Life Period

Power Rating
Hours
< 19 kW 3000
constant speed 3000

19-37 kW
variable speed 5000
> 37 kW 8000
3. Engine design changes for Emission Reduction:
Reduced emissions don‘t have to come at the expense of engine performance. Engineers
utilize a combination of innovative engine design and new technologies to improve fuel
economy and performance while meeting emissions regulations.Available technologies for
reducing emissions include:
• Charge air cooling
• In-cylinder solutions
• Exhaust gas recirculation
• Turbocharging
• Fuel injection systems
• Full authority electronic controls
• After-treatment
I. Charge air cooling.
Keeping air intake temperatures as low as possible controls NOx. Air-to-air charge air
cooling not only reduces NOx, it also improves engine durability and increases low-speed
torque and power density. It is the most efficient method of cooling intake air to help reduce
38 www.AgriMoon.Com
engine emissions while maintaining low-speed torque, transient response time, and peak
torque. Charge air cooling enables an engine to meet emissions with better fuel economy and
lower installed costs.
II. In-cylinder solutions.
i. Combustion bowl and piston ring design.
Particulate emissions have been reduced by increasing injection pressure and improving the
shape of the combustion bowl at the top of the piston. A reduced lip radius on the re-entrant
bowl piston increases turbulence and air fuel mixing, helping burn all available fuel during
combustion. The addition of valve guide seals limits particulates by reducing oil
consumption. Directed top-liner cooling reduces oil consumption and enhances combustion
efficiency by reducing wear in the top ring turnaround area and improve piston ring
performance.
ii. Premixed compression ignition (PCI).
In traditional diesel combustion, the burning occurs in the rich regions of the spray resulting
in high temperatures and high NOx. With premixed compression ignition (PCI), multiple
fuel injection strategies are used to lower temperatures. This technique reduces NOx without
using exhaust gas recirculation.
iii. Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR).
The lower an engine‘s peak combustion temperature, lesser the amount of NOx created. EGR
is an effective method of reducing peak combustion temperature and reducing NOx. The
concept is simple, during certain conditions of engine operation, the EGR valve opens and
measured amounts of exhaust gas are routed back into the intake manifold and mixed with
the incoming fresh air. Since this process removes some oxygen from the air, the exhaust
temperatures in the combustion process are lowered and the levels of NOx are reduced.
Cooled EGR, as used in John Deere Power Tech Plus™ engines, increases the effectiveness of
NOx reduction, while enhancing engine efficiency and power density (similar to charge air
cooling).
III. Turbocharging.
i. Standard or wastegated turbocharger.
A turbocharger is an engine supercharger driven by exhaust gas turbine. Exhaust gases from
the engine enter the turbine housing radially and drive the turbine wheel, which drives the
compressor wheel. Both being mounted on the same shaft. Turbocharging increases the
density of the air delivered to the cylinder thus making its volumetric efficiency 100% well
above that available in natural aspiration. It allows the engine to burn more fuel and in turn
develop more power.
Depending on the power rating, standard or wastegated turbochargers are precisely matched
to the power level and application. Transient smoke is controlled by using higher-boost
39 www.AgriMoon.Com
turbochargers, including using wastegated turbos that increase low-speed torque and
prevent over-boosting at high speed.
ii. Variable geometry turbocharger (VGT).
Variable geometry turbocharger, which helps drive exhaust gas recirculation. The VGT
tailors the amount of recirculated exhaust gas that mixes with the fresh air. This is
accomplished through the engine control unit, which changes the pitch of the VGT vanes in
order to maximize power and efficiency. The amount of cooled EGR required is determined
by load and engine speed. When the exhaust flow is low, the vanes are partially closed. This
increases the pressure against the turbine blades, making the turbine spin faster and
generating more boost.
The VGT minimizes the impact on engine envelope size and provides excellent performance
across the entire operating range of the engine, including transient response and fuel
economy. It is also a highly effective approach to meeting Stage III A regulations and allows a
wider power range using common engine performance hardware — reducing the number of
engine configurations.
IV. Fuel injection systems.
i. High-pressure common rail fuel injection system.
For middle range engines, the high-pressure common rail fuel injection system provides
constant control over fuel injection variables such as pressure, timing, duration, and multiple
injections. It delivers higher injection pressures, up to 1600 bar, for more efficient combustion.
ii. Electronic unit injector (EUI).
For the larger size engines, the EUI fuel injection system is used to increase fuel pressure for
more efficient combustion. This helps reduce NOx and PM.
iii. Mechanical fuel system.
To meet many emission regulations for smaller engines can be done by making
improvements to the mechanical fuel system. Newer mechanical fuel systems are able to
generate higher injection pressures for more efficient combustion.
V. Full authority electronic controls.
Another key component in emissions reduction is the engine control unit (ECU). It uses
sensors and models to control fuel quantity, injection timing, air-to-fuel ratio, multiple fuel
injections, amount of cooled EGR, and a host of other control parameters to deliver peak
engine performance and fuel economy. Integrating electronic controls between the engine
and the entire vehicle also reduces emissions and improves performance.
40 www.AgriMoon.Com
VI. After Treatment.
i. Selective catalytic reduction (SCR).
SCR is an aftertreatment option that requires a urea-based additive to reduce NOx emissions.
When ammonia in urea is mixed with engine exhaust in a catalytic converter, a chemical
reaction takes place and the NOx in the exhaust is converted to oxygen, nitrogen, and water.
This method adds costs because of the extra tank, pump, associated components, and the
SCR additive – but it provides better fuel efficiency than other NOx-reducing methods.
ii. Lean-NOx catalyst.
There are two types of Lean-NOx catalysts with different methods of regenerating. The
DeNOx catalyst is a precious metal-based system that reduces hydrocarbons in an oxygen-
rich exhaust stream. Without using electronic controls, the catalyst‘s efficiency for reducing
NOx is less than 10 percent. When electronic controls are used, the efficiency is still less than
30 percent – with a substantial fuel economy penalty. A more effective Lean-NOx catalyst is
the NOx adsorber (NAC), or sometimes called the Lean-NOx trap (LNT). It must be
regenerated in an oxygen-deficient environment, requiring more sophisticated controls.
When the unit is clean, it can reduce NOx by 90 percent. However, it is very sensitive to fuel
sulfur levels and can lose efficiency quickly (to near zero) when exposed to high-sulfur fuels.
When that happens, sulfur has to be removed from the catalyst. This process of sulfur
removal is called desulfation. It requires very sophisticated controls and exposes the engine
to high thermal stress while running at a significant fuel economy penalty. By using
electronic engine controls with this type of catalyst, efficiency can be maintained greater than
60 percent over the life of the engine.
iii. Diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC).
The diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC) doesn‘t reduce NOx, but it is effective at reducing carbon
monoxide, hydrocarbon, and some particulate matter. The flow-through oxidation catalyst
oxidizes both gaseous (volatile) hydrocarbons and the semi-volatile portion of PM known as
the volatile organic fraction (VOF). At higher exhaust temperatures, DOCs can also oxidize
sulfur in the exhaust to form sulphate precipitated material. Catalyst manufacturers have
been able to achieve the needed VOF reduction while minimizing sulfate formation. DOCs
operate at peak efficiency when the sulfur concentrations in the fuel are 0.05 percent or lower.
DOCs typically reduce emissions of particulate matter by 20 percent. DOCs also reduce
emissions of hydrocarbons by 50 percent and carbon monoxide by 40 percent.
iv. Active diesel particulate filter (DPF).
DPFs (or particulate traps) will likely to be one of the options used to meet particulate matter
reductions in Stage III B and Final Tier 4/Stage IV. Manufacturers are working hard to
reduce the cost and optimize the size of these aftertreatment devices. The DPF traps and
holds particulates in the exhaust. Exhaust gas flows through channels with porous walls that
allow exhaust to escape, but traps soot and particulates. Then, with the help of a catalyst, the
DPF regenerates by burning the collected soot.
41 www.AgriMoon.Com
Because high exhaust temperatures are required for this regeneration to take place, the
challenge is to design DPFs that provide consistent regeneration at all levels of engine
operation. ―Active‖ diesel particulate filters solve this problem, by raising the exhaust
temperature based on particulate filter backpressure. Manufacturer‘s working to develop
active DPF systems that would regenerate in low-load and normal operating conditions.
Metals and ash found in lubricating oil can become trapped in the DPF as well. Since ash and
metals cannot be burned off during soot regeneration, they are left in the filter. The buildup
can eventually clog the filter and may require maintenance and cleaning. The use of
lubricating oil with low ash can help alleviate this issue.
42 www.AgriMoon.Com
Module 3. Study of basic design parameters for traction,mechanics of chassis 39 and

stability of tractors
Lesson 7. Soil machine systems for off-road vehicles
1. Introduction
The agricultural tractor is one of the class of mobile machines that involves the ‗traction‘
process. The word 'traction' and name 'tractor' come from the word to 'draw' or 'pull' so a
tractor is basically a machine for pulling off-rod; other mobile machines such as locomotives
are in the same class. Vehicles like trucks and even motor cars, which are essentially vehicles
for carrying loads are also involve the on road traction process. The tractor is also in the class
of machines that involves operation under what are known as 'off-road' conditions. Others in
this class include machines used for earth moving, mining and military work.
The tractor tyres have the function of supporting the tractor and of converting rotary motion
of the engine to linear motion of the tractor.
The wheels must be chosen to:
1. Support the weight of the tractor (together with any transferred weight by attached
implements) while limiting the sinkage into the soil surface and the resultant rolling
resistance.
2. Engage with the soil (or surface) and transmit the traction, braking and steering forces
(reactions) while limiting relative movement and the resultant slip, skid etc.
3. Provide ground following ability together with some springing and shock absorption.
The important variables in relation to the tyres include:
1.Size (diameter and width) which determines their tractive capacity and rolling resistance.
2.Strength, expressed in terms of ply rating, which in turn determines the pressure that can
be used and hence the weight that the tyre can carry; this in turn also determines the tractive
capacity and the rolling resistance.
3.Tread pattern which, together with the surface characteristics, determines the contact with
the surface.
The losses in power at the wheel-surface interface are often great, particularly on soft
surfaces (i.e., their tractive efficiency is low), hence the power available at the tractor drawbar
may be much less than the power of the engine. Therefore the choice of the tyres and the
weight on them is crucial in determining the overall performance of the tractor.
43 www.AgriMoon.Com
Various types of tyres may be used on the tractor, depending mainly on the surface on which
it is working. For the following conditions, the tyres or wheels indicated in Fig 7.1 are
recommended.
Fig. 7.1: Different types of tyres for different conditions
(a) Large area, shallow tread with 'high' pressure: Hard surfaces such as roads
(b) Intermediate depth tread: Normal agricultural work, dry soil
(c) Deep tread: Soft, wet agricultural soils
(d) Wide low pressure: Lawns/desert where low sinkage is required
(e) Tracks as on a crawler tractor: Dry soil, heavy loads as in earthmoving
(f) Metal cage, with angled lugs, alone or as extensions to normal tyres: Saturated, puddled
soils
2. Definitions:
Rolling (motion) resistance, R is the force opposing motion of the wheel that arises from the
non-recoverable energy expended in deforming the surface and wheel. It is convenient to
consider this force as acting in the horizontal direction.
44 www.AgriMoon.Com
Tractive force, H is the horizontal reaction on a driven wheel by the soil in the contact area; it
is equal and opposite to the horizontal force generated by the wheel on the soil.
Drawbar pull, P is the horizontal force at the axle generated by a driven wheel; it may be
assumed that:
Drawbar pull (P) = Tractive force (H) - Rolling resistance (R) ...(7.1)
Towing force is the force to move a freely rolling wheel over the surface and is equal and
opposite to the rolling resistance.
3. Operational states of a wheel
The operation of a wheel can be classified into one of the following states; each occurs within
the tractor or other machines under some conditions and each has a particular unknown
parameter associated with it.
(a) Braked: Here the wheel is towed against an opposing, external torque as when being
braked or when it is used to generate a torque to operate a 'ground-driven' machine such as a
seed drill; the unknown parameter is the wheel slip. The extreme case is where the wheel
does not rotate, but just skids across the surface.
(b) Towed: Here the wheel, such as the front wheel of the tractor or the wheel of an
agricultural implement, is towed with zero opposing external torque; the unknown
parameter is the rolling resistance. Towed wheel is a special case of the braked wheel, with
zero braking torque. A towed wheel is subject to some negative wheel slip.
(c) Driven: Here the wheel is driven with an external input torque and is required to develop
a drawbar pull as in the drive wheel of a tractor; the unknown parameter is the wheel slip.
The extreme case is where the wheel slips, but does not move forward. These operational
states of a wheel in which input and output torque and input and output force (towing force
or drawbar pull) are shown plotted against wheel-slip. From this it will be seen that:
(d) Self-propelled: Here the wheel is driven with an external input torque to overcome its
own rolling resistance and to propel it across the surface without developing a drawbar pull.
This approximates to the drive wheel of a tractor with no drawbar pull (if we neglect the
rolling resistance of the front wheels); the unknown parameter is the rolling resistance. Self-
propelled wheel is a special case of the driven wheel, with zero drawbar pull. Self-propelled
wheel is subject to some positive slip
4. Tractor Performance Analysis:
Thus, if we neglect losses in forward motion due to wheel slip and in drawbar pull due to
rolling resistance, all of the power from the engine is available at the drawbar. .But this is the
ideal situation which might apply approximately to the tractor working on hard surfaces
with small drawbar pulls and small wheel slips.
However, in many agricultural situations, wheel slip is significant, hence the travel speed of
the tractor will be lesser than the ideal value. Also, much of the torque on the rear wheels
45 www.AgriMoon.Com
goes to drive the tractor forward against the rolling resistance of both the driving and the
rolling wheels. Hence the drawbar pull will also be lesser than the ideal value.
Although the tractor is moving, the equations of equilibrium can be applied to it because it is
assumed that there is no acceleration. Force and torque acting on tractor are shown in Fig.
7.2.
Fig 7.2: Mechanics of the tractor
5. Speed analysis:
Drive wheel diameter = D
Engine speed = Ne
Drive wheel rotational Speed = Nw
Overall transmission ratio r = Ne/Nw
If we assume that there are no losses in motion due to slip between the wheel and the surface:
Travel speed, Vo = Linear speed of wheels=
This analysis shows that the travel speed depends directly on the engine speed and inversely
on the gear ratio.
If the tractor is now moving with a speed V (lesser than the ideal travel speed, Vo above),
We can then define wheelslip as:
Wheelslip, s = Vo - V/Vo
Where, Vo = theoretical travel speed
V = actual travel speed
... (7.2)
46 www.AgriMoon.Com
6. Torque / force analysis
Engine torque = Te
Drive wheel torque, Tw = r Te
Equilibrium requires that this torque is equal and opposite to the moment of the soil reaction,
H on the wheel:
If we assume that there are no other horizontal external forces acting (such as rolling
resistance, aerodynamic forces), equilibrium also requires that:
Drawbar pull, P = Soil reaction, H
This analysis shows that the drawbar pull depends directly on the torque generated by the
engine and on the gear ratio. This assumes that the wheel / ground contact can generate the
reaction to P.
A rolling resistance force (∑R for all wheels) which is assumed to act horizontally on the
wheels at the wheel- ground contact patch, opposes motion of the tractor,
For equilibrium of the external horizontal forces acting on the tractor:
... (7.3)
7. Power analysis
Considering power transmission at the wheels,
Output power = Input power - Power loss
i.e., Drawbar power = Wheel power - Power loss
Hence, Power loss = Wheel power - Drawbar power
... (7.4)
47 www.AgriMoon.Com
Here Vs is the slip velocity, i.e., the velocity of the wheel relative to the surface at the surface-
wheel contact.
Total power loss = Power loss due to slip + Power loss due to rolling resistance
Minimizing the total power loss thus is matter of minimizing the sum of the loss due to slip
and that due to rolling resistance. This is a complex problem when it is realized, for example,
that the effect of weight on the driving wheels is to decrease the slip loss and increase rolling
resistance losses.
8. Tractor Performance Efficiencies:
(a) Tractive efficiency (TE):
TE = Output power/Input power
= Drawbar power/Wheel power
... (7.5)
The tractive efficiency that appears here contains two terms:
P and (P+R) which represents a ‗force‘ efficiency; thus when there is no rolling resistance (R =
0) this factor in the tractive efficiency = 1.
(i) (1-s) which represents a ‗speed‘ efficiency; again when there is no wheelslip (s = 0), this
factor in the tractive efficiency = 1.
It might be thought that the tractive efficiency, which is one of the most important measures
of tractor performance, could be determined on the basis of above mentioned equation.
However, the major difficulty with this approach is that, in practice, it is not possible to
determine a relationship between rolling resistance and slip or, in general, to determine
rolling resistance when a wheel is undergoing a slip. Hence, it is necessary to determine the
tractive efficiency by measuring drawbar and wheel power directly by following relation;
TTE = P V/2 π Tw Nw ...(7.6)
Drawbar pull, P, with a tension load (force) cell between the tractor and a load vehicle or
implement
Travel speed, V, by timing over a known distance
Wheel torque, Tw , with a torque load cell in the transmission to the driving wheels
Wheel speed, Nw , by counting wheel revolutions over a known time period

48 www.AgriMoon.Com
(b) Transmission efficiency (TME)
TME = Power to wheels/Power from engine
... (7.7)
The maximum transmission efficiency is dependent on the design and the quality of the
transmission elements.
For good quality gears the maximum efficiency is about 98% per pair of gears; hence with,
say, 3 pairs of gears in the transmission and another 2 pairs in the differential / final drive,
the maximum efficiency will be 0.98x0.98x0.98x0.98x0.98 = 90%.
Little improvement in efficiency can be obtained by more accurate or elaborate gearing; other
types of transmission will be no more efficient.
(c) Engine efficiency(EE):
EE= Power from engine/Power in fuel
...(7.8)
Where,
FC = fuel consumption rate, kg/min
C = calorific value of the fuel, kJ/kg
The maximum value for engine efficiency is dependent on and strictly limited by the
thermodynamics of the engine processes. A maximum value of about 35% for a diesel engine
can be expected; other types of engine will, in general, be less efficient.
(d) Overall efficiency (OE):
= Drawbar power/Fuel power
= Engine power/Fuel power. Wheel power/Engine power. Drawbar power/Wheel power
= Engine efficiency. Transmission efficiency. Tractive efficiency
Consider typical maximum values for these variables: ηo = 0.35 x 0.90 x 0.75 = 22 %
Because the maximum tractive efficiency is low and highly variable and the other efficiencies
like transmission efficiency or strictly limited efficiency of engine, any significant increase in
the overall efficiency of tractor performance will be achieved by increasing the tractive
efficiency. Research into an understanding of the traction process and into more efficient
traction devices are needed.
49 www.AgriMoon.Com
9. Tractive coefficient (TC):
The performance of a tractor depends to a significant degree on its weight and, in particular,
on the weight on the driving wheels. It is therefore useful to define a non-dimensional
drawbar pull - weight ratio termed:
Tractive coefficient (TC)= Drawbar pull/Weight on driving wheels
The tractive coefficient is a number which characterizes the interaction between the wheel
and the surface in an analogous way to which coefficient of (sliding) friction characterizes the
interaction between one body sliding on another. Where a different wheel and surface may
be considered similar to those for which the tractive coefficient is known, then for the same
wheelslip:
Drawbar pull = Tractive coefficient x weight on wheel
Where a tractor operates on a slope the tractive coefficient should logically be based on the
total force parallel to the ground, ie, on the drawbar pull plus the component of the weight of
the tractor down the slope. Where a four-wheel tractor is considered, and with other tractors
also, the weight used may be the total weight on all wheels. In quoting values of tractive
coefficient, it is therefore necessary to state which weight has been used.
50 www.AgriMoon.Com
Lesson 8. Traction mechanics and its prediction
1. Introduction
The study of traction mechanics includes soil - implement and soil - vehicle mechanics in
general. Two approaches can be used for traction prediction
(a) Empirical
Here experimental data on the drawbar pull and rolling resistance of various wheels together
with a single soil parameter (the cone index obtained by measuring the force to push a cone
penetrometer into the soil) are used to predict drawbar pull and rolling resistance on a purely
empirical basis (Wismer and Luth, 1974). Such an approach provides a ready and useful
means of performance prediction but it is not suitable as a basis for understanding the
traction process;
(b) Theoretical
Theoretical approach uses classical soil properties like cohesion, angle of internal friction and
some semi - empirical parameters to develop a model for the prediction of the tractive force
(soil reactions) and drawbar pull. This approach provides the best understanding of the
traction process and an appropriate introduction. The theoretical / predictive approach
provides the best basis for understanding tractive performance and will be emphasised here;
the other approaches may be more readily used for the immediate determination of wheel
performance.
The usual approach is by considering the prediction of tractor performance is to begin with
the study of the performance of single wheel. The performance of the tractor is then
understood as the combined interaction and performance of two or more such wheels. The
traditional four-wheel tractor is a combination of driven (or braked) wheels at the rear and
free rolling, towed (pushed) wheels at the front.
2. Tractive Performance
The early study of the performance of tractors was limited to the experimental measurement
of travel speed and wheel slip at various drawbar pulls on soils. The results were intended to
provide an understanding of the principles involved and a basis for comparing the relative
performance that farmers might expect from the various tractors in the field. Rolling
resistance of wheels was measured by equating it to the towing force required to move
different types of (mainly transport) wheels across visually described surfaces, eg. road
(hard), stubble (firm), cultivated soil (soft) etc.
51 www.AgriMoon.Com
The theoretical prediction of tractive performance has involved the separation of the problem
into two parts, viz,the prediction of:
(i) Tractive force, H
(ii) Rolling resistance, R
Using this approach it is assumed that the drawbar pull (P) is what remains of the tractive
force after the rolling resistance has been overcome, ie:
... (8.1)
Where,
P(s) implies that P will be determined as a function of slip
H(s) implies that H will be predicted as a function of slip
While R is also a function of slip, this function is not known and hence the value for R is that
measured under the towed condition or predicted, both of which assume zero slip. Clearly
this is only approximate because the rolling resistance under finite slips will be greater than
the value measured or predicted with zero slip. The generation of a tractive force by the
tractor requires an equal and opposite horizontal reaction by the soil against the driving
wheels in the contact area. This reaction force, which in effect determines the tractor
performance, is predicted on the basis of the soil strength parameters (c and f) and the soil
deformation corresponding to various wheelslip values.
The support of the tractor requires a vertical reaction on the wheels which causes vertical
deformation of the soil in the contact area. Equating the energy to deform the soil (ie. to make
the rut) to the work done by the rolling resistance force provides a basis for calculation of the
latter. The process is modelled by the pressure – sinkage relationship for a plate pressed into
the soil; slip is considered to be zero.
i. Measurement of Rolling Resistance:
The rolling resistance of a wheel is, in general terms, the force opposing the motion of the
wheel as it rolls on a surface. This force arises from the energy losses that occur due to
 The elastic but non-ideal deformation of the wheel
 The inelastic and non-recoverable (plastic) deformation of the surface
 Friction in the wheel bearings (usually assumed to be negligible)
From this it will be clear that the rolling resistance of a wheel will be a function of the
strength deformation properties of the surface and the size and deformation characteristics of
the wheel. For wheels with tyres, the secondary factors include the air pressure, the structure
of the tyre carcass (radial or bias ply) and the tread pattern. For speeds used with agricultural
52 www.AgriMoon.Com
tractors, rolling resistance is relatively independent of the speed of deformation of the soil
and the tyre, hence of the travel speed.
The ideal is a perfectly rigid wheel rolling on a perfectly rigid surface. This defines the
kinematics of the rolling wheel. Hard wheel on a hard surface, this is approximated to by an
elastic steel wheel rolling on an elastic steel track as in a railway.Hard wheel on soft surface.
Here most of the deformation and energy loss occurs in the surface which yields plastically
but does not recover. Tractor front wheels and implement wheels with 'high' pressure tyres,
operating on soft agricultural soil, are of this type.Soft wheel on hard surface. Here most of
the deformation and energy loss occurs in the wheel and appears as heat. Tractor driving
wheels and vehicle wheels both operating on road surfaces are of this type.Soft wheel on soft
surface. Here both the wheel and the surface deform significantly as in the tractor rear wheel
operating on soft soil. Energy loss occurs mainly in deforming the soil.
One major aspect of understanding and predicting tractor performance is that of determining
the rolling resistance of a wheel as it is towed without slip over the surface. The problem of
determining the rolling resistance of a driving wheel, when slip is present, is more complex.
When a wheel rolls over a soft surface it makes a rut or compacted track. The simplest basis
for the prediction of its rolling resistance is to therefore assume that the work done against
the rolling resistance is the work done in compacting the soil. Bekker (1956) assumed that the
wheel was equivalent to a plate continuously being pressed into the soil to a depth equal to
the depth of the rut produced by the wheel.
ii. Maximum Tractive Force:
The horizontal force transmitted between a machine and the soil has a limiting value which
depends on both the soil strength and machine design parameters. The contact area of a
driving tire is approximately flat as shown in Fig.8.1, within certain limits of soil stiffness and
tire inflation pressure which will be explained later. The magnitude of the area of all driving
wheels can be estimated as:
iii. Estimation of Contact Area:
A very rough approximation of the contact area is given by
... (8.2)
But, a flexible tire has a smaller contact area on hard surfaces than it does on soft ground. A
rule of thumb which can be used for the estimation of tire contact area is shown in Fig. 8.1.
A = bL
Where,
b = tire section width
L = d/4 on a hard surface
L = d/2 on a soft surface (tire sinkage z > 0.05 d)

53 www.AgriMoon.Com
Fig. 8.1: Plate being pushed into the soil as tractor tyre to calculate the contact area and
pressure
In addition Wong (1978) and Bekker (1985) gave an approximate method to calculate length
from the maximum tire deflection δt
... (8.3)
iv. Maximum Shear Strength of Soil:
Coulomb (1776) noted that there appeared to be two mechanical processes in action which
determine the ultimate shearing strength of soil-tool interaction. One process is called
friction(internal angle of friction Ø) and the other cohesion (c). The total material shear
strength is the sum of these two components as follows
... (8.4)
Where p is the normal pressure acting on the internal shear surface in question
The lugs on tires penetrate the soil surface, unless it is very hard in order to hold soil among
them and to cause the development of soil to soil strength on the horizontal tractive surface.
The maximum force value, is the summation of the soil shear strength over the total contact
area of all the driving tires
... (8.5)
In which, ΣA = The sum of contact areas of all driving wheels of tractor
ΣV = The sum of vertical forces on all the driving wheels of tractor
The machine design specifications which can be changed to alter the maximum traction force
are the driver contact area and the weight on the drivers. On a course granular material
which is cohesion less, it is only the increase in vehicle weight that can improve the traction
effort. When the soil is a wet fine grained material with a small total angle of internal friction,
54 www.AgriMoon.Com
it is the contact area which should be enlarged for better traction and this is the reason for the
popularity of wide tires large diameter tires or duel or even triple tire sets on tractors which
operate on clayey terrain.
v. Soil Deformation and Slip:
Because soil is not a perfectly rigid material, it deform under the action of stresses. The
horizontal deformation of the soil surface in reaction to a traction force of low pressure tire is
very similar to that observed in the rectangular shear plate soil strength test by Coulomb.
Bekker(1956) suggested that the horizontal deformation versus shear stress response of a
plastic soil, such as sand or wet clay is observed to be close to an exponential curve of the
following form
Horizontal shear stress will be
...(8.6)
Where,
S = Soil shear strength = c + p tanØ
X' = Horizontal deformation of the soil surface
K = a soil stiffness coefficient
The final or maximum horizontal deformation of the soil surface will be X‘m, which can be
related to wheel slip (s) and contact length (L) of a tire, assuming that the tire maintains a
relatively rigid length
Soil deformation X‘, varies along the contact length and the shear stress between soil and
machine will also vary according to the equation for a plastic soil. The total traction thrust
can be calculated by integrating the shear stress distribution over the contact area.
Bekker (1960) and Wong (1978) have shown that one can develop some more complicated
stress deformation relationships for soils which suffer some loss of strength with extensive
shearing. They also pointed out the importance of the length of a tire contact area in the
traction phenomenon.
55 www.AgriMoon.Com
vi. Work done to deform soil:
a) Sinkage in Soil:
The stress distribution in a soil under an object having a vertical load is more complex than
the horizontal thrust strength relation. Penetration into the soil begins at small loads with
accompanying shear strains, which are less than those required to develop failure. After local
shear failure has occurred, a wedge of soil beneath the sinking structure continues to
descend, but an increasing penetration load is needed in order to 1ft (30 cm) larger depths of
―surcharge soil above and to the sides of the object.
Natural soil exhibits a gradual change in load required for the transition between two states
and a smooth variation with increasing penetration force is observed. Bernstein (1913) and
Goriatchkin (1937) (cited by Bekker, 1956) and the following equation was proposed to
describe it.
p = k. Zn ... (8.8)
where,
p = vertical average contact pressure
k = a soil stiffness constant for sinkage
z = sinkage distance into the soil
n = a soil constant
The principal deficiency of this equation for prediction of machine sinakge and performance
was found to be the variability of the soil stiffness constant, k with the size of the object on
the soil.
For a plate, length l, width b, being pressed into the soil, as in Fig.8.2, Bekker suggested that
the pressure, p under such a plate is given by:
... (8.9)
where,
z is vertical soil deformation (sinkage)
Kc and KØ are soil stiffness or sinkage constant
n is soil sinkage exponent
b is the smaller overall dimension (width of rectangular plate or radius of circular disc) of the
plate
56 www.AgriMoon.Com
Fig. 8.2: Plotting to calculate slopes and intercept for different plates with different widths
b) Measuring soil parameters
Because the work to compact the soil is used as the basis of prediction of rolling resistance,
the force to push a plate into the soil and the associated sinkage is chosen as an appropriate
method of determining the soil parameters for the calculation of rolling resistance.
To obtain the parameters, a series of plates of different widths, b1, b2, b3 are pushed into the
soil while the force and corresponding sinkage are measured.
...(8.10)
When, log p is then plotted against log z, we get a series of straight lines of slope 'n' and
intercept on the log p axis = (Kc / b + Kf) as shown in Fig. 8.2. Further if the intercepts are
then plotted against 1/b the slope of this line is and the intercept at 1/b is kf.
vii. Rolling Resistance:
Rolling resistance is the force opposing horizontal motion on a deformable surface or on

flexible tires.It can be considered as a rate of energy loss to the soil and /or tires. It has been
known in practice that the rolling resistance of a tire increases both with the vertical load on
the wheel and with the sinkage of the tire into the soil. Industry rules of thumb are available
for approximate calculations for earthmoving tires in a range of outside diameters from 150
to 300 cm are shown in Table 8.1.
57 www.AgriMoon.Com
Table 8.1: Coefficient of rolling resistance (R/N) on soils of different stiffness (Caterpillar,
1968)
Surface Sinkage, cm Coefficient of Rolling Resistance (R/N)
Hard smooth roadway 0 0.02
Firm dirt roadway slight 0.035
Dirt roadway 2.5-5 0.05
Rutted dirt roadway 10-15 0.075
Soft muddy road or sand 20 0.1-0.2
Generally, with the increase in tire diameter, the rolling resistance decreases in tilled loam
soil or sand type soils. Tire inflation has also amarked effect on rolling energy requirements,
depending on the type of surface upon which the tire travels. On soft surfaces such as loose
sand or tilled loam, a higher inflation pressure results in an increased rolling resistance force.
On the other hand, larger inflation pressures reduce the rolling resistance of a tire travelling
on surfaces which are more firm such as sod or concrete.
A further factor which can influence the effort required to move wheels on soil is the
arrangement of two or more wheels on a vehicle. Another set of experiments conducted by
Mckibben and Davidson (1940) indicated that a different result is caused by placing the dual
wheels, side by side or a tandem configuration in which one wheel follows the other (Table
8.2)
Table 8.2: Rolling resistance coefficient (R/N) of 15.2-40.6 cm tires in different

arrangements under a vertical load N of 4.5 KN per tire and at an inflation pressure of 138
kPa (Mckibben and Davidson, 1940).
Coefficient of rolling resistance (R/N)

Tire arrangement
Bluegrass pasture Tilled loam Loose sand
Single 0.06 0.319 0.338
Dual, 20 cm center 0.061 0.278 0.342
Dual. 30 cm center 0.059 0.290 0.308
Dual, 40 cm center 0.061 0.305 0.313
Tandem, following 0.057 0.223 0.223
58 www.AgriMoon.Com
There was 26-32% reductions in rolling resistance coefficient for the second trial of a wheel in
the same track on tilled loam and sand surfaces. While the reduction in motion resistance,
resulting from tandem wheel arrangement and trailer wheels following tractor tires, may
offer savings in machinery operation energy, there can be an offsetting price to pay elsewhere
i.e. compaction of soil at about the same rate as does increased contact pressure on a single
wheel.
It means that tandem wheels or a trailed machine in the same tracks, will double the soil
compaction effect of each individual wheel under the same weight. If a machine has wheels
arranged side by side, or a trailer has wheels in tracks to the side of tractor tracks, then less
intensive compaction occurs in the soil, although admittedly a larger area of a field will be
compacted.
i. Soft wheel on soft surface
Here the wheel (or a track) is assumed to impose a uniform pressure on the soil which
deforms uniformly over the contact area as shown in Fig 8.3 until the contact area times the
pressure at the tyre surface is equal to the weight on the tyre. This pressure may be assumed
to be made up of the pressure equivalent to the stiffness of the tyre carcass and the internal
pressure of the air (and the water if used).
Fig. 8.3: Sinkage and deflection for soft and hard wheel and on soft surface
Then the vertical work to press such a plate into the soil:
59 www.AgriMoon.Com
But for a weight, N on the plate, at maximum sinkage ,
...(8.11)
Before considering the two types of wheel / surface that have been analysed on this basis we
need to show how the soil parameters can be measured.
Consider the work done in towing such a wheel a distance, l against the rolling resistance, R.
In simple terms, if this is equal to the work done on forming the rut as calculated for the
plate, length l , width b pressed into the soil, as in (a) above:
... (8.12)
This simple analysis suggests that rolling resistance depends directly (but not necessarily
proportionally) on the weight of the wheel W, and inversely (but not necessarily
proportionally) on the length of the contact area l but not the diameter of the wheel except in
so far as it affects l. It also depends in a complex way on the width of the contact area, b. For
n = 1, which might be considered typical for an agricultural soil (Dwyer, 1984), this equation
can be put in the form of a coefficient of rolling resistance:
60 www.AgriMoon.Com
...(8.13)
This equation suggests that the coefficient of rolling resistance will be proportional to the
ground pressure and inversely proportional to the length of the contact area. Hence, for
example, improved traction will be achieved on sandy soils if p is small and l is large, ie, by
the use of low pressure tyres.
Another approach to develop a predictive formula for rolling resistance was proposed by
Mckyes(1978). It was based on the assumptions that rolling resistance is proportional to the
wheel load, the sinkage in the soil and the inverse of tire outside diameter, a component is
added to account for tire deformation and resistance on hard surfaces, as follows
...(8.14)
Where,
The first part of the above equation involving soil stiffness actually becomes identical to the
above equation if
If on the other hand, the tire contact length l is assumed to be one half of the tire diameter, d
then
l = d/2 (for soft surface like soil)

61 www.AgriMoon.Com
... (8.15)
The equation shows that rolling resistance increases with normal force, soil stiffness (1/k)
and width at constant contact pressure (p). Resistance also decreases with the tire diameter
62 www.AgriMoon.Com
Lesson 9. Mechanics of tractor chassis and stability analysis
1. Introduction
The term 'mechanics' here refers to an analysis of the forces that act on the tractor chassis. The
major force is that of gravity and is known as the weight. This is sometimes given in units of
mass (kg); in engineering analysis (concerned with statics) all such 'weights' should be
converted to force units (kN).
I. Centre of gravity
The centre of gravity is the point at which the whole of the mass and the weight of the tractor
may be considered to act. Its location depends on the disposition of the various masses that
comprise the tractor. Any analysis of the tractor chassis requires the location of the centre of
gravity to be known. It is usually specified in relation to the rear axle as shown by point G in
Fig. 9.1.
i. Longitudinal location:
The location of the centre of gravity in the longitudinal (X) direction may be found by
measuring the weight on the front (Wf) and rear (Wr) wheels.
Application of the force equilibrium condition gives the tractor weight, W:
W = Wf + Wr ... (9.1)
Application of the moment equilibrium condition gives the required longitudinal location, Xr
as shown in Fig. 9.1.
For the tractor take moments about O:
... (9.2)
The wheel base (X) between the front and rear axles is usually given in the manufacturer's
specification or can be measured directly.For most common rear wheel drive tractors Xr is
approximately 30 % of X; this is also the % of the static tractor weight that is on the front
wheels.
63 www.AgriMoon.Com
Fig. 9.1: Location of front and rear wheel location along with CG of a tractor
ii. Vertical location:
The location of the centre of gravity in the vertical (Y) direction is more difficult. The
common method is to lift the front (or rear) of the tractor as shown in Fig. 9.2 and measure
the weight on the front wheels (W'f) in the raised condition. The following is similar to
Barger et. al.,(1952).
Application of the moment equilibrium condition gives the required vertical location, Yg.
For the tractor take moments about O:
The geometry of the positions of the centre of gravity gives:
… (9.3)
...(9.4)
64 www.AgriMoon.Com
Fig 9.2: Tractor in raised position
II. Issues in chassis mechanics
Two aspects of the mechanics of the tractor chassis, which are of importance to the
performance of the tractor, can be identified:
i. Weight transfer:
For a tractor under dynamic or in operating conditions, the weight on the wheels be different
from the static values. These changes are termed as 'weight transfer' or the changes in the
vertical longitudinal plane, ie, from front to rear because these have the greatest influence on
tractor performance. Weight transfer is a normal outcome of the action of the forces
generated on the tractor chassis by the ground and by the implement. It occurs whenever and
how the tractor is loaded, including the ‗no‘ load case where there is some weight transfer
due to the torque on the rear wheels required to propel the tractor against the rolling
resistance of all the wheels. It is also normally a desirable outcome because the tractor is
designed to take advantage of it by having at least some of the driving wheels at the rear
where, for normal forward operation, the increase in rear wheel weight is proportional to the
drawbar pull. In reverse gear and in the 'over-run' condition, (the implement pushing the
tractor) the forces toward the front of the tractor transfer weight from the rear wheels to the
front wheels, a fact which affects the performance of the tractor in this type of work and
when braking.
ii. Instability:
Instability occurs when the weight transfer is sufficient to cause the tractor to tip over
rearwards. Impending instability (where the front wheels leave the ground and the tractor is
on the point of becoming unstable) is considered because it is a limiting case of the weight
transfer and hence of tractor operation. It is an undesirable situation because it represents
loss of steering control and may lead on directly to actual instability. Such a situation is
partly avoided by inherent features of the design of the tractor-implement system and partly
by its operation in a way that avoids reaching that condition. Usually the wheels slip before
instability occurs. An understanding of the actual process of tipping over in the vertical
longitudinal plane which may require more complex dynamic analysis that also includes,
65 www.AgriMoon.Com
inertia of the tractor chassis and of the implement, also the inertia and stiffness of the
transmission to the rear wheels.
iii. Analysis and Assumptions
The following analysis of the tractor in the longitudinal, vertical plane is limited to the
calculation of wheel weight during steady state operation in normal work and to the
prediction of the conditions for impending instability. Although the tractor and implement
are moving, the assumption of steady state operation implies that there are no inertia forces;
the forces are doing external work but are not causing any acceleration. Hence the principles
of statics and the conditions for static equilibrium of rigid bodies can be applied.
Three independent equations of equilibrium can be written:
 Sum of the forces in any two perpendicular directions are zero. The two directions
usually chosen are those parallel to and perpendicular to the ground surface.
 Sum of the moments about any two points in the vertical longitudinal plane are zero.
The two points usually chosen are the wheel- ground contact points or the centres of
the wheels.
In simple situations it may be sufficient to consider the whole tractor as a rigid body. Where
the external forces are known the weights on the wheels can be calculated directly. However
it is sometimes convenient to consider the tractor as composed of two rigid bodies. One the
drive wheels, rotate about a centre located in the other - the chassis of the tractor. This occurs
under the action of the torque acting on them which is internally produced by the engine.
 Any such analysis must apply appropriate constraints ie, that the forces and moments
on each are equal and opposite. In this analysis and the worked examples, the
following simple assumptions are made:
 forward motion is uniform; this assumes constant implement forces and no

acceleration
 Lines of forces on wheels are either tangential or radial or may be resolved as such;
 Sinkage and tyre distortion (but not normal tyre deflection) are neglected
 Tractor is symmetrical about the longitudinal vertical plane; all the forces and
moments may be considered to act in this plane
 Other forces, such as the change in position of the fuel and oil in the tractor on sloping
ground, air resistance and other minor forces are neglected
66 www.AgriMoon.Com
1) Weight Transfer
Consider rear wheel drive tractor on a slope as shown in Fig. 9.3.
Fig. 9.3: Tractor for weight transfer analysis
The implement force P acts through the point (x', y') at an angle Ф to the ground surface.
For the tractor, take moments about C:
... (9.5)
For the wheels, take moments about C: M = H. r
Resolve parallel to the slope: H =
Substitute for M and H above:
...(9.6)
Similarly weight on the rear wheels (Vr) perpendicular to the slope is given by:
67 www.AgriMoon.Com
...(9.7)
The terms in Equations can be identified as follows:
Wf, Wr are the static weight on the wheels when the tractor is on the slope
: The moment effect of the weight component down the slope, decreasing the
front wheel weight and increasing the rear.
: The moment effect of the implement force component down the slope,
decreasing the front wheel weight and increasing the rear.
: The moment effect of the implement force component perpendicular to the slope,
decreasing the front wheel weight.
: The direct ( P SINΘ) and the moment effect of the implement force
component perpendicular to the slope, increasing the rear wheel weight.
Referring to the Equations, moment effect of the component of the drawbar pull down the
slope has two effects:
increases and decreases with moment arm y
decreases and increases with moment arm r
The net effect of is therefore the difference between these two, i.e.,
This fact gives rise to the idea that if the drawbar pull acts below the rear axle, its moment,
increases Vf and holds the front of the tractor down. While this is true, it omits
the more important, unrecognised aspect that a usually larger moment, tends to
decrease the weight on the front wheels.
68 www.AgriMoon.Com
The following special cases are of interest:
1. If y' increases, i.e., the point of action (i.e., the drawbar) is raised, Y decreases and the
weight transfer, increases; the tractor may reach the condition of impending
instability when Vf = 0
2. If y' = 0, the point of action (the drawbar) is at ground level, Y = r; there is no weight
transfer due to P.
3. If y' is negative, the point of action is below ground level (i.e., as is possible with a three
point linkage or with the drawbar in a trench), Y is greater than r, the term
becomes positive and negative ie, weight is transferred from the rear to the front wheels.
4. If = 0, ie, the implement force is parallel to the ground
5. i.e., the ground is horizontal
6. If also, P = 0, ie, there is no implement force
2) Weight Transfer with Rolling Resistance:
The above analysis neglects any effect of rolling resistance. However, this can be included by
introducing force acting along the slope (opposite the direction of motion) as a further force
to be overcome by the tractor.
69 www.AgriMoon.Com
The rolling resistance may be expressed in terms of a coefficient ( ρ ) as
Here the weight will be the wheel weights perpendicular to the slope, ie, Vf and Vr as given
in by equations above. The rolling resistance for the tractor may be estimated by combining
the effect on the front andrear wheels by considering a coefficient for the tractor as a whole.
The total tractive force
... (9.8)
Tractive force required (for a rear wheel drive tractor) in terms of the gross tractive
coefficient.
.... (9.9)
3) Weight Transfer with Different Hitching Systems:
Considering the three common hitching systems, evaluation with respect to weight transfer
can be donei.e., the increase in the weight on the rear wheels as a result of the implement
forces. This analysis does not take into account the weight of the implement, which is more
significant for the mounted and semi-mounted systems than for the trailed. However, it
provides a valid comparison of the relative advantages of weight transfer of the three
systems on the basis of the soil forces and of the conditions under which these advantages
will be achieved.
Different type of hitch systems for a tractor are:
(i) Trailed on its own wheels
(ii) Semi-mounted on the lower links of the tractor and a rear wheel
(ii) Fully mounted on the three-point linkage.
to the ground surface as shown, is assumedfor each.In order to compare them it is

necessary to determine the dynamic weight on the front and rear wheels of thetractor for
each system; the same soil force S, acting at an angle
(I) Trailed type hitch system
70 www.AgriMoon.Com
Tractor with trailed type hitch system is shown in Fig. 9.4.
Resolving horizontally:
P = S cos
Moments about Q for the tractor:
…(9.10)
And
...(9.11)
Weight transfer will occur if Vr> Wr ie, if y' is positive, ie, if the drawbar is above ground
level; it will be increased by increasing the drawbar height, y'.
Fig. 9.4: Tractor with trailed type hitch system
(II) Semi-mounted type hitch system
Tractor with semi mounted hitch system is shown in Fig. 9.5.
Resolving horizontally:
P = S cos
The dynamic weight T on the tractor drawbar is given by moments about A for the cultivator:
Where b gives the horizontal location of the soil force.

71 www.AgriMoon.Com
Substituting for P
The dynamic weight on the rear wheels is given by moments about Q:
Substituting for T and P:
Similarly is given by;
... (9.12)
Weight transfer will occur if Vr > Wr which will always occur unless one of the following
terms is negative and greater in magnitude than the other.
The first term will be negative if b > a, i.e., the soil force is behind the wheel. The second will
be negative if y' is negative (below ground level) and greater than z or z is negative (above
ground level) and greater than y'. All of these conditions are unlikely to occur for a semi-
mounted implement, hence weight transfer will always occur.
72 www.AgriMoon.Com
Fig. 9.5: Tractor with semi mounted hitch system
(III) Mounted type Hitch System:
Tractor with mounted hitch system is shown in Fig. 9.6.
The dynamic weights Vr on the rear wheels is given by moments about Q for the tractor /
implement system as a whole:
... (9.13)
The dynamic weight Vf on the front wheels is given by moments about O for the tractor /
implement system as a whole:
... (9.14)
Increasing the length of mounted implements (hence increasing b) will increase the weight
transfer to the rear wheels due to the direct effect and the moment
effect from the front wheels. The limit will be the length and weight that will
still allow the tractor to lift the implement without itself tipping up; weights may be added to
the front of the tractor to avoid this.
Weight transfer will occur if:
73 www.AgriMoon.Com
This implies that weight transfer to the rear wheels will occur if the soil force passes above
the front wheel /ground contact point.
to the rear wheel weight. Another measure associated with weight transfer from the front
wheels in the mounted system is the condition thatThe above includes the contribution of
the vertical component of the soil force (S sin
This implies that weight transfer from the front wheels to the rear will occur if the soil force
passes above the rear wheel / ground contact point. Further, weight transfer will increase as
b increases, ie, the implement gets longer.
74 www.AgriMoon.Com
Module 4. Selection of different mechanical power transmission units of 71 Agril. Tractor
Lesson 10. Tractor clutches and brakes
1. Introduction
Power transmission system is the gear and/or hydraulic system having different components
that transmits mechanical power from a prime mover (which can be an engine or electric
motor), to some form of useful output device.
The power transmission system consists of:
(a) Clutches and Brakes
(b) Transmission gears
(c) Differential
(d) Final drive
(e) Rear axle
(f) Rear wheels
I. Clutches:
Clutch is a device, used to engage and disengage the tractor engine from the transmission
gears and drive wheels. Clutch transmits power by means of friction between driving
members and driven members (Fig. 10.1).
75 www.AgriMoon.Com
Functions of a clutch:
 The internal combustion engine as used in a tractor must be cranked manually or by a

special starting mechanism. For cranking, the engine is disconnected from the rest of
the transmission unit by a suitable clutch. After starting the engine, the clutch is
engaged to transmit power from the engine to the gearbox. This type of engine must
attain a certain speed before it will have any power.
 Changing the transmission gears must be permitted for the purpose of securing
different traveling speeds. The gearbox must be kept free from the engine power,
otherwise the gear teeth will be damaged and engagement of gear will not be perfect.
This is done by clutch.
 Stopping the belt pulley must be permitted without having to stop the engine. This is
done by placing a clutch between the engine and the transmission gears and belt
pulley.
II. Requirements of clutch:
 It should have good ability of taking load without dragging, grabbing and slipping.
 It should have higher capacity to transmit maximum power without slipping.
 It should be convenient, accessible and easy to operate, adjust and repair.
76 www.AgriMoon.Com
 Friction surface should be highly resistant to heat effect. The control by hand lever or
pedal lever should be easy.
III. Types of clutch
Clutches are mainly of three types:
i. Friction clutch
ii. Dog clutch
iii. Fluid coupling
i. Friction clutch
A clutch in which one part turns the other by the friction between them. Friction clutch
produces gripping action, by utilizing the frictional force between two surfaces. These
surfaces are pressed together to transmit power.
(http://www.brickengineer.com/pages/anims/mechanisms/clutch-animation.gif)
While starting the engine, the clutch pedal is depressed. After the start of the engine, the
clutch pedal is slowly released to increase the pressure gradually on frictional surface until
there is no slip. Thus the driven plate is gripped firmly to the driving plate. Transmission of
power depends upon the kind of material used for the friction members and intensity of the
force, pressing them together.
77 www.AgriMoon.Com
Friction clutch is most popular in four wheel tractors (Fig. 10.2). Fluid clutch is also used in
some tractors these days. Dog clutch is mostly used in power tiller.
Friction clutch may be subdivided into three classes:
i. Disc/Plate clutch
a. Single plate clutch or single disc clutch
b. Multiple plate clutch or multiple disc clutch
ii. Cone clutch
Frictional clutches are most commonly used because of following advantages:
Advantages of Friction Clutches:
1. Slips during engagement help the drive to pick up and accelerate the load with
minimum shock.
2. They need not to be unloaded before engagement.
3. These can be used at high engagement speeds.
4. Slip under momentary shock loads, provides cushioning.
a) Single plate clutch:
This may be called single disc clutch.
It consists of:
1. Pressure plate
2. Clutch plate
3. Springs
4. Release fingers
The single disc clutch is a plate type of clutch in which a single thick iron plate is coated with
friction material on both sides (Fig. 10.3). There is only one clutch plate in this type. The
clutch plate is pressed against the flywheel of the engine by the spring loaded pressure plate.
The pressure produced by a number of springs, located between the pressure plate and the
housing, which is bolted to the flywheel, holds the friction surfaces firmly in contact. When
the pedal of the clutch is depressed, the pressure plate is pushed back by the release fingers.
78 www.AgriMoon.Com
This releases the pressure from the clutch plate and disengages the clutch. Then the clutch
plate stops rotating but the fly wheel continues to rotate. When the clutch pedal is released,
the pressure plate forces them to turn together as one unit. Thus the power of the engine goes
to the gear box for onward transmission to rear wheels. This type of tractor clutch plate is
usually foot operated.
b) Multiple plate clutch:
This may be called multiple disc clutch. It can be twin-disk or three-plate type of clutch (Fig.
10.4). It differs from single-plate clutch in that the flywheel rims does not serve as a friction
surface. It may also got a number of thin metal plates, arranged alternately to work as driving
and driven members. One set is attached to the fly wheel and the other set is attached to the
clutch shaft. If the plates are pressed together, the clutch is said to be engaged and the power
is transmitted from the engine to the gear box for onward transmission to the rear wheels.
This pressure is obtained by a set of heavy springs, fitted together in a housing.
Engagement and disengagement of this type of clutch is very smooth due to larger surface
area of friction members.
79 www.AgriMoon.Com
IV. Design of Disc Type Clutch:
There is a relationship between following parameters in a disc clutch:
 Dimensions of disc.
 Pressure applied to the friction surface.
 Coefficient of friction and
 Torsional moment developed.
Mathematically,
(i) Uniform pressure
(ii) Uniform axial wear
(i) Uniform pressure: When the friction surface is new and unworn and rigidly mounted, it is
assumed that the normal force P is uniformly distributed over the entire area of clutch. And
rm is taken as :
Where,
ro = outside radius of friction plate.
ri = inside radius of friction plate.
(ii) Uniform axial wear: The clutch is subjected to wear due to sliding friction and after the
running in wear is ended, the wear will be uniform. The mean radius r m of the clutch is given
by
When equal importance is given to durability and torsional moment, then
80 www.AgriMoon.Com
When high torsional moment capacity is needed and wear is not a serious problem, then
Where wear is a problem, then
V. Cone Clutch:
The principal member of the cone-clutch assembly is a metal disk with a conical peripheral
surface that engages with a similarly shaped recess in the flywheel (Fig. 10.5). The cone is
faced with ordinary brake lining. A heavy spring placed behind the cone, exerts sufficient
pressure to insure its positive engagement. A sleeve fastened to the cone extends back and is
bolted to the transmission shaft. Therefore, the engagement if the clutch connects the gears
with the engine. Disengagement is produced by sliding the cone and sleeve backward on the
flywheel shaft extension against the spring pressure.
81 www.AgriMoon.Com
i. Advantages for cone clutch:
1. Force is concentrated at a large diameter.
2. Sufficient friction surface width is provided for durability.
3. A full 360º of lining material is available.
4. It is comparatively powerful for a given outside diameter and axial energizing force
ii. Design of Cone Clutch
The torsional moment developed by cone clutch is a function of
 Inner radii of functional surface
 Outer radii of frictional surface
 The cone angle, θ
 The force of engagement
 Coefficient of friction of the contact surface
And,
Therefore,
And, axial force Fa is given by
It has been found that the term µcosθ is only 25% effective.
Therefore,
82 www.AgriMoon.Com
As θ→0 Mt →to infinity
At θ = 0 the cone becomes a drum and
At θ = 90º the cone becomes a single face disk clutch
Generally the value of θ varies from 7.5 to 30º depending on clutch facing material and type
of disengagement required.
iii. Heat generated in clutch (Q)
The heat generated (Q) in a clutch is given by
Where, Q = heat generated in the clutch due to slippage, J
T = Average slip torque, N.m
Ns = Average slip RPM
t = Total slip time for the clutch, s
iv. Temperature of heat absorbing element of clutch (T)
The temperature of heat absorbing element of clutch (T) is given by
Where, T = average bulk temperature of clutch, ºC
Q = heat generated in clutch, J
M = total mass of heat absorbing element of clutch
Cp = specific heat of heat absorbing element, J/kg-ºC
To = Bulk temperature before engagement of clutch, ºC
v. Rate of energy generation in clutch (E)
The rate of energy generation in clutch is given by
Where, E = rate of energy generation in clutch, w/mm2

83 www.AgriMoon.Com
Ns = Average slip of clutch, RPM
T = Average slip torque in the clutch, N-m
a = Total facing area of clutch, mm2
VI. Dog clutch:
It is a simple clutch having square jaws, which are used to drive a shaft in either direction. It
is mostly used in power tillers (Fig. 10.6). A dog clutch is a type of clutch that couples two
rotating shafts or other rotating components not by friction but by interference. The two parts
of the clutch are designed such that one will push the other, causing both to rotate at the
same speed and will never slip. Dog clutches are used where slip is undesirable and/or the
clutch is not used to control torque. Without slippage, dog clutches are not affected by wear
in the same way that friction clutches are. Dog clutches are used inside manual automotive
transmissions to lock different gears to the rotating input and output shafts. A synchromesh
arrangement ensures smooth engagement by matching the shaft speeds before the dog clutch
is allowed to engage.
A good example of a simple dog clutch can be found in a Sturmey-Archer bicycle hub gear,
where a sliding cross-shaped clutch is used to lock the driver assembly to different parts of
the planetary geartrain.
84 www.AgriMoon.Com
VII. Fluid coupling:
Fluid coupling consists of a driving member and a driven member - an impeller with radical
vanes, housed in a suitable casing (Fig. 10.7). A coupler is mounted on the engine crankshaft
and is 3/4th filled with suitable oil. A spring loaded sealing ring is provided to make the
driven shaft oil tight. At the rotation of the crankshaft, the oil is thrown out by centrifugal
force from the center to the outer edge of the impeller, increasing the velocity and the energy
of the oil. It then enters the runner at the outer portion and flows towards the center, causing
rotation to the runner unit. As long as impeller and runner rotate at different speeds, the oil
continues to circulate uniformly but when the impeller and runner start running at same
speed, the circulation of oil stops. The coupling does not increase the applied torque but only
transmits the torque in an uniform manner.
85 www.AgriMoon.Com
The main features of fluid coupling are:
1. Absorption of shock and vibration
2. Smooth starting and
3. Easy operation
VIII. Brakes:
Brakes are classified as either external, internal or bond brakes. External shoe brakes are
further classified into single and double block shoe brakes. External shoe brakes consist of
shoes or blocks which are pressed against the rotating surface of the brake drum. Fig. 10.2
shows a schematic representation of an external single shoe brake. The design of internal
shoe brakes largely depends on force, torque, coefficient of friction and the radius of the
rotating drum. Fig. 10.3 shows a schematic representation of an internal shoe brake.
86 www.AgriMoon.Com
Band brakes are flexible bands wrapped partly around the drum. Pulling the band tightly
against the drum actuates them. The design of band brakes is dependent on force, angle of
wrap, coefficient of friction, pressure on the shoes and radius of the drum. A diagram of a
simple two way band brake is shown in fig. 10.4.
i. Heat Generated
When the brake is actuated, energy is absorbed, which in turn is dissipated as heat energy.
This design is dependent on pressure, area of contact, peripheral velocity, coefficient of
friction, potential energy, and kinetic energy, coefficient of heat transfer and area of the
radiating surface.
87 www.AgriMoon.Com
Lesson 11. Different types of gear and power transmission systems in tractors.
1. Introduction
Transmission is a speed reduction mechanism, equipped with several gears. The simplest
transmissions, often called gearboxes, provide gear reduction sometimes in conjunction with
a right-angle change in direction of the shaft. It may be called a sequence of gears and shafts,
through, which the engine power is transmitted to the tractor wheels. These are often used on
PTO-powered agricultural equipments. The complete path of power from the engine to the
wheels is called power train (Fig. 11.1)
The purpose of transmission is to reduce the engine speed and increase the torque available
at the rear wheels of the tractor because
HP = T.N
Where,
T is torque (kg-m) and N is rev/min.
If the engine hp is constant, it is obvious that for higher torque at wheels, low speed is
required and vice-versa. So the gear box is fitted between engine and rear wheel for variable
torque and speed. This is done by suitable design of gear and shafts.
The transmission uses gears to make more effective use of the engine and keeps the engine
operating at an appropriate speed. Transmission's primary job is to allow engine to operate in
four or five different speeds. Today's four- and five-speed automatic transmissions need
torque converters with coolant, radiators and hoses — all of which cause loss of power and
efficiency.
Speed varies according to the field requirements and so a number of gear ratios are provided
to suit the varying conditions.
I. Function of transmission system:
 To transmit power from the engine to the rear wheels of the tractor.
 To make reduced speed available, to rear wheels of the tractor.
 To alter the ratio of wheel speed and engine speed in order to suit be field conditions.
 To transmit power through right angle drive, because the crankshaft and rear axle are
normally at right angles to each other.
88 www.AgriMoon.Com
II. Transmission Gears
A gear is a toothed wheel designed to transmit torque to another gear or toothed component.
The teeth (or cogs) of a gear are shaped to minimize wear, vibration and noise, and to
maximize the efficiency of power transmission.
Different-sized gears are often used in pairs for a mechanical advantage, allowing the torque
of the driving gear to produce a larger torque in the driven gear at lower speed, or a smaller
torque at higher speed. The larger gear is known as a wheel and the smaller as a pinion. This
is the principle of the automobile transmission, allowing selection between various
mechanical advantages. A gearbox is not an amplifier or a servomechanism. Conservation of
energy requires that the amount of power delivered by the output gear or shaft will never
exceed the power applied to the input gear, regardless of the gear ratio. There is actually
some loss of output power due to friction.
III. Types of gear:
a) Spur gears:
These are Flat with teeth projecting radially in the plane of the wheel, "straight-cut gears".
These gears can be fitted only to parallel axles (Fig. 11.2).
Fig. 11.2: Spur gear

(Source: http://www.micro-machine-shop.com/gear_nomenclature_1.jpg)
(http://www.wmberg.com/images/gear.gif)
89 www.AgriMoon.Com
a. Spur gear design
1) Gear tooth loads
The load on the gear tooth is given by
Where, T = torque transmitted, N-m
D = pitch diameter, mm or m
N = RPM of gear or shaft
Vm= pitch line velocity, mpm
2) Bending strength of gear tooth
The bending strength (σ) of gear tooth is given by
Sector gear is merely a segment of a spur gear, such as one half or one quarter of the
circumference, but still attached to the axle in the normal fashion. Rack and pinion allows
torque to be converted to linear force. The pinion is a spur gear, and mates with a toothed bar
or rod that can be thought of as a spur gear with an infinitely large radius of curvature. Such
a mechanism is used in automobiles to convert the rotation of the steering wheel into the left-
to-right motion of the tie rod(s).
b) Helical gears:
A refinement over spur gears (Fig. 11.3). The teeth are cut at an angle, allowing for more
gradual, hence smoother meshing between gear wheels, eliminating the whine characteristic
of straight-cut gears. - Double helical gears - Also known as herringbone gears. These gears
have teeth that are 'V' shaped. Each gear in a double helical gear can be thought of as two
standard, but mirror image, helical gears stacked. This cancels out the thrust since each half
of the gear thrusts in the opposite direction. They can be directly interchanged with spur
gears without any need for different bearings.
90 www.AgriMoon.Com
Fig. 11.3: Helical gear

(Source:http://www.flohmueller.de/pov_anim/engineering/Cog_Wheel_Helical22_5_100_
50c.gif)
b. Design of Helical Gears
The forces acting on helical gear
1) Tangential Force (Ft)
The tangential force (Ft) is given by
2) Separating Force (Fr)
The separating force (Fr) is given by
Fr = Ft tan Φ
Thrust Force (Fa)
The thrust force (Fa) is given by
Fa = Ft tan α
Where, ϕ = Pressure angle measured in a plane perpendicular to the axis of gear
α = Helix angle measured from the axis of gear
91 www.AgriMoon.Com
Worm gears is gear that resembles a screw, with parallel helical teeth, and mates with a
normal spur gear. The worm gear can achieve a higher gear ratio than spur gears of a
comparable size.
c) Bevel gears:
These gears allow to change the operating angle. However one wheel of such gear is
designed to work with it's complementary wheel and no other (Fig. 11.4). Four bevel gears in
a square make a differential gear, which can transmit power to two axles spinning at
different speeds, such as those on a cornering automobile.
Fig. 11.4 Bevel gear

(Source: http://hgp.hdsb.ca/Grade4/FOV1-000C664C/S08AB36D9.4/bevel%2520gear.gif)
c. Design of bevel gears
1) Forces in bevel gears
... (11.3)
2) Axial Force (Fn)
... (11.4)
3) Radial Force (FR)
... (11.5)
Where, ϕ = Angle between F tm and Fn, and
δ = Cone angle of bevel gears.
d) Planetary gear unit
The details of planetary gear unit shown in Fig. 11.5.
Gear ratios of planetary sets:

92 www.AgriMoon.Com
(i) Planet stationary sun rotating
...(11.6)
(ii) Ring stationary sun rotating
... (11.7)
(iii) Sun stationary ring rotating
... (11.8)
Fig. 11.5 Planetary gear unit

(Source:http://www.beam-
wiki.org/w/images/1/16/Epicyclical(Planetary)_Gear_Train.GIF)
(http://www.hhbearing.com/images/Planetary_Gears.gif)
Crown gear is a special form of bevel gear which has teeth at right angles to the plane of the
wheel; it meshes with a straight cut spur gear or pinion on a right-angled axis to its own, or
with an escapement such as found in mechanical clocks
IV. Tractor Transmission Types
Tractors are to be used for heavy field works especially tillage operations that require
maximum tractive power and P.T.O work where correct P.T.O speed is essential. At rated
engine speed of tractor correct P.T.O speed should be available for getting maximum P.T.O
power from the tractor. Most of the field operations for crop cultivation need forward speeds
93 www.AgriMoon.Com
between 3-6 km/hr. Therefore, selection of suitable speed ratios in this range for different
types of field works is of vital importance. In tractor the rear drive wheels require power at
lower speed and high torque whereas its engine runs at higher speed and low torque.
Therefore, the purpose of gearbox transmission is to provide speed reduction and multiply
the torque received from the engine. Main principle of gear train transmission is given by the
following relationship.
... (11.9)
Where,
Ndriver (N1) = speed of driving gear, rpm
Ndriver (N2) = speed of driven gear, rpm
Tdriver (T1) = number of teeth in driving gear
Tdriver (T1) = number of teeth in driven gear
i. Transmission Systems:
Most common type of power transmission used in tractors are as under:
a) Manual Transmission
1. Sliding gear
2. Constant mesh
3. Synchronized or Synchromesh
4. Power shift
b) Automatic Transmission
c) Hydrostatic
d) Hydro-dynamic
a) Manual Transmission
A manual transmission is a type of transmission used in automotive applications. Manual

transmissions often feature a driver-operated clutch and a movable gear selector, although
some do not. If you have a manual transmission, you have to shift the gears yourself, usually
with a stick located on your console and the clutch pedal. Manual transmissions are
characterized by gear ratios that are selectable by engaging pairs of gears inside the
transmission. Manual transmissions are generally available with four to six forward gears
and one reverse gear, although manual transmissions have been built with as few as 2 and as
94 www.AgriMoon.Com
many as 7 gears. Some manuals are referred to by the number of forward gears they offer
(e.g., 5-speed) as a way of distinguishing between automatic or other available manual
transmissions. Manual shift transmissions, while not as user-friendly as some of the other
types, tend to have cast iron durability. It has no synchronizers thus one have to stop and
clutch for each gear change. One can‘t shift on the go without grinding gears. Its usually have
6-8 forward gears and 1-2 reverses.
Manual transmissions are of these types:
It is the plain old standard shift transmission. The two most popular styles of manual shift
transmissions are the sliding gear, and the collar shift. In the sliding gear style, the gears are
splined to the main shaft, and gear selection is made by actually moving the gears, via shift
forks, into the appropriate location.
a) Sliding gear transmission:
Basic gear type transmission is sliding gear transmission (Fig. 11.5). Consists of input shaft
and output shaft parallel to each other inside housing or case. Third shaft called idler shaft
reverses power to output shaft. Idler shaft parallel to input shaft. One pair gears provides
each forward speed. In each gear pair, one gear located on input shaft, other on output shaft.
Gears on input shaft solidly attached to shaft by splines or keys. Gears on output shaft slide
so can move to engage mating gear on input shaft. Reverse occurs when sliding gear engages
idler gear.
Most basic gear type transmission is sliding gear transmission. Common in farm and
industrial machines, as well as compact equipment. These transmissions simple to operate
and repair and provide variety speeds.
Sliding gear transmissions contain simple arrangements spur gears and shafts. Usually
contain input shaft and output shaft held parallel to each other in housing or case. Third shaft
called idler shaft reverses power to output shaft. Idler shaft held parallel to input shaft.
Sliding spur gears arranged to mesh to provide changes in speed or direction. One pair gears
provides each forward speed. In each gear pair, one gear on input shaft, the other on output
shaft. Gears on input shaft solidly attached to shaft by splines or keys. Gears on output shaft
slide to engage mating gear on input shaft. Reverse occurs when sliding gear (usually first
gear) engages idler gear.
Transmission also has neutral and reverse. In neutral, transmission drive gear and
countershaft drive gear mesh. Power flows into transmission through clutch shaft and
countershaft turns, but none gears on countershaft in mesh with gears on output shaft. As
result, output shaft doesn‘t turn and no power flows out transmission to drive components.
95 www.AgriMoon.Com
Fig. 11.5: Sliding gear transmission

(Source:http://motorsportengineering.blogspot.in/2010/12/basics-of-sliding-mesh
gearbox.html)
(http://0-media-cdn.foolz.us/ffuuka/board/wsg/image/1339/10/1339105312472.gif)
b) Constant mesh type:
These gears are always in mesh. Usually the gears are helical in shape. The transmission is
put into operation by engagement of shifting couplings, which slide along the splines on the
counter-shaft and the output shaft of the gear box (Fig. 11.6).
c) Simple unsynchronized systems:
In this system, gears are spinning freely and their relative speeds must be synchronized by
the operator to avoid noisy and damaging "clashing" and "grinding" when trying to mesh the
rotating teeth (Fig. 11.7). It required skills of timing and careful throttle manipulation when
shifting, so that the gears would be spinning at roughly the same speed when engaged;
otherwise the teeth would refuse to mesh.
96 www.AgriMoon.Com
Fig. 11.6: Constant mess transmission system

(Source: http://topmech.narod.ru/Output/files/tnmfiles/OD1005/ch3.htm)
Fig. 11.7: Simple unsynchronized systems

(Source:http://wikicars.org/images/en/thumb/c/c8/Gearbox_diagram.JPG/400px-
Gearbox_diagram.JPG)
For the collar shift style, the gears are built up into a stack. The gears do not slide back and
forth. These gears are not splined to the main shaft but are free to rotate when not engaged.
97 www.AgriMoon.Com
There is a shift collar in between each gear pair, i.e. 1st & 2nd or 3rd & 4th. This collar is
splined to the main shaft, and is the movable component when a speed change is called for.
d) Synchronized systems:
In the system, the gearbox is of constant mesh type, in which all gears are always in mesh but
only one of these meshed pairs of gears is locked to the shaft on which it is mounted at any
one time, the others being allowed to rotate freely; thus greatly reducing the skill required to
shift gears (Fig. 11.8). These systems that will automatically "mesh" while changing gears.
Basically the same as the manual shift except it has synchronizers and can be shifted on the
go. The clutch should always be used for starts, stops as well as shifting. It usually has 6-8
forward gears and 1-2 reverses.
Fig. 11.8: Synchronized systems

(Source:http://static.ddmcdn.com/gif/transmission-5speed-gears.gif)
Let's suppose our transmission is synchronized between 3rd and 4th gears. We'll start out in
3rd gear, and then shift into 4th. As we shift, the first occurrence in the chain of events is that
98 www.AgriMoon.Com
we move the transmission out of 3rd gear, and into neutral. As we continue moving the shift
lever towards 4th gear, a brass cone applies friction to 4th gear, increasing or decreasing it's
speed to match that of the rotating collar. Once the speeds have equalized, the gears still may
not be lined up with each other, so there are little triangular shaped teeth around the outer
circumference of the brass cone, which serve to ever so slightly rotate the shift collar teeth
and the gear teeth into perfect alignment. This whole process occurs rapidly, usually
allowing a straight-through shift, directly out of one gear and into the next. Synchro
transmissions range from simple, where only a single pair of gears are synchronized, on up
to full synchronization of all speeds, including forward and reverse
c) Hydrostatic Transmission:
Hydrostatic transmissions transmit all power with hydraulics i.e. with the power of oil.. One
half of the transmission is a variable displacement pump and the other half is a hydraulic
motor. A movable swash plate controls the piston stroke to change the pump's displacement.
A hydrostatic transmission works as being a variable-displacement hydraulic pump, driving
a fixed-displacement hydraulic motor (Fig. 11.9).
The greatest advantage of a hydrostatic transmission is the ability to infinitely vary the
ground speed and quickly change directions. Another advantage is reliability. This
transmission is self-protecting from operator abuse. Also, on foot pedal controlled
transmissions, there is a built in safety factor in that you need only lift your foot from the
pedal, to bring the tractor to a controlled stop. Their disadvantages are high cost, sensitivity
to contamination and a slight loss of power at the PTO shaft. You must also remember to
apply the parking brake when you park the tractor on a slope.
Fig. 10.9: Hydrostatic transmission

(Source:http://www.google.co.in/imgres?imgurl=&imgrefurl=https%3A%2F%2Ffanyv88.com%3A443%2Fhttp%2Fwww.yout
ube.com%2Fwatch%3Fv%3DqxZFSNITK&h=0&w=0&sz=1&tbnid=4Ga0WJ9zO7jx9M&tbnh
=168&tbnw=299&zoom=1&docid=YODn5B0eKQyyFM&ei=6MPTUuT5GYLVrQe_i4GwBQ&
ved=0CAIQsCUoAA)
Hydrostatic is, by far, the best choice for turf mowing applications or for any tasks that
require constant speed and direction changes within a small area. They are used in the drive
train of riding lawnmowers and lawn tractors and applications requiring continuously
variable control.
A hydraulic automatic transmission consists of the following parts:
99 www.AgriMoon.Com
 Fluid coupling or Torque converter: A hydraulic device connecting the engine and
the transmission. It takes the place of a mechanical clutch, allowing the engine to
remain running at rest without stalling. A torque converter is a fluid coupling that also
provides a variable amount of torque multiplication at low engine speeds, increasing
"breakaway" acceleration.
 Planetary gear set:A compound planetary set whose bands and clutches are actuated
by hydraulic servos controlled by the valve body, providing two or more gear ratios.
 Valve body:A hydraulic control center that receives pressurized fluid from a main
pump operated by the fluid coupling/torque converter. The pressure coming from
this pump is regulated used to run a network of spring-loaded valves, check balls and
servo pistons. The valves use the pump pressure and the pressure from a centrifugal
governor on the output side (as well as hydraulic signals from the range selector
valves and the throttle valve or modulator) to control which ratio is selected on the
gear set; as the car and engine change speed, the difference between the pressures
changes, causing different sets of valves to open and close. The hydraulic pressure
controlled by these valves drives the various clutch and brake band actuators, thereby
controlling the operation of the planetary gear set to select the optimum gear ratio for
the current operating conditions. However, in many modern automatic transmissions,
the valves are controlled by electro-mechanical servos which are controlled by the
Engine Management System or a separate transmission controller.
d) Continuously variable Transmission:
A different type of automatic transmission is the continuously variable transmission or CVT,

which can smoothly alter its gear ratio by varying the diameter of a pair of belt or chain-
linked pulleys, wheels or cones. Some continuously variable transmissions use a hydrostatic
drive consisting of a variable displacement pump and a hydraulic motor to transmit power
without gears. CVT designs are usually as fuel efficient as manual transmissions in city
driving, but early designs lose efficiency as engine speed increases.
A slightly different approach to CVT is the concept of toroidal CVT or IVT (from infinitely
variable transmission). These concepts provide zero and reverse gear ratios.
V. Tractor Transmission Performance:
The relationship between engine brake power and power in the drive wheels of tractor are
discussed below.
i. Engine Brake power
The engine brake power (W) is given by the following equation
... (11.10)
Where, W= engine brake power, kW
Ne = engine RPM
100 www.AgriMoon.Com
Te = engine torque, N-m
Or ...
(11.11)
Where, W= engine brake power, HP
Ne = engine RPM
Te = engine torque, Kg-m
ii. Power in the drive wheels of tractor
The power in the drive wheels of tractor is given by
... (11.12)
Where, Ww = power in drive wheels of tractor, kW
Tw = drive wheel torque, N-m
Nw = drive wheel RPM
Based on torque speed relationship of tractor power transmission as given in eqns. 8.2 and
8.3, the transmission efficiency (ηt) is given by the following equation.
... (11.13)
Where, Te = engine torque, N-m or Kg-m
Ne = engine RPM
Tw = drive wheel torque, N-m
Nw = drive wheel RPM
ηt = transmission efficiency, %
iii. Drawbar power of tractor
It primarily depends on drawbar pull developed by the tractor and its speed of operation.
The drawbar power of tractor is given by
...(11.14)
Where, Wd= drawbar power, kW
P = drawbar pull, kN
S = speed, km/hr
Or, ...(11.15)
Where, Wd = drawbar power, HP
P = drawbar pull, Kg
S = speed, m/s
VI. Design Procedure for Gearbox of a Tractor
i. Design Considerations
1. To reduce the size of gearbox, the intermediate shaft should have as high speed as possible.
2. At any point of time only one set of gears should be in mesh. In other words, one set of
gears must be completely disengaged before the other starts to engage.
3. The transmission ratio (TR) of a pair of gears in a gearbox should satisfy following
condition.
4. The speed range ratio (Maximum shaft speed divided by minimum shaft speed) should not
be more than 8.
5. In case of sliding gearbox, the centre distance between two shafts should remain constant.
Or in other words the sum of number of teeth of meshing gears must be constant.
6. In a gearbox same module (m) of the gear set must be used.
7. The minimum difference between the numbers of teeth of adjacent gears must be 4.
8. The minimum numbers of teeth (in a set for spindle drives) should be greater than 17 to
avoid interference of tooth.
VII. Differential
Differential of a tractor consists of planetary gear system which has four bevel gears (two
side gears and two pinions). It also has a pair of bevel gears consisting of a pinion and crown
wheel fitted at right angle to each other to transmit power received from the gearbox to the
rear axles. In other words, the input power to the planet carrier attached to the crown wheel
and output power to the side gears mounted on the counter shafts gives drive the rear
wheels. It acts as a speed reduction and transmission of power at 90°. The differential divides
the power into equal parts and finally to the rear wheels. It allows one wheel of tractor to
move faster than the other wheel while taking turns. When the tractor is moving straight
ahead, the bevel pinions of differential do not rotate on their carrier shafts and both the side
gears rotate at same speed. A differential lock is also provided to prevent excessive spin of
one wheel than the other when a resistance to wheel is different. If one wheel of tractor gets
in the mud or loose soil, the other wheel on the solid ground will not move while the other
wheel spins around due to differential action. To overcome this problem differential lock is
provided which allow both the wheels to move with same speed and apply equal torque.
The torque transmitted by both the axles of tractor would be equal as the bevel pinions of
differential are exerting equal torque on both the side gears.
Transmission efficiency of differential of tractor is given by
... (11.16)
Where, ηd = Transmission efficiency of differential
Wa = power output through both the axles, kW
Wbp = power input to differential through bevel pinion, kW
Also,
... (11.17)
Where, Tbp = torque input to bevel pinion of differential, Nm
Nbp = RPM of bevel pinion
Tal = torque output from left axle, N.m
Tar = torque output from right axle, N.m
Nal = RPM of left axle
Nar = RPM of right axle
ηd = transmission efficiency of differential, %
While moving straight, the torque in both the axles should be equal
Therefore Tal = Tar = Ta …. (11.18)
Where, Ta = rear wheel axle torque.
And average speed of the axle (Na) would be
…..
(11.19)
From eqns. 11.17, 11.18 and 11.19
We get,
Or ... (11.20)
... (11.21)
ii. Speed division by the differential
While taking turns, the role of differential comes into picture and as per the principles of
differential gears, the reduction in speed of inner sun gear will be added up to the speed of
outer sun gear. The speed of crown wheel during turnings would be average speed of two
drive wheels of the tractor as given by following equation.
... (11.22)
Where,Nc = crown wheel speed, rpm
Ni = inner wheel speed, rpm
No = outer wheel speed, rpm
iii. Design of Bevel Gears of differential
The following points should be taken into account while designing a bevel gear drive for a
differential:
1. The gear should have sufficient strength so that, it does not fail at starting torques
under dynamic running conditions.
2. The teeth must have very good wear characteristics so that the life of gear is long.
3. The suitable material must have very good wear characteristics so that life of gear is
long.
4. The drive should be compact and properly designed.
5. The proper lubrication arrangement should be made.
Design procedure
1. Pitch diameters of bevel gears: Let the number of teeth be N and module be m,.
Then,
Velocity ratio =VR =1.7
Take
Thus, the reference angle for tooth of gear = 30.4º
Thus, the reference angle for tooth of pinion= 59.6º
Pitch line velocity: Pitch line velocity of pinion and gear is calculated by
...(11.23)
2. Determination of Maximum Tooth Load: Assuming that the full load acts on entire length
of rotor which is driven by these gears. So, the transmitted teeth load is given by
... (11.24)
3. Materials for bevel gears and Designed Stresses: Let the material for gears be
15Ni2Cr1Mo15 (Nickel chromium molybdenum steel) having ultimate strength-
Taking factor of safety 2.5 for the case hardened steel
Then, design stress
...(11.25)
4. Dynamic load on Bevel Gears: Given in machine design hand books
... (11.26)
Where, Fd = dynamic load, kgf
Cv = Velocity factor =
Vm = mean velocity
Nsf = service factor =1.5
Km = load distribution factor = 1.25
Ft = tooth load
5. Calculation of Pc and Pd : The circular pitch = Pc = λm
Diameter pitch = Pd = 1/m
6. Calculation of face width: Adopting a 20º in volute teeth (the gear Lewis form factor is
given by
... (11.27)
For straight bevel gears = Z1 / cos σ1 or Z1 / cos σ2 =Zv
Zv = virtual number of teeth
Z1 and Z2 = number of teeth in pinion and gear respectively
σ1 and σ2 = reference cone angle in degrees
Yv = π X Y v
Applying Lewis eqns.
...
(11.28)
Where, Fs = strength of tooth in kgf
σu = design bending stress, 3200kg/cm2 for used material
R = cone distance
b = face width
Pd = diametrical pitch
If b is small, then we can take another value.
Check for dynamic load:
Dynamic load is given by Buckingham equation.
… (11.29)
Where,Vm = pitch line velocity m/s
c = constant whose values for 20º full length steel gear is given by c = 11860 × e
E = permissible error in action corresponding to a pitch line velocity (V)
Therefore, Fd must be below the maximum permissible contact compressive stress.
Check for maximum wear:
Formula for maximum wear is given by
Fw =d X Q X K X b ... (11.30)
Where, Fw = wear load
d = Pitch circle diameter
Q = ratio factor 22/(2+1)
k = load factor = (σ)2 × ...(11.31)
α = pressure angle
b = face width
c = design compression strength
It can be checked that Fw must be greater than Fd then only gears are safe for severe services
also.
Module 5. Study of tractor steering and suspension systems
Lesson 12. Introduction and selection of different components for steering systems.
1. Introduction
The most conventional steering arrangement is to turn the front wheels using a hand–
operated steering wheel which is positioned in front of the driver having steering column,
which may contain universal joints, to allow it to deviate somewhat from a straight line.
Other arrangements are sometimes found on different types of vehicles, for example, rear–
wheel steering in combine harvesters. Tracked vehicles such as bulldozers and tanks usually
employ differential steering that is, the tracks are made to move at different speeds or even in
opposite directions, using clutches and brakes, to bring about a change of course or
direction..
The steering system works with the suspension system to provide directional control with a
comfortable amount of steering effort. It must do this while allowing for the necessary
movement in the vehicle‘s suspension system. Some parts serve both systems. The steering
system consists of a steering gear, steering linkage, a steering column and a steering wheel.
Two types of steering systems are widely used in tractor i.e. conventional steering and rack-
and-pinion steering.
I. Basic geometry:
The basic aim of steering is to ensure that the wheels are pointing in the desired directions.
This is typically achieved by a series of linkages, rods, pivots and gears. One of the
fundamental concepts is that of caster angle - each wheel is steered with a pivot point ahead
of the wheel; this makes the steering tend to be self-centring towards the direction of travel.
The steering linkages connecting the steering box and the wheels usually conforms to a
variation of Ackermann steering geometry (Fig. 12.1), to account for the fact that in a turn, the
inner wheel is actually travelling a path of smaller radius than the outer wheel, so that the
degree of toe suitable for driving in a straight path is not suitable for turns. The angle the
wheels make with the vertical plane also influences steering dynamics (see camber angle) as
do the tires.
Fig. 12.1: Ackermann steering geometry and caster angle (Courtesy Melior Inc. 2004)
The steering geometry where the turning wheels advance without any lateral slip is the ideal
Ackermann geometry. According to this geometry (Fig. 12.1) the steered wheels should
always be rolling around a common center located on the extension of the rear axle. In other
words, the inside and the outside steering angles should satisfy the following relationship:
... (12.1)
Where
ß is the angle between axis of outer wheel with tie rod
α is the angle between axis of inner wheel with tie rod
M is the distance between the two points of kingpin extension on the ground
L is the wheelbase of vehicle
If the steering systems not optimally designed, cannot comply with ideal Ackermann
geometry, as a result of this inaccuracy in steering geometry, certain amount of lateral slip of
wheels occurs during turns. This lateral slip increases the rolling resistance, tire wear and
steering effort.
Caster angle indicates kingpin pivot line and gray area indicates vehicle's tire with the wheel
moving from right to left. A positive caster angle aids in directional stability, as the wheel
tends to trail, but a large angle makes steering more difficult.
Types of Steering Systems
1. Conventional Steering:
The worm and sector was an older design used for Willys and Chrysler vehicles, and the
Ford Falcon. Older designs often use the re-circulating ball mechanism, which is still found
on many vehicles (Fig. 12.2). This is a variation on the older worm and sector design; the
steering column turns a large screw (worm gear) which meshes with a sector of a gear,
causing it to rotate about its axis as the worm gear is turned; an arm attached to the axis of
the sector moves the Pitman arm, which is connected to the steering linkage and thus steers
the wheels. The re-circulating ball version of this type reduces the considerable friction by
placing large ball bearings between the teeth of the worm and those of the screw; at either
end of the apparatus the balls exit from the two pieces into a channel internal to the box
which connects them with the other end of the apparatus, thus they are "re-circulated".
It is also referred to as Re-circulating Ball or Worm Gear steering (Fig. 12.3) for the type of
gear it uses or on the basis of the shape formed by the linkage set like parallelogram or
trapezium or simple linkage of steering.
Fig. 12.2: Conventional steering System (Courtesy Melior Inc. 2004)
Fig. 12.3: Recirculating ball mechanism for steering (Courtesy Melior Inc. 2004)
2. Rack-and-pinion Steering:
Rack-and-pinion steering transmits circular motion from the steering wheel to a pinion that
meshes with teeth on a flat rack (Fig. 12.4). The pinion moves the rack in a linear direction for
steering the wheels. It is simpler and less expensive to produce than conventional steering
systems. The rack and pinion design has the advantages of a large degree of feedback and
direct steering "feel". A disadvantage is that it is not adjustable, so that when it does wear and
develop lash, the only alternate is replacement.
The recirculating ball mechanism has the advantage of a much greater mechanical advantage,
so that it was found on larger, heavier vehicles while the rack and pinion was originally
limited to smaller and lighter ones; due to the almost universal adoption of power steering,
however, this is no longer an important advantage, leading to the increasing use of rack and
pinion on newer vehicles. The recirculating ball design also has a perceptible lash, or "dead
spot" on center, where a minute turn of the steering wheel in either direction does not move
the steering apparatus; this is easily adjustable via a screw on the end of the steering box to
account for wear, but it cannot be entirely eliminated because it will create excessive internal
forces at other positions and the mechanism will wear very rapidly. This design is still in use
in trucks and other large vehicles, where rapidity of steering and direct feel are less
important than robustness, maintainability, and mechanical advantage.
Fig. 12.4: Rack and pinion type steering system (Courtesy Melior Inc. 2004)
3. Power assisted steering:
Power assisted steering helps the driver of a vehicle to steer by directing some of its power to
assist in swivelling the steered road wheels about their steering axes. As vehicles become
heavier along with increase in tyre width and diameter, the effort needed to turn the wheels
about their steering axis increases. To alleviate this auto makers have developed power
steering systems: or more correctly power-assisted steering also for off road vehicles like
tractors.
There are two types of power steering systems;
(i) Hydraulic power steering (HPS)
(ii) Electric or electronic power steering (EPS).
(i) Hydraulic Power Steering (HPS): HPS can again be classified in two type of steering
(a) Power rack-and-pinion steering
(b) Integral power steering gearbox – Conventional recirculating ball steering gear with a
hydraulic control system.
(a) Power rack-and-pinion steering systems:
In this system there is a power cylinder/hydraulic cylinder inside the rack or gear housing
and a double-acting, hydraulic piston in the power cylinder that acts upon the rack (Fig.
12.5). Control valve mechanism located in the steering gear senses and controls power assist.
Hydraulic lines or steel tubing from the control valve to the power cylinder that carries the
power steering fluid. Most power rack-and-pinion units have a small tube that runs along the
housing and connects to each bellows boot. This tube allows the air pressure in the bellows
boots to equalize from one side to the other during turns. The power cylinder and piston are
precisely machined and sealed with rubber O-rings. In operation, fluid is directed to a
chamber of the power cylinder on either side of the rack. This fluid creates pressure to move
the piston and thus the rack to the left or right. To sense and control assist, two types of
control valves are used: either rotary control valves, or a spool control valve. Rotary control
valves use a torsion bar attached to the input shaft to make the control valve move, aligning
oil passages to the proper chamber. On spool valve units, the spool valve detects the thrust
action of the input shaft caused by attempting to turn the steering wheel, and directs fluid to
the proper chamber of the power cylinder.
Fig. 12.5: Hydraulic power steering system (Courtesy Melior Inc. 2004)
(b) Integral power steering systems
This type of steering system is commonly used with linkage-type steering. Steering gearbox
contains a conventional worm and-sector gear (Fig. 12.6). The hydraulic power piston and
directional control valve are mounted inside the gearbox housing. As with power rack-and-
pinion units, the valve may be a spool valve or a rotary valve with a torsion bar. When the
steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, the valve maintains equal pressure on both
sides of the power piston. Oil flows back to the pump reservoir. During a turn, the control
valve routes oil to one side of the power piston, which pushes it in the desired direction to
provide assist. The oil on the non-pressurized side of the piston is forced back through the
control valve and to the pump reservoir.
Fig. 12.6: Integral power steering system (Courtesy Melior Inc. 2004)
(ii) Electric Power Steering (EPS):
Computer-controlled electric power rack steering systems are used on some vehicles (Fig.
12.7). These systems use a small electric motor within the housing to assist in moving the
rack. Some include a recirculating ball steering gear. Computer-controlled electric systems
typically use inputs from the antilock brake wheel speed sensors, steering angle and steering
effort sensors, and other inputs to provide the proper amount of steering assist.
Fig. 12.7: Computer-controlled Electric Assist Rack-and-pinion type steering system

(Courtesy Melior Inc. 2004)
Comparison between HPS and EPS:
A hydraulic power steering (HPS) uses hydraulic pressure supplied by an engine-driven

pump to assist the motion of turning the steering wheel. Electric power steering (EPS) is more
efficient than the hydraulic power steering, since the electric power steering motor only
needs to provide assistance when the steering wheel is turned, whereas the hydraulic pump
must run constantly. In EPS, the amount of assistance is easily tunable to the vehicle type,
road speed, and even driver preference. An added benefit is the elimination of environmental
hazard posed by leakage and disposal of hydraulic power steering fluid. In addition,
electrical assistance is not lost when the engine fails or stalls, whereas hydraulic assistance
stops working if the engine stops, making the steering doubly heavy as the driver must now
turn not only the very heavy steering—without any help—but also the power-assistance
system itself
4. Crab steering
Crab steering is a special type of active four-wheel steering (Fig.12.8). It operates by steering
all wheels in the same direction and at the same angle. Crab steering is used when the vehicle
needs to proceed in a straight line but under an angle or when the rear wheels may not
follow the front wheel tracks i.e. to reduce soil compaction when using rolling farm
equipment.
Fig 12.8: Agricultural slurry applicator using crab steering to minimise soil compaction
Lesson 13. Study of tractor suspension system
The suspension system supports the vehicle, allowing the wheels to move up and down over
irregularities in the road. It cushions the ride for the frame, engine, transmission, and
passengers, while keeping the tires in firm contact with the road under all conditions.
Suspension system parts include springs, dampening devices (shocks), ball joints, steering
knuckles, and spindles or axles. Two types of front suspension systems are widely used in
today‘s vehicles: the Mac-Pherson strut suspension and the short/long arm (SLA)
suspension. Early automobiles have a straight axle (I-beam) front suspension, and up until
recently some vehicles were having with a variation called a twin I beam suspension. Many
rear suspensions still use a straight axle.
1. Objective of Suspension System:
Ride comfort is considered as the first objective of the suspension systems of vehicles
including tractors. Ride comfort is an important characteristic of vehicles that indicates how
much riding is comfortable for passengers. Ride comfort is very important for agricultural
tractors also, because the acceleration transmitting to the driver compared with other vehicles
is very high due to more undulations in the agricultural fields as compared to the smooth
road. In addition, the operators of agricultural tractors spend many hours in the field during
peak working seasons. These conditions can affect the comfort, efficiency, alertness, and
health of the operators.
In order to quantify the ride comfort of a vehicle, vibrations of the vehicle body should be
measured in two directions of vertical and horizontal (i.e. roll, pitch and yaw). The most
commonly used measurement methods is the RMS acceleration. Root Mean Square (RMS)
acceleration is defined as:
... (13.1)
Where T = Total sample time,
a = spring mass acceleration,
t = Time.
In order to evaluate the ride comfort, the RMS accelerations of both the vertical and
horizontal directions is measured.
Handling is a characteristic of a vehicle that provides stable and safe driving that can be
created via a steady contact between the tires and surface. Handling is also called road
holding, ride stability, and driving safety, implying the same meaning. The handling
capability of a vehicle is important during maneuvers such as at turning, braking, or

accelerating. In these extreme situations, weak handling reduces the control ability of the
vehicle and can affect the safety of the passengers/drivers. Due to this fact, handling is
considered as an important capability for vehicles, and beside the ride comfort, it is
considered as the main target of using the suspensions in vehicles.
The early agricultural tractors had no suspension systems, and different types of suspension
systems were employed in them gradually with time. The primary systems were seat
suspensions, which were used with the aim of improving ride comfort of tractor drivers.
Along with the development in tractors technology, chassis suspensions were also used for
these vehicles. These systems were able to improve the handling of tractors besides the ride
comfort of them. This provided more safety and stability for tractors, and their travel speed
was increased This begins with characteristics of tires, and suspensions of seat and cabin.
Then, the chassis suspension systems of tractors including front axle and full suspension
were introduced in the tractors.
2. Suspension Characteristics of Tires
When pneumatic tires were used first time for agricultural tractors, ride comfort and
handling were improved, and the travel speed of tractors was increased upto 20 km/h
(Hoppe-01, 2004). Tires are the first elastic elements between a vehicle and the ground
surface. For that reason, the suspension properties of the tires have an important role in the
dynamic behaviour of tractors, particularly for tractors having no other suspension systems.
The suspension characteristic of a tire can be demonstrated by a simple model, which is

constructed of a spring and a damper in parallel (Fig. 13.1). Based on this model, the
measured stiffness and damping characteristics of a typical tire for agricultural tractors are
presented. The stiffness and damping coefficients of the tire are correspondingly too high
and too low than typical suspension characteristic needed for a tractor. Therefore, tires are
not able to work lonely as a proper suspension system, because high stiffness of tires is equal
to a very hard suspension that is unable to provide good ride comfort. On the other hand,
with very low damping capacity of tires, they are not able to provide effective control on
vibrations. In addition to the improper value of stiffness and damping coefficient of tires,
these characteristic are not constant and depend on the inflation pressure and speed of tires.
All these factors cause a poor dynamic behaviour for the conventional tractors that have no
primary suspension,
Fig. 13.1: Single point contact modeling of tires (Courtesy Shahriar Sarami, 2009)
3. Types of suspension systems
(i) Seat Suspension:
The first system used for the tractor was suspension for the seat of the operator. This system
is placed directly between the driver seat and tractor body, and it affects directly driver
comfort and reduces the vibration experienced by him. Seat suspensions are not so
complicated, inexpensive and have a robust construction. For these reasons, they are used on
all modern agricultural tractors (Fig. 13.2). A suspension seat is made of typically a foam
cushion suspended on a parallel spring and damper set. Type of suspension systems may be
mechanical, pneumatic, hydraulic, hydro-pneumatic, or a combination of these systems.
Fig. 13.2 Modern seat using “active seat” technology (CourtesyJonhDeere, 2013)
Air–ride seat from New Holland is another active seat system, constructed based on a
pneumatic suspension. This system uses an adaptive control system that adjusts the
parameters of the suspension relative to the driver‘s weight. Another example of the modern
seats is the semi-active system produced by the tractors manufacturer of Valtra. This system
is equipped with a pneumatic spring and a MR damper, which works as the actuator of the
system. Besides the seat suspension, which has major role in providing ride comfort for the
driver, some other characteristics influence on the ride comfort. For example, size, design,
and materials of a seat have important role in sitting perception.
(ii) Cabin Suspension
In modern agricultural tractors, a cabin is used in order to isolate the driver from the outside,
and it protects the driver from the annoying environmental conditions, dust, and noise.
Using a suspension system for the cabin, driver place could be isolated from the tractor
vibrations as well. A cabin suspension can offer more benefits than a seat suspension and
provide better ride comfort for the driver. Cabin suspension decreases the structurally
transmitted noise to the drivers. Since the mass of a cabin is greater than a seat, the natural
frequency of cabins is lower than the one of seat suspensions. The manufactured cabin
suspensions of the agricultural tractors can be categorized in two groups of semi suspended
and fully suspended. In the first group, the rear side of the cabin is connected to the chassis
by means of two suspension units in its corners. In spite of this, the front side is connected to
the tractor chassis without suspension and only via a joint-type link. This type is often used
for the tractors with front axle suspension. In this system, body vibrations appear on the
cabin as pitch rotational movement, and response of this system to the roll movement of the
tractor body is very limited.
(iii) Hitch Suspension
During transportation, tractors mounted with implements, change largely the mass
characteristics of the tractors, and influence mainly the dynamic behaviour of the tractors.
Without the primary suspension, the tires are the only elastic elements that affect the
handling of the tractors, whereas the tires have no required suspension properties. Under
these conditions, the dynamic behavior of the tractor becomes worse under the influence of
the attached implements, particularly the bounce and pitch movement of the tractor are
increased. This situation causes a reduction in the control ability of the tractor, especially
during high-speed transports which leads to unsafe modes.
In order to reduce the effect of the mounted implements on the tractors and in order to
control their vibration, a suspension system can be used in the connection between them and
the tractors. Since the implements are normally mounted on a tractor via the three-point
hitch, this suspension is applied to this mechanism and called ―hitch suspension‖. Such a
system that employs a hydro-pneumatic suspension in damping the pitch vibrations of the
implement. A hydraulic actuator is used instead of the upper link in this system (Fig. 13.3).
This actuator is connected to a hydraulic accumulator through a throttle valve and works as a
hydro-pneumatic suspension.
Fig. 13.3: A hydro-pneumatic shock absorber system applied to the tractor three-point
hitch (CourtesyGoehlich, 1984).
(iv) Front Axle Suspension
When, four Wheel Drive (4WD) tractors became popular due to the better traction
performance. The front wheels acquired a new role in the traction capability of the tractors
and also in the steering ability of them. In this condition, there is a typical problem of the
pitch movement of the tractors, because it creates load variation on the front tires and cause
the problem of bouncing, particularly during of the pulling heavy loads by tractors. This
produces a traction variation effect, called ―power hop,‖ that is not only uncomfortable for
the operator, but also causes a major loss in the traction efficiency of the tractors. In order to
overcome this problem, the front axle suspension was used for tractors. This suspension
provides a stable contact between the front tires and ground that leads to a significant
improvement in the traction and steering capability of tractors. Because of this advantage,
front axle suspension has become a common option in 4WD tractors now. In addition, the
front wheels are the navigating wheels. They take the major steering and brake loads of a
tractor. Front suspension by keeping front tires in firm contact with the ground, allows better
steering control and brake efficiency. This promotes the handling capability and increases
consequently the travel speed of a tractor.
However, influence of the front suspension on ride comfort of tractors is not notable as much
as the influence of this system on the handling of tractors.
(v) Full Suspension
Higher travel speed is taken into consideration for the modern tractor design (Fig. 13.4). This
led to try for development of high tractor speeds, which are able to cover the transportation
needs of agricultural applications (Goehlich, 1984). As mentioned above introduction of the
front suspensions in tractors provided a major benefit regarding the high travel speed.
However, front axle suspensions can be sufficient just to reach to a limited maximum speed.
In order to achieve a higher speed, the full suspension is needed for tractors. A full
suspension tractor is a tractor equipped with both rear and front axle suspensions. These
tractors can provide improvement on both driving behaviour and ride comfort, promising
the possibility for the rise in the driving speed.
Fig. 13.4: Full frame construction of fully suspension “JCB-FASTRAC” tractor

(CourtesyFASTRAC, 2013).
Tractors with only front suspensions cannot present a perfect dynamic characteristic. The
front axle suspension affects negatively the vibration behaviour of the unsuspended rear
axle, which keeps more than half of the load of the tractor, because by using front axle,
rotation axle of the pitch body oscillation shifts to the rear axle. This increases the bounce of
the rear wheels and decreases consequently the tires contact to the road surface. On the other
hand, the front suspensions have significant effects only on the pitch and longitudinal
vibration of the tractors, whereas the rear suspension influences the vibrations in most of the
directions, particularly in the important vertical direction. After all, using the rear axle
suspension besides the front suspensions can end these problems by creating an essential
contribution in vibration isolation at both the rear and front axles. In this way, a full
suspension system provides both safe driving and good ride comfort for the tractors. Despite
of the advantages of the full suspension tractors, adding the rear suspensions to the
conventional tractors is not as simple as the front suspensions. This is originated from the
typical structure of the conventional or standard tractors, which are about 80 % of the whole
agricultural tractors (Kaplick C., 1995). These tractors have a similar construction and called
block construction. These tractors have a block construction, instead of the chassis
construction. This construction is formed by connecting the three blocks of engine,
transmission, and rear axle unit. Since primary types of these tractors have just rear drive
wheels, in order to achieve optimal traction, at least 60% of their weight stands on the rear
axle, and the rear wheels are selected bigger and heavier than the front wheels.
In the way of modifying the block-type construction of the standard tractors, finally, the
tractors with full frame-type construction were presented. These tractors, similar to
automobiles have a chassis that all the components of a tractor such as motor, transmission,
cabin, and axles are installed on it. These tractors are four wheels drive with the usually same
size of the rear and front wheels. Weight of the tractor is distributed on the wheels almost
equally, causing optimal traction. Position of the driver seat and cabin is shifted from the rear
part of the tractors to the mid-point of them between two axles. This leads to provide better
ride comfort, even if the tractor is equipped just with front axle suspension. As an individual
characteristic of the full frame tractors, the rear axle is separated from the chassis, and it is
connected to the transmission via a universal shaft. With this construction, these tractors can
be equipped simply with the rear axle suspensions. Therefore, along with presenting the full
frame tractors, the idea of the full suspension tractors gets more practicable.
Summary of all these suspension systems used for tractor are mentioned in Table 13.1
Table 13.1: The capability of different suspension systems used for agricultural
Tractors(Shahriar Sarami, 2009)
Suspension Influence on
Ride comfort Handling Expenditure
Seat Middle slight Low
Cabin High low Middle
Hitch Low-middle Low-high Low
Front axle Low high Middle
Full Axle High High High
Module 6. Design and analysis of tractor hitch system geometry
Lesson 14. Design of various components of three point hitch systems.
The tractor hitch system is that essential element of the tractor which binds the prime mover
and the implement into a single working unit. The tractor or the implement will not perform
alone but must work together like two wheels of a cart. The word hitch is defined as a single
articulated point or combination of articulated points and links through which the tractor
delivers tractive effort in the form of full or push to counteract a draft force of an implement
or draft producing body. And the hitch point (virtual or real) is the point on the tractor (as
integral part or otherwise) through which the ―line of push‖ must pass.
In the beginning of traction engine development, the prime movers and implements (mostly
gang plows) were one integral unit. Later as the traction engine prime movers (tractors)
became more popular, tractor and implements were made separate units. This was the point
of introduction of hitch system in tractors and the hitch was a single-point hitch. The depth
control for the single point hitch was internal to the implement. In late 1930‘s Ferguson, an
Englishman developed a hitch system wherein the implement could be integrally mounted to
the tractor. The hitch system was called a ―three point hitch‖. The linkage was designed with
a sensing system that could sense and control implement draft. The hitch system became so
popular that now every tractor models has it.
1. Design Concept
The design of a machine system (hitch system) must be carried out in five stages. First, the
purpose/functions of the system must be considered. Second, necessary motions of
components of the system must be studied. Third, some devices must be selected which will
produce the required motions. Fourth, the forces acting on the members must be analyzed
and overload factors must be considered. Finally, a choice of materials must be made and the
parts properly proportioned to withstand the maximum forces determined. In hitch systems,
it is very important to understand the purpose/ functions in order to relate geometrical
proportions as well as loads imposed for structural requirements. Effective designing, then
entails disciplined methodology in the treatment and analysis of the information.
2. Hitch System Components
Three point hitch system is the only hitch system now available for all implements except
trailers and combines. Thus, information will be restricted to three point hitch system. Three
types of hitching possible with three point hitch system are free float (towed), semi-
mounting, and fully mounting. The components of a three point hitch system and their
functions along with numbers required are given in Table 14.1.
Fig. 14.1: Major components of a hitch system
Table 14.1: Major functions of various components of a hitch system
No.
Component Functions
required
Basic component of hitch system. Connects implement to tractor. Transfers

1. Upper Link 1
hitching forces of tractor to implement and of implement to tractor
2. Lower Link 2 -do-
Lateral Limits the travel of implement in horizontal plane thereby inhibits the
3. 2
Limiters horizontal sway.
Lifts the implements and supports the implement in transport position. It

4. Lift Link 2
provides lateral stability and lateral levelling to the implement.
It provides lateral stability. It lifts implement by giving needed force and

5. Lift Arm 2
motion to lift link and supports implement in transport position.
It connects cylinder and rockshaft. It converts linear motion of cylinder into

6. Rocking Arm 1
rotation.
7. Rockshaft 1 It transmits the rotating motion of rocking arm to lift arm.
It is source of power for lifting implement. It gives linear motion to rocking

8. Cylinder 1
arm.
3. Design Requirements
There are a number of features which are required to be provided in a good mounted hitch so
that the hitch system is able to meet all functional requirements. The following requirements
of hitch system are self-explanatory:
1) Depth control of implement
2) Load transfer to drive wheels of two wheel drive tractor
3) Lateral sway and center-ability
4) Inter-changeability of implement and tractor
5) Fore and aft levelling of implement
6) Lateral levelling of implement
7) Limiting sway of implement
8) Locking hitch laterally when in transport or using PTO with implement or semi-mounted
implement
9) Quick and easy attachment and detachment of implement
10) Adequate lifting capacity of the hydraulic system
11) Independent vertical float of each lower link hitch point
12) Pitching the implement as it is raised
13) Simple and easy adjustment of the hitch
4. Important Features
(i) Depth Control
A good mounted hitch system should be able to provide adequate depth control of the
implement. The word ―adequate‖ is used because there are two philosophies on depth
control. One; the accurate control of a preset tool depth is necessary at all times regardless of
implement draft (position control) and, two: the tool depth vary in different soil-draft-load
conditions to maintain constant draft load on tractor (draft control). The depth control in the
later philosophy is achieved by sensing a force, which is proportional to the implement draft,
by a variety of systems for upper or lower links. In either case, the basic function that must be
accomplished by the sensing mechanism is to create a movement which is directly
proportional to draft. The motion of sensing mechanism is then used by hydraulic system in
such a way that implement is lifted if the draft is more than preset draft and implement is
lowered if the draft is less than the preset draft. The sensing mechanism for depth is many a
times a cam on rock-shaft. The motion of rock-shaft is then used by hydraulic system in such
a way that the implement is lifted if the depth is more than the preset depth and the
implement is lowered if the depth is less than the preset depth. Regulation of the sensing
mechanism is another important aspect which requires attention of the designers. It is given
by the following formulae:
ii. Draft Control
... (14.1)
Where: AFSR=Average force to start hitch to raise
AFSL=Average force to start hitch to lower
iii. Position Control
... (14.2)
Where:
ADSR=Average displacement of sensor from zero depth position to start hitch to raise
ADSL=Average displacement of sensor from zero depth position to start hitch to lower
Poor regulation occurs due to friction, tolerances and clearances which must be reduced to a
bare minimum. A typical regulation curve is shown in Fig.14.2.
Fig. 14.2: Regulation curve for draft control by sensing force in the lower link
5. Dynamic Load Transfer
A good mounted implement should produce maximum possible amount of load transfer to
tractor drive wheels. The free body diagram of tractor is shown in Fig. 14.3. The load transfer
moment and dynamic load transfer is calculated as given below:
... (14.3)
Where: PV = Pull in the vertical plane (resultant of L and V)
B = Angle of pull in vertical

RRS = Reaction on rear wheel under static condition and Y and Z are as shown
in Fig. 14.3.
For rear wheel drive tractor, the dynamic load transfer (DLT) on to drive wheels is given
below:
... (14.4)
Total load increment on drive wheels is sum of dynamic load transfer and vertical
component of the pull.
...
(14.5)
Fig. 14.3: Free body diagram for dynamic load transfer
Thus total load transfer is function of the magnitude of PV, the distance Y, angle of pull B
and shift in contact point Z. Increasing Z and PV increases total dynamic load transfer.
Increasing wheelbase reduces the total dynamic load transfer. The distance Y is given by the
following equation:
... (14.6)
Where:
XI = Horizontal distance (from rear axle) of the point of intersection of the result out of
useful soil forces, parasitic soil forces and weight of implement with parasitic soil forces.
YI = Vertical distance (below the contact point of rear wheels) of intersection of the resultant
of useful soil forces, parasitic soil forces and weight of implement with parasitic soil forces.
The parasitic soil forces are zero for mounted implement and maximum for pull type
implement. Hence, for mounted implements, XI and YI are constant.
The value of B lies between 0 and 90 degrees. It can be easily proved that the TLT is
positively increasing function w.r.t. angle B by substituting the value of Y from equation 14.6
into equation 14.5. The first derivative of TLT w.r.t. B is always positive if B lies between 0
and90 degrees. Hence hitch geometry in vertical plane affects dynamic weight transfer.
6. Center-ability (Lateral stiffness)
The term center-ability refers to the tendency of the hitch system to recenter itself when the
hitch system becomes decentered (Fig.14.4). The center-ability is affected by the hitch
geometry in the horizontal plane. The center-ability is provided by center-ability force of an
implement. This force can be readily obtained from the measurement of a restoring force as
the implement is forced sideways. The center-ability is also referred to the force tending to
recenter a laterally displaced hitch. The center-ability force of a three point hitch can be
increased by making several changes in the horizontal geometry of a hitch system as listed
below:
1. Increase convergence of the Lower Link: This tends to shorten the effective beam length of
the implement (which is the distance to the instant center T Fig. 14.4). The shorter beam
length increases the lateral of the pull of lower link which provides the main component of
the centering force on the tool.
2. Lengthen the Upper Link: This tends to decrease the decentering moment caused by the
upper link about the instant center T. A longer link will decrease the rate at which the off set
of upper link force from instant center T (i.e. V) is increasing as decentering occurs.
3. Shorten the lower links: This tends to increase the rate at which instant center T will move
laterally as the hitch is decentered.
4. Shorten the lift link: As the hitch is decentered, the lift links become angled in the same
direction. Hence, the lift link force in the lower link tends to recenter the hitch. Shorter are the
lift links, more will be their tilt, thereby increasing the tendency to recenter the hitch.
5. Increase Leverage of Lift Links w.r.t. Lower Link Pivot Point: This means lift link should be
located rearward on the lower links. This will increase the effect on the implement of the
force created by the lift links force tending to pull the hitch back to center.
6. Decrease the Line of Pull of Free Floating Condition of the Hitch: This will increase the
load in the lift links. The effect of the lateral component of the lift link force is increased
thereby increasing center-ability.
Fig. 14.4: Center-ability of the hitch system
7. Trailing Characteristics
The geometry of the hitch system in the horizontal plane influence the trailing characteristics
as shown in Fig. 14.5. The trailing characteristics of a mounted implement should be such
that a reasonably uniform width of cut is maintained when operating around a curve without
adversely affecting the tractor steering. If the rear-mounted implement is not permitted any
lateral movement w.r.t. tractor, the implement will cut to outside when operating on a curve
and steering response may be poor because of the side forces introduced by the implement.
These effects are particularly objectionable with a directional implement such as plow. A
laterally swinging hitch gives easier steering, but the implement under-cuts on a corner A
non-directional tool tends to move along the line of pull when the tractor is on a curve. The
linkage adjusting itself so that BH is perpendicular to the radius drawn through H. The
implement appears to be pulled from a point within small area A1. The directional tools,
however, tend to go in the direction they are pointed, rather than in the direction of pull. In
this case, the implement is pulled from virtual hitch point in the zone A2 and implement
adjust itself so that A2H is perpendicular to the radius drawn from H. Since A2 is further
forward than A1, directional tool cuts the corner even more than an implement free to move
in the direction of pull. For ideal trailing of any implement around a curve, the horizontal
hitch point should be on the tractor centerline, equal distant from the center of resistance of
the implement (H) and center of pull of the tractor (D).
Fig. 14.5: Trailing characteristics during operation around a curve
8. Hitch Lift Capacity and Stability
A good mounted hitch should be able to lift and transport the size of implement matching
with tractor power is one of the design requirements. The upper limit of the lift capacity of a
given tractor is related to the tractor‘s front end stability moment and minimum reaction
required at the front end for proper and effective steering. The lift capacity depends on
design geometry of hitch system and hydraulic pressure available also. The lifting pressure
requirements vary as the implement is lifted since the hitch geometry changes. It is desirable
to have the lowest lifting pressure at the point the implement comes out of the ground where
the greatest force is required. The instantaneous center (IC) must always be considered when
evaluating lift pressure (Fig.14.6). The force in the lift link is calculated as given below:
... (14.7)
Where: LL =Lift link force
MI =mass of implement
E =perpendicular distance of implement weight from IC
D =perpendicular distance of LL force from IC
The IC will move forward as implement is lowered which changes implement moment and
LL.
Transport stability is the controlling factor for the maximum implement moment that can be
safely considered. The static implement and stability moments are (Fig. 14.6).
... (14.8)
... (14.9)
Where:
IMS = static implement moment
SMS = static stability moment
Rf = static reaction on the front wheel of a tractor without implement
The dynamic implement and stability moments are:
... (14.10)
... (14.11)
Tractor implement system is stable so long as SMD IMD and the difference (SMD - IMD) will
appear in the form of front wheel reaction. Then, from steering ability
…(14.12)
Fig. 14.6: Hitch lift capacity and implement moment
Lesson 15. Kinematic and force Analysis of hitch system geometry
1. Introduction
The hitch system geometry and types of motions needed for various components are decided
based on functional requirements, necessary motions, depth control, dynamic load transfer,
center-ability, trailing characteristics, lift capacity and stability. The hit and miss method is
used to arrive at hitch system geometry both in horizontal plane and vertical plan.
2. Kinematic Analysis
This analysis is done to study motions of various components of the hitch system. Actual
dimension of all components and their relative angles are actually measured to position them
in space (to the scale). The kinematic analysis is then done in vertical-longitudinal,
horizontal, and vertical lateral planes as discussed below:
(i) Vertical- Longitudinal Plane
All dual links are superimposed and hydraulic system is adequately modified to represent
actual controls. The schematic of an actual hitch system with draft control (by sending it from
the lower link) is shown in Fig. 15.1. In all, there are ten components, i.e. (1) tractor body, (2)
upper link, (3) implement, (4) lower link, (5) loading sensing torque arm bellcrank, (6) lift
link, (7) lift arm, (8) piston rod, (9) piston and (10) lever replacing hydraulic system. The total
number of IC of the hitch are:
No. of links (N) =10
No. of IC =[N.(N-1)/2]/2 =45
No. of joints (G) =13
Degrees of Freedom =3(N-1) -2G =1
Thus, linkage is constrained with a definite rate relationship between all links since degree of
freedom is one. This means if one link moves, all links move with it. The virtual hitch point
will always be along the line of upper link (link 2). It is at the intersection of upper and lower
links for free float state and at the intersection of line of PV and upper link for restrained
state. The velocity and acceleration diagrams can be constructed to find inertial forces and
torque acting on each link. The system can also be analyzed with regard to swap of each link
as cylinder moves from minimum to maximum position.
Fig. 15.1: Schematic of hitch system in vertical longitudinal plane
(ii) Horizontal Plane
In horizontal plane, the hitch system is considered to be a four bar linkage, i.e. (1) tractor
body, (2) upper link, (3) lower link and (4) implement. It gives a total of six IC. The degree of
freedom is the same as for vertical – longitudinal plane. The direction of motion of any point
in horizontal plane is perpendicular to the line joining the IC for the link on which the point
lies. Similarly, velocity and acceleration diagram of the four bar linkage can be analyzed to
find inertial forces and torque acting on the links.
(iii) Vertical Lateral Plane
Most implement that are not much wider than tractor are operated with rotational restraint
in this plane. Thus, hitch is rigid with no degree of freedom in the vertical lateral plane. The
implements which are wide relative to tractor are not used with restraint in this plane. The
lift link restraint is made free to telescope. The schematic in the above case is shown in Fig.
15.2. The instantaneous center or virtual hitch point F is above surface. The implement will
rotate relative to the tractor about point F. Since the IC is above ground, the implement
bottoms will have to shift laterally in the soil during rotation. The amount of lateral
movement U of the implement bottom depends on the distance W, the bottom is below F for
a given rotational angle. Thus, U can be made small if W is small. Hence, moving F lower is
desirable but it should not be done without considering its effect in other planes.
Fig. 15.2: Schematic of hitch system in vertical lateral plane
3. Force Analysis
The forces on the hitch system are a system of non-coplanar, non-concurrent and non-parallel
forces. To have equilibrium, the following conditions must be considered:
∑ FV = 0 ∑ MV = 0
∑ FL = 0 ∑ ML = 0
∑ FH = 0 ∑ MH = 0
This means the forces in the vertical, lateral and horizontal directions must be in balance and
moments in vertical-lateral (V-H), vertical-longitudinal (L-V) and horizontal (L-H) planes
must be in balance. Equations can be developed for complete force analysis in three planes
for better results. However, graphical technique can also be applied to find forces at various
points so as to draw free body diagram of each link. Then, each link is analyzed with regard
to type of loading, i.e., tension/compression, torsion, bending and shear. The cross-section of
each component is then determined by using machine design principles. Table 15.1 gives
type of load acting on each link.
4. Transport Shock forces
Rear mounted implements impose a cantilever type of load through the hitch system. The
combination is rigid to such a degree that implements transported over rough terrain will be
exposed to high shock loads due to some looseness in the linkage. The sensing system is
generally not cushioned for protection. The shock loads can be reduced by having a pressure
relief value in the hydraulic cylinder. The shock factors with a proper relief valve can be still
as high as six for upper link and five for lift link for 60 kW tractor for a heavy and long
implement. However, in case of close coupled tool mounted on a 60 kW tractor, the shock
factor can be as high as eight in upper link and four in lift link.
Table 15.1: Types of loads on various links of the hitch system
Module 7. Design of a tractor hydraulic system
Lesson 16. Study of tractor hydraulic systems and controls
1. Introduction
Hydraulic System of a Tractor is provided to enable the tractor to raise or lower heavy
implements as per requirements and to control implement depth during field operations
with minimum efforts.
2. Fundamentals and components for fluid power transmission
Fluid power is based on the principle of Pascal‘s law which states that pressure applied to a
fluid is transmitted equally in all direction. Hydraulic Fluid is assumed as incompressible.
The fluid pressure controls the force of output. (P= F/A= force/area). The fluid flow controls
the speed of output. The basic components of fluid power transmission are as follows:
1. Reservoir
2. Pump
3. Motor
4. Cylinder
5. Valves
6. Fittings and tips
7. Lines and Hoses
8. Hydraulic oil
i. Reservoir
In the modern tractors transmission case also serves as hydraulic reservoir. The reservoir is
vented to atmosphere to accommodate changing oil levels. The air vent is provided with a
filter to prevent dirt/dust entry into the reservoir. The hydraulic reservoir stores non-
pressurized hydraulic fluid, typically hydraulic oil. This fluid is the lifeblood of the hydraulic
system. The hydraulic oil also travels through a filter that collects impurities. The metal walls
of the reservoir cool the fluid by allowing heat to escape. The reduced pressure in the
reservoir also allows trapped or dissolved air to escape from the fluid. Generally, the size of
the reservoir should be 3 times system capacity, or 1.5 times the pump GPM rating. The
reservoir must also have adequate surface area to allow heat to disperse.
ii. Pump
Hydraulic pump transfer the fluid from the reservoir to the hydraulic system. This transfer
raises the energy level of the fluid by increasing its pressure. One-stage, or single-stage,
pump has only one maximum pressure and one flow rate. Single-stage pumps are typically
attached to the crankshaft or PTO shaft on a farm tractor. Applications for a single stage
pump include back hoes and manure loaders. A two-stage pump will first produce high
volumes of fluid, moving the cylinder in and out quickly. When the pump receives
resistance, a second set of gears will produce high pressures for lifting or splitting. However,
the volume of fluid will drop considerably during this stage. This mechanism has many
practical applications. For example, in log splitters equipped with a two-stage pump, in stage
one, the rod travels faster up the cradle until the rod starts to split the wood. At that point,
the speed slows but the force increases.
iii. Motor
The motor provides the power source for the pump. The high-pressure fluid acts upon the
rod and piston within a hydraulic cylinder. Each stroke of the cylinder converts the fluid
power (pressure) into work (mechanical force). The reservoir oil level falls while the rod and
piston are extending, when the rod and piston retract, the fluid returns to the reservoir.
iv. Cylinder
In a single-acting cylinder, pressure is applied to one side of the piston. Therefore, work
occurs in one direction only. The cylinder returns to its original position under the weight of
the load (or by means of a manual lever). In a double-acting cylinder, pressure can be applied
to either side of the piston. This allows work to occur in either direction. Tie-rod cylinders are
held together by four rods. They cost less than welded cylinders and are easy to repair. On a
welded cylinder, the fixed end is welded in place, adding strength and durability for high-
pressure applications such as log splitters. If cylinders must compress air bubbles, the
efficiency of the system is reduced.
v. Valves
There are two types of valves, directional control valves and pressure relief valves.
Directional control valves manage the flow path of the fluid in the system. Pressure relief
valves protect the system plumbing and components against pressure overloads. They also
limit the output force exerted by rotary motors and cylinders. These valves open whenever
the pressure goes beyond the set value, allowing oil to flow back into the reservoir. The fluid
travels from one component to the next within a hydraulic system through a hydraulic hose.
Directional control or flow control valves used to control fluid flow in the system (speed of
actuators). Check valve allows fluid flow in one direction, no flow in the other direction.
Needle valve- acts like variable orifice to restrict flow. Pressure compensated valves-
automatically adjust the fluid flow to compensate for pressure variations in the system. Ball
valves and Spool valves are used for controlling the flow of fluid.
Pressure control valves are used to control pressure in the system. These are provided to
protect the components within hydraulic circuit from damage from excessive pressure. These
are also called as safety relief valves. Relief valve is essential for safety as it sets maximum
pressure in the system. The most basic type is a poppet held against a cone seat by spring
force. Pilot operated pressure regulator valve provides fast action to respond to flow changes.
Other common types of valves are: Pressure reducing, sequence, unloading valves etc.
vi. Fittings and Tips
NPTF and JIC fittings both prevent leakage on the ports of hydraulic components. However,
NPTF or ―dry seal‖ taper pipe threads do this by using the resistance of the male to female
thread taper. JIC or ―straight‖ threads use an O-ring. JIC and NPTF fittings cannot be used
interchangeably. However, special adapters can be used to convert from one type of fitting to
another. Tractor Supply‘s product catalogue for a complete listing of fittings and adaptors
can be consulted.
There are three types of I.S.O. tips. All three are interchangeable with each other and
universal, except as noted below. The I.S.O. tip with ball was the first standard, universal tip
in the marketplace. It seals with a metal-to-metal seat. This seal tends to ―weep‖ when
disconnected, but it is still the most widely used tip in the industry. The I.S.O. tip with
poppet has the same basic design. However, this tip seals with an O-ring that presses
together with the poppet to form a tight, 360-degree seal. This ―soft seal‖ reduces fluid loss.
In the future, this will be the choice of OEM manufacturers. The I.S.O. tip with pressure relief
poppet has a secondary poppet in the tip. When pressure builds up in the hose, this
secondary poppet allows pressure to be displaced to the coupler. The tip can then connect
without pressure. Certain OEM designs that predate the introduction of I.S.O. tips require the
use of OEM old-style tips. These tips and couplers are unique to each manufacturer, and
cannot be interchanged. Specific conversion adapters are required for these machines to
accept I.S.O. tips.
Galvanized and brass fittings do not meet the psi ratings of hydraulic systems. The metal
tends to flake. This flaking can contaminate the oil and damage the hydraulic pump.
Teflon tape may flake. This flaking can contaminate the oil and damage the pump.
Warranties are typically voided by using Teflon tape. Use a hydraulic-rated liquid Teflon
sealant instead.
vii. Lines and Hoses:
The various components of the brake hydraulic system are connected through lines and
hoses. Lines are made of steel and hoses are made of braided rubber. Lines connect the
stationary parts of the hydraulic system and hoses connect the parts which move in relation
to each other. The size of the pipe, tubing, or hose in a hydraulic system is very important. If
the hose is too small, the oil flows at a high rate of speed. This generates heat, which means
that the fluid is losing power. If the hose is too large, the time and cost of installation may be
too high. A 2-wire hose is recommended for applications above 126.55 kg/cm2 (1800 psi).
However, specifications vary by manufacturer, so read product packaging for specific
application suggestions and psi ratings.
viii. Hydraulic Oil
Hydraulic oil is petroleum oil refined for use in hydraulic systems. This oil typically has
additives to prevent rust and minimize foaming. The term ―hydraulic fluid‖ is often used
interchangeably to mean oil or any other fluid within a hydraulic system. Using the incorrect
fluid can harm seals and cause the system to break down. Oil contaminants can increase
operating temperatures and damage components. Change the oil and filter regularly to
prolong the life of the system. Viscosity is most important property of hydraulic fluid.
Generally, fluid viscosities are recommended between 12 to 48 MPa by the manufactures at
operating temperature of pump. Otherwise, the performance of the pump will be affected
considerably. Each tractor manufacturer specifies the hydraulic fluid that will meet
requirements of both transmission and hydraulic system. The oil temperature should be kept
below 60°C to reduce oxidation of oil. Additives are needed to reduce wear in gear/vane
type pumps above 7 MPa operating pressures.
3. Types of Hydraulic Systems:
Two types of hydraulic system are used ―open center system‖ and ―closed center system‖
refer to two methods of reducing the pressure on the pump, which minimizes wear and tear.
Hydraulic power is controlled by directional flow valves. Valves provide methods to control
one or several flow paths from a single pump with relative ease. These valves regulate the
rate of flow that is permitted to operate individual hydraulic actuators. They direct the flow
path of fluid in two ways.
Open center system: Open systems were common and were used on most of the earlier
tractors. When an open system is in neutral, an open center valve connects all lines directly
back to the reservoir, bypassing the pump. The pump is always pumping, allowing a
constant flow of oil without building pressure.The valves allow fluid to flow through the
center and return to reservoir when the system is in neutral.A constant flow pump is
generally used.
The open-centre system was the first type used on farm tractors, and even today it is most
commonly used. In this type of system a valve ‗V‘ is used to direct the fluid to a cylinder, ‗C‘.
The line diagram of open loop system is given in Fig. 16.1.
Figure 16.1: Open loop hydraulic control
The transfer function of valve V is the ratio of output ‗q‘ (fluid discharge, I/s) to input ‗x‘
(control lever displacement, mm) i.e. q/x and the transfer function of cylinder ‗C‘ is ratio of
output ‗v‘ (velocity of piston/s) to output ‗q‘ (pump discharge, I/s) i.e. v/q. The overall
transfer function of the system can be combined simply by multiplying V X C as given below:
... (16.1)
In this type of system the hydraulic cylinder may have a stroke control device that returns the
fluid to sump when cylinder reaches the end of stroke. At the end of stroke pressure builds
up, causing the valve to return to neutral position. In most cases the operator is quite capable
of being a part of control system by sensing (seeing) when the cylinder has reached the
desired position, at which point the operator returns the valve control lever to neutral
position.
Closed center system: Closed systems are common on modern farm equipment, including
most of tractor models. When a closed system is in neutral, the closed center valve blocks the
flow of oil from the pump. The oil travels instead to an accumulator, which stores the oil
under pressure. The valves allow no fluid to flow through the center when the system is in
neutral. A variable flow pump is generally used, which stops pumping when the valve is
closed.
In some tractors closed- centre systems are used which employs piston type pumps. Such a
system may have a feedback loop. In correctly designed system, when valve ‗V‘ and cylinder
‗C‘ are into closed loop system, the operator can forget about the control. F is now in the
feedback loop. The velocity, ‗V‘ of the cylinder can now be ―fed back‖ to the valve ‗V‘ by
means of single ling device, F, through the summing junction so as to correct the position of
the valve. This system provides a rapid response to the loads. The line diagram of closed loop
system is given in Fig. 16.2
Lever Valve Cylinder
Figure 16.2. Closed loop hydraulic control
Overall Transfer Function (O/I): Overall transfer function of closed loop is given by
... (16.2)
Where, V= valve in which the input is the motion of spool (x) and output is fluid flow rate
(q). The output/input ratio of valve is also known as flow gain, L/s/mm.
C = dynamic behavior i.e. Velocity of cylinder (v) of the system (Cylinder + hydraulic oil
+ masses attached to the cylinder).
F = feedback loop force (draft sensing force), which might be either a mechanical linkage
attached to an ―error bar‖ or pressure line to sense the load on, or position of the output of
the cylinder.
4. Hydraulic control in tractor
i. Automatic hydraulic control
This is also known as an automatic control or feed back system. This compares the output
signals to the input signals and uses the difference to change the output. These can be open
loop control system or closed loop control system. The main difference between the two
systems is that the open centre system maintains a constant flow of oil, and the closed system
maintains a constant pressure when not in use.
ii. Automatic position control system
Automatic position control system is normally associated with a three point hitch system. It
provides automatic control of an attached implement and allows the operator to pre select
and to position the implement as controlled by the hand control lever. The relative position
of hand lever and hydraulic cylinder are always identical. Within the limit of the valve
controlling the maximum pressure, the hydraulic cylinder will automatically move the
implement to its predetermined position and maintain it there, regardless of any leakage in
the system. This system is not used with a remote cylinder.
iii. Automatic draft control system
Automatic draft control system will automatically raise or lower the implement as the draft
of attached implement increases or decreases. The position of hand control lever, in effect,
establishes the draft to be maintained.
The sensing device which actuates the hydraulic system to lower or raise the hitch system is
located on either the lower links or upper link, depending upon the size of tractor. The load
sensing system senses the load and sends a message to the pump causing it to provide just
enough pressure to overcome the load. Under no-load condition, it works under less
pressure. Regulation of draft sensing mechanism is given in Fig. 16.3 and it is calculated as
given below:
...
(16.3)
Where,
Fr = Average force to start hitch to raise
F1 = Average force to start hitch to lower
Figure 16.3. Regulation curve for draft control by sensing force in the lower link
Maintaining desired fluid pressure in the system requires power from the engine, just as
power is required to maintain constant flow in open-centre system. The main advantage of
load sensing system is reduction in power consumption by the pump. However, this system
requires an extra line to sense the load and relay message to the pump which adds to the
system cost.
Lesson 17. Hydraulic system design considerations
The most susceptible components in any hydraulic system are the pump, motors and
cylinders. In addition, some systems that have proportional or servo valves may also be
highly sensitive, especially to fluid contaminants.
1. Hydraulic Pumps:
The pump is a mechanical device that converts energy from the prime mover (electric motor
or engine) to fluid power energy. Pumps are rated by pressure and flow. Pressure is typically
measured in psi or bar. Flow is measured in liters per minute (l/m) and is a result of
volumetric displacement x rpm. Currently there are three types of hydraulic pumps used;
gear pumps, axial piston pumps and vane pumps. All are positive displacement pumps and
each has its own limitations and advantages.
(i) Gear Pumps
When new; most gear pumps have a practical efficiency of 85% to 90% and will decrease over
time. New piston and vane pumps‘ efficiencies are somewhere around 90 to 95% and too will
lose efficiency as the pump wears. Industrial standards for pump lifetimes are between 8000
to 10000 hours of operation. All pumps work by mechanically squeezing the fluid between
mating surfaces. In gear pumps it is the meshing of the gears pushing against the pump
housing wall, in piston pumps it is the piston pushing in the piston silo against a valve plate,
and in vane pumps it is the vanes pushing against the pump housing wall. In all cases the
pumps are dependent on maintaining lubricity between mating surfaces to prevent material
on material wear. All three types of pumps are sensitive to fluid contamination, some more
than others. Gear pumps are the least sensitive while piston and vane pumps are the most
sensitive. All pumps are also sensitive to fluid cavitations or air bubbles that form in the
fluid. These bubbles when compressed will explode creating pitting and pockets in the pump
material.
Pumps are designed to have a controlled rate of internal leakage to provide lubrication to the
rotating parts and to provide pump cooling. As pumps wear over their lifetimes, the ability
to produce pressure and flow diminishes along with ever increasing internal leakage. From a
practical standpoint, when pump efficiencies start dropping below 80 to 85%, depending on
the type, it is time to replace the pump or rebuild it. Petroleum based mineral oils are mostly
used as hydraulic oil. Hence, hydraulic pumps have been designed around using mineral oil
based fluids.
Gear pumps are the most commonly used hydraulic pumps. They are less mechanically
complicated and are cheaper to manufacture. Gear pump housings come in a variety of
materials from cast aluminum to 316 L stainless steel. The manufacturer decides on the best
combination of materials for the target market. Even though gear pumps are less efficient
than piston or vane pumps, the advantage of low cost and contamination robustness make
them a good choice for the majority of applications, from mobile to portable to fixed sites.
Gear pumps are used in applications that are ≤3000 psi (210 bar). Some gear pumps achieve
pressures in excess of 3000 psi but this is the exception rather than the rule.
(ii) Vane pumps:
One great advantage of a vane pump provides is that it runs quieter than either gear pumps
or piston pumps. Also, vane pumps exceed gear pumps in pressures up to ≤ 4000 psi. Of the
three pump types vane pumps tend to be the most dirt sensitive. For some mobile
applications where noise is an application consideration vane pumps are making a
resurgence in use.
(iii) Axial piston:
These pumps are capable of routinely achieving continuous running pressures > 5000 psi
(345 bar). Some units are now approaching 7500 psi (520 bar). A good share of piston pumps
are used as hydrostatic units where the system return flow is fed back into the inlet side of
the pump without the use of large hydraulic reservoirs. The higher pressures, speeds and
absence of large reservoirs are a weight saving strategy. These systems run at slower speeds
and pressures from 1500 to 2000 psi. Piston pumps come in two basic types; fixed
displacement and variable displacement. A fixed displacement piston pump is just that.
Output flow can only be varied by pump speed whereas in a variable displacement piston
pump, the pump volume can be adjusted; thus varying the flow without varying the speed.
Variable displacement pumps have a greater number of moving parts making lubrication
critical. The ability to adjust pump volume is clearly an energy saving feature and positively
affects the pump lifetime. This particular pump is to be used in open system applications.
2. Motors:
Motors are essentially pumps working in reverse. They convert the fluid energy back into
mechanical energy. In the case of rotary actuators (motors) the energy is converted to
rotational force (torque). Force is a function of pressure and speed is a function of flow. High
pressure high torque, high flow high speed. Motors by and large are fixed displacement.
Motors are classified into one of four types; Low Speed High Torque (LSHT), High Speed
Low Torque (HSLT), Low Speed Low Torque (LSLT), and High Speed High Torque (HSHT).
The two most common types are LSHT and HSLT. Just as in pumps there are four common
materials; aluminum, cast iron, cast steel and stainless steel. Although pumps are designed as
gear, vane, and axial piston; motors also have another type of design, orbital. The orbital
motors are exclusively LSHT and are the most popular design of hydraulic motor in use
today. Unlike pumps which can be, quite often, placed in more controlled environments,
such as an equipment room, motors can and are subjected to whatever the environment
offers. The robustness of the motor is critical to resisting the expected environmental
conditions. Other than hoses and fittings, rotary and linear actuators are the chief sources of
fluid leakage. Thus, not only must motors keep the prevailing environment out, but must
keep the hydraulic fluid in. OEM equipment designers carefully select the type of motors to
be used not only on the work to be done, but also on the expected operating environmental
conditions.
3. Cylinders:
Cylinders are actuators that convert fluid power force into linear mechanical motion. The
motion may be pushing, pulling, lifting, or lowering. Although the construction of a cylinder
is fairly simple, having only one moving part, other considerations are critical to application
suitability. Cylinders are made of a number of materials; plastics and composites, steel,
aluminum and stainless steel. Cylinders are either double acting or single acting. Double
acting means that fluid can be applied to either side of piston, rod end or tail end. Single
acting cylinders are capable of applying fluid force to only one end, usually the tail end, and
retract by means of some other force such as gravity or springs. To contain and direct the
force sealing is critical at the piston and rod. Cylinders are applied based on force and speed
of actuation. Cylinders are sensitive to force media viscosities. Where extremely high speed is
required with low to medium force; pneumatic cylinders are usually applied. Since air or
gases have low viscosities but high compressibility or low bulk modulus; they are limited to
the high speed low force applications. High force and low to medium speeds is where
hydraulic cylinders are applied. A basic rule is that the higher the speed the lower the fluid
viscosity and/or the greater the flow.
Just as with motors, cylinders are exposed to a variety of environmental conditions.

Cylinders are too challenged with maintaining both internal and external integrity. As a
component, cylinders represent the single greatest threat to leakage. Systems with a large
quantity of cylinders are a good application for fluids that are eco-friendly.
4. Reservoirs:
The reservoir can be constructed of a variety of materials including aluminum, plastics and
composites, mild steel, and stainless steel. As a fluid storage tank it must assure that the fluid
is protected from the environmental elements, maintain the fluid integrity and provide a
ready supply to the pump. Other functions of the reservoir include providing fluid cooling
through the process of thermal radiation, maintain positive pump head pressure, and
suppression of fluid turbulence. The material that a reservoir is constructed from affects other
system operational parameters. Reservoirs constructed of aluminum, mild steel, and stainless
steel provide the benefit of fluid cooling through the process of thermal radiation to the
external atmosphere. In open loop hydraulic systems and to assure that the reservoir is able
to supply fluid to the pump and provide adequate cooling, it is a rule of thumb to size it a
minimum of 3 times the system flow. For example: systems with flow requirements of 40 lpm
would have a reservoir of 120 litres minimum. In theory the fluid would have 40 seconds
dwell time in the reservoir for every 20 seconds under load. The 40 seconds will provide
sufficient dwell time to cool the fluid and suppress the turbulence under normal conditions.
However, when reservoirs are constructed of plastic or composites and a heat exchanger is
not used, reservoir sizing may be 4 to 5 times system capacity. This allows for longer dwell
times. It is almost imperative that with plastic or composite constructed reservoirs that an
external heat exchanger should be employed. As far as construction materials, aluminum
tanks should be closely investigated.
Tank turbulence from return hydraulic fluid must be controlled. Uncontrolled tank fluid
turbulence creates conditions that can result in pump cavitation when the pump is installed
in the reservoir. Reservoir breathers should be of a filter breather type. A filter breather not
only helps slow water evaporation but also controls the ingression of air born contaminants.
In a non-pressurized tank the breather performs an important function by allowing for the
equalization of atmospheric pressures between the inside of the tank and the outside ambient
pressure.
Lesson 18. Design of main components of a hydraulic System
The hydraulic system of a tractor mainly consists of pump driven by tractor engine or power
train, hydraulic cylinder, control valves and implement lifting mechanism. Design of these
major components is explained below
1. Pump Design
Pumps convert mechanical power to fluid power. Hydraulic pumps which are mainly used
are gear type, roller vane type or axial piston variable flow type. The pressures developed by
three main types of hydraulic pumps are as follows:
1. Fixed gear/vane pump : Pressure up to 10.3 MPa

2. Pressure balanced gear/vane pump : 13.8-24.1 MPa
3. Pinion type pump : 27.6-34.5 MPa
The common speed of operation of pumps ranges from 3000 to 5000 rpm.
Fluid Power of Pump (Wf )
The fluid power of pump ( Wf ) is given by
... (18.1)
Where,
Wf= fluid power, kW

Q = pump discharge, 1/m
P = pressure across the pump, MPa
Shaft Power of Pump
The shaft power of pump (Ws) is given by
... (18.2)
Where,
Ws = shaft power of pump, kW

T = input shaft torque, N-m
N = shaft speed, rpm
Also,
... (18.3)
Where,
nm= mechanical efficiency or overall efficiency of pump.
Actuator – linear: Converts fluid power to linear mechanical power. Single acting and double
acting hydraulic cylinders are given in Figs. 18.1 and 18.2.
Force in the cylinder is given by
... (18.4)
... (18.5)
Where, Fe= extension force in the cylinder, N;
Fre = retraction force in the cylinder, N
P= fluid pressure in actuator, N/mm2
Ac = cross sectional area of ram, mm2
A r = cross sectional area of rod, mm2
Where, V = speed of ram is cylinder, m/s.
Theoretical discharge of hydraulic pump is given by
... (18.6)
Where,
Dp = volume of displacement of pump in one revolution

N = pump speed, rpm
For plunger barrel type pumps, the discharge is given by
... (18.7)
Where, A= area of plunger, cm2
L= length of stroke, cm
N= pump speed, rpm
The actual discharge of hydraulic pump is given by
...(18.8)
For plunger barrel type pumps
... (18.9)
Where,
ηv = volumetric efficiency of the pump, and is dependent on internal leakage and

compressibility of the oil.
Pump Torque (Tp)
The pump torque ( Tp ) is given by
... (18.10)
Where,
Tth = theoretical input torque, N-m
P = pump outlet pressure minus pump inlet pressure (bar).
The actual pump torque ( Tp) is given by
.. (18.11)
Where,
ηt = torque efficiency of pump, %.
Input or Shaft Power (Ws)

The input or shaft power (Ws) of hydraulic pump is given by
... (18.12)
Ws = input or shaft power in kW
T = input shaft torque, N-m
N = shaft speed, rpm
Hydraulic/ Fluid power of pump (Wf)
The Hydraulic/ Fluid power of pump (Wf) is given by
... (18.13)
Where,
Q = actual pump discharge, 1/m
P = pressure across the pump, MP
Also ... (18.14)
Where,
Q = actual pump discharge, 1/s
H = Head, m
Overall Efficiency of Pump ( ηm)
Overall Efficiency of Pump (ηm ) is given by
... (18.15)
2. Flow Control Valves
It is used to control fluid flow in the system (speed of actuators). Check valve allows fluid
flow in one direction, no flow in the other direction. Needle valve- acts like variable orifice to
restrict flow. Pressure compensated valves- automatically adjust the fluid flow to compensate
for pressure variations in the system. Ball valves and Spool valves are used for controlling the
flow of fluid.
Following orifice equation can be used to calculate the flow rate (Q) at a given pressure drop
across the orifice.
... (18.16)
Where,
Q= fluid flow rate through control valve, 1/m
Cd = coefficient of discharge, dimensionless
a = area of cross section of orifice of control valve, cm2
σp= pressure drop across orifice, MPa
p = density of fluid, Kg/1
Velocity of fluid flow though the orifice is calculated by following equation
Vo = Q/6a ... (18.17)
Where, V o = velocity of fluid flow though orifice, m/s
3. Lines – pressure, return and intake
Hydraulic lines are used to convey the fluid to remote locations under pressure and dissipate
heat developed in the system. The lines should be strong enough to with stand the fluid
pressure developed during operation and their size should be such that the pressure drop is
minimum. Rigid lines are made of steel while flexible are made from reinforced rubber. Wall
thickness of conduit pipe used for fluid pressure lines is calculated based on maximum
pressure and hoop stresses developed that would cause failure of conduit pipe along a line
parallel to its centerline. It is given by
... (18.18)
Where, tw = wall thickness of conduit pipe, cm
Pmax = maximum allowable pressure, MPa
dc = conduit diameter, cm
Sd = Design stress for the pipe line, Mpa
4. Hydraulic Cylinder
Hydraulic cylinder converts fluid power into linear mechanical force which can be used for
lifting/lowering of implements attached to the tractor and control depth of operation in the
field. According to fluid flow and forces acting and specific application, the hydraulic
cylinders can be classified as:
1. Single acting 2. Double acting

3. Double acting double rod 4. Telescoping and
5. Cushioned top type
Single acting hydraulic cylinders are most commonly used in hydraulic systems of tractors.
Single acting type and double acting type hydraulic cylinders
Fluid force acting in cylinder (F)
Neglecting inertia force in the hydraulic cylinders, hydrostatic force transmission is given by
...(18.20)
And A1 = (π/4) D2p and A2 = (π/4) (D2p - d2p) ... (18.21)
Or ... (18.22)
Where,
P1, P2 = hydraulic pressure, MPa
Dp = piston diameter, cm
dr = rod diameter, cm
S = stroke, cm
A1= piston area of the cap end, cm2
A2= piston area at the rod end, cm2
F = Force or load moved by hydraulic cylinder, kN
In case the return oil line from the rod end is connected back to reservoir at atmospheric
pressure, then the piston is extending and
... (18.23)
When the supply is to the rod end and the cap end is vented to atmosphere, the piston is
retracting. Then,
... (18.24)
Speed of rod movement (V)
The speed of piston rod in cylinder is obtained by dividing the volume of fluid flow into the
cylinder by the cross sectional area of cylinder bore as under:
Q = 6 AV ...
(18.25)
Where, Q= volume of fluid flow, litres/min
A = cross sectional area, cm2
V = velocity of piston, m/s
Power developed by the actuator (Wa)
The power developed by hydraulic cylinder in kW is given by
Wa= Fe. V/1000 ...

(18.26)
Where, Fe = Force developed by piston during extending, kN
V = speed of ram in cylinder, m/s
Module 8. Study of electrical, electronics and guidance system of a tractor
Lesson 19. Electrical System of tractor
1. Introduction
Electrical and electronic systems have evolved over the years to become an essential element
of modern off-road vehicles. A modern off-road vehicle typically incorporates an electrical
system having its own power generation, storage, and distribution. Vehicle controls and
diagnostics may have dozens of electronic computer-based controllers integrated into its
system. Electrical system of all the tractors is almost same except one or two alterations. In
some of the makes of the tractors, alternator has been introduced instead of dynamo for the
recharging of a battery.
Functions of electrical system for a conventional off-road vehicle are:
 Engine starting
 Lighting (work and safety)
 Sensing, display, and control
 Air conditioning/Ventilation
 Accessory may include windscreen wiping, entertainment systems, radio, etc
2. Components of an electrical system
An electrical system of a tractor consists of the following parts/system, which are explained
below
1. Battery
2. Charging System
3. Regulating systems
4. Starting system
5. Relays and fuses
i. Battery:
Since the source of electricity in a tractor is the battery, let's see how it works: A battery is an
electrochemical device which converts chemical energy into electrical energy. Tractors use
"lead-acid" batteries. A lead-acid battery uses a series of lead dioxide plates for its positive (+)
terminal and porous, soft lead for its negative plates. All the plates are arranged alternately
and submerged in a solution of sulfuric acid and water. The cross section of a battery is
shown in Fig. 19.1. The positive plate's lead oxide is a compound of lead and oxygen. Sulfuric
acid is a compound of hydrogen and the sulfate radical (SO4), so the acid's chemical
designation is H2SO4.
Fig. 19.1: Cross section of a battery
Chemically, when a battery is connected to an external load (a device which uses electricity)
it begins to discharge. As that happens, the lead in the positive plate combines with the
sulfate of the acid, forming lead sulfate (PBSO4) in the positive plate. Oxygen in the positive
plate combines with hydrogen from the acid to form water (H2O), which reduces the
concentration of the acid in the electrolyte. Also, the pure lead in the negative plate combines
with the sulfate, forming lead sulfate and making the positive and negative plates more alike
in chemical composition. Electrons are released during this reaction, creating electrical
current at a specific voltage (2 volts per cell, with 6 cells in a 12-volt battery, described
below). One model HMT 7511 was installed with two batteries each of 12 V connected in
parallel to meet more cranking power required to start the high hp engine.
Chemical reactions:
The chemicals used in a Battery are as follows
1. Sponge Lead (Solid) in Cathode (-ve) plates
2. Lead Oxide (Paste) in Anode (+ve) plates
3. Sulphuric Acid (Liquid)
The chemical reactions take place between the three chemicals in the battery. In the presence
of sulphuric acid, the electrons from one group of plates collect on the other group of plates.
The following chemical reactions take place while charging and discharging (Fig. 19.2)
While charging
At Anode (+ve Plate):
At Cathode (-ve Plate):
During Discharge: The acid H2SO4 attacks lead to form PBSO4 (Lead sulphate)
At Anode:
At Cathode combines with it to form
So both at anode (+ ve) and at Cathode (-ve) is formed. During this process water is also
formed which dilutes sulphuric acid and thereby decreases its specific gravity. This the
battery converts electrical energy into chemical energy during charging and chemical energy
into electrical energy during discharging.
The capacity of a fully charged battery falls down to a much lower value in fully discharged
state. To know the capacity of battery two methods are adopted.
1. Ampere Hour efficiency
2. Watt Hour efficiency
Efficient (AE) = Ah at full discharge/Ah at full charge
Efficiency(Wh) = Wh out put at full discharge/Wh input at full charge
Fig. 19.2: Charging and discharging of a battery
Battery Testing:
A battery can be tested to ascertain its condition by the following tests.
 Specific gravity test
 Open Volt test
 High discharge test
 Cadmium tip test
Specific gravity test: While the chemical reaction taking place in the battery during discharge,
the electrolyte becomes dilute to form water. The proportion of water goes on increasing as
the discharging continues. The relative amounts of water and acid is determined by the
specific gravity test. This is done by Hydrometer.
The Meter of Hydrometer ranges as follows:
1.260 to 1.280 : Fully charged
1.230 to 1.250 : ¾ charge
1.200 to 1.220 : ½ charge
1.170 to 1.190 : Very little charge
1.110 to 1.130 : completely discharged
Open Volt test: The Open circuit voltage of a fully charged battery cell is about 2.1 volts. This
can be measured with the help of a voltmeter. It can be observed that a charge of 0.01 Volt of
open circuit voltage is equivalent to a charge of 0.010 in the specific gravity of the electrolyte.
High discharge test: High Voltage of current is required for cranking the starting motor. To
satisfy this condition, high discharge test is done with the help of cell voltage tester.
Cadmium Test: The test is done to ascertain whether the battery plates are defective or not. It
is done with help of cadmium rod enclosed in a perforated ebonite tube. The rod is immersed
in the electrolyte and connected to the negative terminal of a Voltmeter. Its positive terminal
is connected alternately to the positive and negative terminals of a battery cell. When
connected with positive terminals, the voltage reading should not be less than 2.5 Volts. If it
is less it indicates defective positive plates. When connected with negative plates, if it is more
than 2.5 Volts, it indicates defective negative plates.
ii. Charging System (Generators or Alternators):
How the battery gets charged. In older vehicles this was done with a generator. After that
time all switched to alternators.
Generator:
The basic principle at work here is that electricity produces magnetism. Conversely,
magnetism produces electricity. If a current-carrying coil of wire is placed around a bar of
steel, the bar will become magnetized. The more turns of wire and the stronger the current,
the more powerful the magnet. By placing a soft iron core within the coil, the magnetic force
lines are concentrated and strengthened. As there is less electrical resistance in the iron than
in the surrounding air, the force lines will follow the core.
The various parts of a generator are shown in Fig. 19.3. The two pole shoes of a generator are
constructed in this way. Rather than use magnets - which are heavy and expensive - many
turns of wire are wound around the pole shoes. When a current passes through these
windings the pole shoes become electromagnets, called FIELD COILS. These two field coils
are connected in series (current passes through one and then through the other) and wound
so that one becomes the North Pole and the other the south pole of the magnetic field.
Fig. 19.3: Different parts of a generator
Inside the generator is a spinning central shaft which is supported in bearings at each end.
Loops of wire (armature windings) are wound on a special laminated holder called the
ARMATURE. The armature is turned by placing a pulley on one end of the shaft and driving
it with a V-belt from the engine's crankshaft, as seen in the figure. Attached to the armature
are electrical contact segments, called the COMMUTATOR. These segments are electrically
insulated from the armature - and each other - but each is soldered to one of the armature
windings. It is the commutator which distributes electricity to the armature in an on-off
manner, creating a magnetic field around the armature. Riding over the spinning
commutator segments are carbon "brushes". These brushes are held in spring-loaded brackets
and that pressure holds them against the commutator. It is the brushes which wear out over
time and require replacement.
Generator Working:
When the generator armature first begins to spin, there is a weak residual magnetic field in
the iron pole shoes. As the armature spins, it begins to build voltage. Some of this voltage is
impressed on the field windings through the generator regulator called voltage regulator.
This impressed voltage builds up a stronger winding current, increasing the strength of the
magnetic field. The increased field produces more voltage in the armature. This, in turn,
builds more current in the field windings, with a resultant higher armature voltage. This
voltage could, of course, continue to increase indefinitely, but it is limited (by regulation) to a
pre-set peak. At this point all this sounds like perpetual motion, doesn't it? Remember,
though, that the energy driving all this is the engine's crankshaft!
Alternators
Generators produce Direct Current. Alternator produces an A.C. that in turn must be
rectified or converted into D.C. and then stored in a battery. Alternators are more compact
than dynamo (generators) systems and can supply more current at low speeds because at idle
engine speeds they run at double the engine speed. Hence life of a battery is increased with
the alternators.
Alternators have the advantage of producing far more current at low speeds than generators,
thus allowing more and more accessories in the vehicle. In an alternator, the "field" windings
are placed around the spinning central shaft rather than on "shoes" as in the generator (Fig.
19.4). Two iron pole pieces - cast with "fingers" - are slid on the shaft, covering the field
winding so that the fingers are interspaced. The fingers on one pole piece form the North
poles and the fingers on the other form the South poles. This assembly is called the ROTOR.
Surrounding the rotor are a series of windings around laminated iron rings, attached to the
alternator's case. This assembly is called the STATOR. The engine's crankshaft spins the rotor.
Fig. 19.4: Cut view of a typical alternators
Direct current from the battery is fed through into the rotor's field coil by using brushes
rubbing against slip-rings. One end of the field coil is fastened to the insulated brush, while
the other end is attached to the grounded brush. As the pole fields pass through the stator,
current is electromagnetically produced (as in the generator) but since the rotor is composed
of alternating North and South poles the current produced flows in opposite direction every
180-degrees of rotation. In other words, the current is "alternating". Difference in working of
a generator and an alternator is shown in Fig. 19.5.
Why this is more efficient, as the stator windings are made up of three separate windings.
This produces what is known as three-phase AC. When only one winding is used, single-
phase current results (like in a generator). In effect, the alternator produces three times the
current of a generator for the same effort on the engine's part. Also, alternators are
considerably lighter and smaller than generators.
There's a small problem with alternators, though. AC electricity doesn't work in a tractor.
The tractor's electrical system - and battery - need DC. Therefore, the alternator's output is
"rectified" into DC. This is done by passing the AC into silicon diodes. Diodes have a peculiar
ability to allow current to flow readily in one direction only, stopping the flow if the direction
reverses. Multiple diodes are arranged in alternators so that current will flow from the
alternator to the battery (in one direction only, creating DC) but not from the battery to the
alternator.
In actual operation, the voltage regulator senses the battery voltage and overall demand on
the tractor's electrical system. When charging is needed, the regulator applies battery voltage
to the stator's brushes and this creates the electrical field for charging. As the system's
demand for charging decreases the voltage to the brushes cuts off. All of this occurs many
times per minute, with the system turning on and off repeatedly to keep everything at
optimum operating efficiency.
Generator Alternator
(Stationary magnetic field) (Rotating magnetic field)
Fig. 19.5: Difference in working of generator and alternator
iii. Regulating system
As, there is no system of internally controlling the output of an alternator or in other words,
the faster it spins the more voltage goes into the electrical system. If this weren't controlled
the generator would damage the battery and burn out the lights. Also, if the generator
weren't cut out from the tractor's circuitry when not running, the battery would discharge
through its case.
That's where the REGULATOR (commonly called the Voltage Regulator, but that's only one
component of the system) comes in. Regulators have seen many design improvements over
the decades, but the most commonly used electro-mechanical regulator is the three-control
units in one box type. These are explained below,
(a) Cutout Relay
Sometimes called the circuit breaker, this device is a magnetic "make-and-break" switch. It
connects the generator to the battery (and therefore the rest of the tractor) circuit when the
generator's voltage builds up to the desired value. It disconnects the generator when it slows
down or stops.
The relay has an iron core that is magnetized to pull down a hinged armature. When the
armature is pulled down a set of contact points closes and the circuit is completed. When the
magnetic field is broken (like when the generator slows down or stops) a spring pulls the
armature up, breaking the contact points.
An obvious failure mode is the contact points. As they open and close, a slight spark is
generated, eventually eroding the material on the points until they either "weld" themselves
together or become so high in resistance that they won't conduct current when closed. In the
first case the battery would discharge through the generator overnight and in the second
there would be no charging to the system.
(b) Voltage Regulator
Another iron core-operated set of contact points is utilized to regulate maximum and
minimum voltage at all times. This circuit also has a shunt circuit (a shunt re-directs electrical
flow) going to ground through a resistor and placed just ahead (electrically) of the points
(Fig. 19.6). When the points are closed the field circuit takes the "easy" route to ground but
when the points are open the field circuit must pass through the resistor to get to ground.
The field coil on the generator is connected to one of the voltage regulator contact points. The
other point leads directly to ground. When the generator is operating (battery low or a
number of devices running) its voltage may stay below that for which the control is set. Since
the flow of current will be too weak to pull the armature down the generator field will go to
ground through the points. However, if the system is fully charged the generator voltage will
increase until it reaches the maximum limit and current flow through the shunt coil will be
high enough to pull the armature down and separate the points.
This cycle is repeated over and over in real time. The points open and close about 50 to 200
times per second, maintaining a constant voltage in the system.
Fig. 19.6: View of a typical voltage regulator
(c) Current Regulator
Even though the generator's voltage is controlled it is possible for its current to run too high.
This would overheat the generator, so a current regulator is incorporated to prevent
premature failure (Fig. 19.7).
Similar in appearance to the voltage regulator's iron core, the current regulator's core is
wound with a few turns of heavy wire and connected in series with the generator's armature.
In operation, current flow increases to the predetermined setting of the unit. At this time,
current flow through the heavy wire windings will cause the core to draw the armature
down, opening the current regulator points. In order to complete the circuit the field circuit
must pass through a resistor. This lowers current output, points close, output increases,
points open, output down, points close, and so on. The points, therefore, vibrate open and
closed much as the voltage regulator's points do, many times every second.
Because they are mechanical, voltage regulators are easy to troubleshoot. If you study the
function of each of the three parts and how they interrelate, it becomes obvious which part is
malfunctioning, depending upon symptoms. The point gaps and spring pressures determine
the voltage/current limits and they are exceedingly hard to adjust. Sometimes it can be done
on the tractor using a voltmeter, but generally it is best to replace the entire regulator
assembly when a certain part of it fails. Factory assembly of regulators required relatively
sophisticated measurement instruments. Adjusting them by "feel" is a matter of luck, and
frequently can result in damage.
It wasn't long thereafter that the automobile companies converted to transistor voltage
regulators. Utilizing Zener diodes, transistors, resistors, a capacitor and a thermistor, these
regulators maintain proper voltage and current flow throughout the system. Their circuitry
operates as fast as 2,000 times per second and they are tremendously reliable. On the other
hand, these regulators aren't easy to repair. They are designed to be thrown away and
replaced. Alternators provide three times the current and weigh much less than their old
counterparts.
Fig. 19.7: Voltage and current regulators
d. Starting System:
Electrical system only needs 80 to 100 amps of current for general running, even when all
accessories are operating. Then, why battery does have a rating of 450 to 740 amps or even
more. The main reason for the battery's storage capacity is to operate the starter, and a quick
look at the numbers will demonstrate why this is so important:
Let's take a 500-amp-rated battery for example. At 12 volts, this 500 amp battery is capable of
putting out 6000 watts. We need all the wattage we can get to develop enough horsepower to
turn the engine over for ignition and one horsepower (or the power necessary to lift 550
pounds (249.47 kg) one foot in one second) equals 746 watts. Our battery, therefore, puts out
just over eight horsepower. That's just enough for a couple hundred revolutions of the engine
before the charge is exhausted. Starters are incredibly strong motors that work in a hostile
environment. They are the most important part of the starting system (Fig. 19.8) or circuit,
consisting of the following:
Fig. 19.7: Starting system of a tractor
Flywheel ring gear - This is a toothed ring that is fitted to the outside of the engine's flywheel.
Matching teeth on the starter motor mesh with this gear in order to spin the crankshaft.
Starter solenoid (Relay) - The starter solenoid has very large contacts to carry the battery's full
current. Its wire coil is actuated by a smaller current from the ignition switch, at which time
the iron core slams down to make contact and turn on the starter motor. Most non-Ford
starter motors employ a solenoid built into the motor itself. This type of solenoid not only
provides the motor's electrical power but also mechanically engages the starter's drive gear
onto the flywheel. It is commonly known as the BENDIX type of solenoid. Such solenoids
operate in three stages, the disengaged, partially engaged and engaged. In the disengaged
position the drive gear is released and no current is flowing. In the partially engaged stage,
current from the starter switch flows through both the pull-in and the hold-in coils. Both coils
draw the plunger inward, causing it to pull the shift lever and engage the pinion gear. When
the plunger is pulled into the coil all the way, the pinion fully engages the ring gear. When
the ring gear is fully engaged, engine cranking begins. When the engine starts the hold-in coil
will cut out and the plunger will move out, retracting the pinion and opening the starter
switch.
Starter motor - This is a powerful electric motor that engages the car's flywheel in order to
spin the crankshaft. As in all electric motors, the starter is composed of windings of wire that
form loops, ending at the commutator segments (remember these from the generator?). The
armature coils are mounted on the motor's central shaft (supported with bearings) and the
field coils are formed into four or more "shoes", placed inside the steel frame of the starter.
Brushes are used to create electrical contact to the commutator segments and when current is
fed into two of the four brushes, it flows through all the loops of the armature and shoe
windings and out the other two brushes. This creates a magnetic field around each loop. As
the armature turns, the loop will move to a position where the current flow reverses. This
constant reversal of current flow allows the armature and field coils to repel each other and
spin the motor. The greater the current flowing in the coils, the greater the magnetic forces,
and the greater the power of the motor.
The copper loops and field windings are heavy enough to carry a large amount of current
with minimum resistance. Since they draw heavy amounts of current, they must not be
operated on a continuous basis for longer than 30 seconds. After cranking for 30 seconds it is
wise to wait a couple of minutes to let the starter motor dissipate some of its heat. Starters
heat quickly, so prolonged use can cause serious damage. A typical symptom of overheating
starter motors is extremely slow, labored engine-cranking.
Various wiring designs are used in starter motors and one of the most popular is the four
pole, three winding setup. Two of the windings are in series with themselves and the
armature. One winding does not pass through the armature, but goes directly to the ground.
This Shunt Winding aids with additional starting torque. However, as the starter speed
increases, the shunt still draws a heavy current and tends to keep starter speed within
acceptable limits.
e. Relays and fuses:
All tractors are wired so that the battery's main cable connects to the starter motor windings
(the thick cable is needed for large current flow). This wire must be switched on and off, and
it would be costly and inefficient to route it through the ignition switch. Hence a relay is
necessary.
Relays are devices that utilize a central iron core fitted closely to the inside of a coil of wire.
When the wire is energized the iron core will be drawn down the length of the coil, the
direction dependent upon the direction of current flow. If the relay's iron core is fitted with
large, high current-carrying contacts it can be used as a high-current switch. Relays are used
for horns, electric fans, air conditioning clutches, etc. and the most important one is the
starter solenoid.
Almost everything in a tractor is wired through a fuse. Fuses are designed to fail when too
much current is drawn through the device. This prevents heating of the wires and
subsequent melting of the insulation, followed usually by fire!
Fuses are simple in design. Inside a fuse is a soft wire with a specific cross-sectional
thickness. This dimension dictates how many amps can be carried before the wire melts. Too
many amps and the fuse fails, saving the rest of the circuit from damage.
Typical horn circuit having various components are put together to form a working system:
Battery voltage travels through a high current wire (red) through the relay to the horn and
also through a smaller wire (blue) through the ignition switch to the relay's low-current coil.
Important thing is that horn circuit is always "hot" or "live" when the ignition switch is
turned on and all that's needed is a path to ground (Fig. 19.9).
Fig. 19.8: Horn relay system
That path is completed when pushed the horn button. When the button is pushed the ground
connection is made, energizing the relay's coil "A". The coil's iron core (in this particular
design) pulls down arm, connecting high-current contacts "B". High current then flows from
the battery to the horn (the horn is connected to ground because it's mounted to the chassis of
the car).
Lesson 20. Electronics and guidance system of tractor
1. Introduction
Electronic systems have evolved over the years to become an element of modern off-road
vehicles. A modern off-road vehicle typically incorporates some computer based controllers
and diagnostics systems.
2. Electronics and instrumentation in tractors can be used for:
1. Continuous monitoring and tracking of tractor
2. Advanced Mechanized Farming
3. Continuous monitoring and tracking of tractor
The instrument panel of a tractor is placed so that the instruments and gauges can easily be
read by the operator. They inform the operator about the vehicle speed, engine temperature,
oil pressure, rate of charge or discharge of the battery, amount of fuel in the fuel tank, and
distance travelled. Vehicle accessories, such as windshield wipers and horns, provide the
operator with much needed safety devices. Now a days all these gauges and meters are of
electronic types.
An electronic tachometer obtains a pulse signal from the ignition distributor, as it switches
the coil on and off. The pulse speed at this point will change proportionally with engine
speed. This is the most popular signal source for a tachometer that is used. Electronic
speedometers and tachometers are self contained units that use an electric signal from the
engine or transmission. They differ from the electric unit in that they use a generated signal
as the driving force. The gauge is transistorized and will supply information through a
magnetic, Analog or light emitting diode (LED)
Continuous monitoring of engine and location of tractor operation is very important

especially when tractor is working at remote areas. Recently New Holland Fiat (I) ltd. has
started a system called ―Sky watch system‖ in India for the proper engine monitoring and
tracking of its working. Alerts are sent through SMS or online detail of following parameters
to the owner.
 Engine oil pressure
 Water temperature
 Engine hours
 Tractor location
 Fuel level
 Service reminders
Potential Customers of Sky Watch Tractor may be;
 Tractor Fleet Owner
 Custom hiring operators,
 Cooperative service providers
 Tractors Used at Remote Location, like forests, hills etc.
 Tractors used in commercial Applications like Loader, Dozer, Combine, Long Haulage
etc.
4. Advanced mechanized farming
World over, various devices or instruments are being introduced for advanced mechanized
farming. These includes communication between tractor and implement, navigators, Sensors
for soil and plant parameters etc. Some of these are explained below
i. CAN-based tractor – agricultural implement communication ISO 11783 (CANBUS)
The standard forms the backbone of the autonomous agricultural machine system. A logical
consequence of the observed trend toward increased use of electronics in tractors and
implements is the networking of these components. The supplemental costs of networking
represent just a small portion of the overall electronic development costs. Yet they have the
potential of significantly enhancing performance of the total system. Only by networking is it
possible to move toward the goal of achieving autonomous agricultural machines.as shown
in Fig. 20.1. CANBUS have four wire system, including CAN high (yellow), CAN low
(green), CAN power (red), and CAN ground (black). Also, CANBUS contains an electric
power supply, also referred to as the ―active terminator‖, with battery power and battery
ground to keep CANBUS level at the desired Voltage.
Fig. 20.1 Tractor with CANBUS and its wiring diagram (Anon, 2013)
Standardized networking permits multiple utilization of individual components in the

network and this reduces development costs. Automatic interventions into the tractor
controller, e.g. to modify the operating speed or rounds per minute, permits more effective
use of implements. For the farmer and user of the total system standardization also opens up
the possibility of combining implements produced by different manufacturers with different
tractors. Hence a standard protocol has been introduced in tractors for communication and
networking. The standard in the agricultural area for communications between a tractor and
an implement (add-on equipment such as a thresher or a mower) is called ISO 11783 or
Isobus in short. The international standard consists of the transmission medium (Physical
Layer) to application of the entire spectrum of serial communications based on CAN.
Data communication
The ISO 11783 standard is based on CAN, which has been used for a long time in the
agricultural industry. This is a passive two-wire bus terminated at the bus ends by a
characteristic impedance. Each node must be capable of being connected or disconnected
during network operation. An active termination is used to achieve these plug-and-play
properties. This means that the node at the end of the bus must automatically terminate it
with the characteristic impedance to prevent reflections. The data rate is 250 kbit/s with a
sample point of 80 %. Furthermore the entire implement - or at least the electronics - may be
supplied with voltage over the bus. Voltages of 12 V or 24 V are permitted. The maximum
total length of the bus is 40 m, whereby the length of possible branch lines is limited to 0.3 m.
The number of nodes on a bus segment is limited to 30. The wiring used is a 4-conductor,
unshielded, and twisted cable for the CAN network and the voltage supply to the controllers
and to the active termination. Various types of connectors are defined with different
functions: Implement connectors (Breakaway Connector), bus extensions (Bus Extension
Connector) and diagnostics (Diagnostic Connector). The entire Isobus is subdivided into at
least two segments. The Tractor Bus is a segment, which permits communication within the
tractor, e.g. powertrain, valves, etc. The second segment is the Implement Bus. This segment
is available for communication between implement and tractor as well as between
implements themselves. At least one Tractor ECU (electronic control unit) serves as the
interface between the two segments. Communication on the Tractor Bus does not need to be
ISO 11783-compatible.
ii. Navigation System
Automated guidance of agricultural vehicles (tractors, combines, sprayers, spreaders) has

been motivated by a number of factors—most important is to relieve the operator from
continuously making steering adjustments while trying to maintain field equipment or
implement performance at an acceptable level. Global positioning system (GPS) guidance
systems and auto-steer technology make use of the most efficient routes around a field,
eliminating overlaps and skip. Precision Agriculture practices are energy savers. Site specific
farming using equipment guidance (autosteer) systems, yield monitoring systems, field
mapping and precision crop input application provides many economic and environmental
benefits in addition to energy savings. These systems are useful particularly in applying
pesticides, lime, and fertilizers and in tracking wide planters/drills or large grain-harvesting
platforms. Navigation systems help operators reduce skips and overlaps, especially when
using methods that rely on visual estimation of swath distance and/or counting rows. This
technology reduces the chance of misapplication of agrochemicals and has the potential to
safeguard water quality. Also, GPS navigation can be used to keep implements in the same
traffic pattern year-to-year (controlled traffic), thus minimizing adverse effects of implement
traffic (Fig. 20.2).
Relatively inexpensive navigation aids known as parallel-tracking devices assist the

operators to visualize their position with respect to previous passes and to recognize the need
for steering adjustments. These aids are commercially available in several configurations.
One system is a lightbar, which consists of a horizontal series of Light Emitting Diodes
(LEDs) in a plastic case 12 to 18 inches long. This system is linked to a GPS receiver and a
microprocessor. The lightbar is usually positioned in front of the operator, so he or she can
see the accuracy indicator display without taking their eyes off the field. The lightbar can be
mounted inside or outside of the cab, and the operator watches the ―bar of light.‖ If the light
is on the centerline, the machine is on target. If a bar of light extends to the left, the machine
is off the path to the left and needs to be corrected. In like manner, if a bar of light extends to
the right, the machine is off to the right.
Guidance systems are rapidly growing in popularity as savings permit a very short pay-back
time.
Manual guidance – here a display tells the operator where to drive but the operator does the
steering. This type of guidance will generally eliminate half the overlap, reducing it from an
average of 5-10%.
Fig. 20.2: Tractor with satellite navigator (ARAG, Italy)
Automatic guidance – these systems steer the tractor for you and are available in various
accuracies. As steering is done for you it is possible to reduce overlap from 10% down to
about 1%. All guidance systems use commercially available satellites. for basic vehicle
positioning but require a correction signal – there are alternatives with differing degrees of
accuracy but the RTK offering 2cm accuracy is
Module 9. Ergonomics, controls and safety features of an agricultural tractors158
Lesson 21. Importance of ergonomics in tractor and agricultural machinery design.
1. Introduction
Human engineering or ergonomics deals with the aspect of man-machine system which
means engineering the product or machine to fit the operator. Ergonomics (ergo=work;
nomos =laws in Greek) virtually became a field of specialization recently, because now the
objective is to have maximum operational efficiency, which lead to multi-disciplinary
approach. There is a slight variation between two approaches, first approach deals mainly
with integration of man- machine system, whereas the second approach deals with welfare of
the individual concerned. Hence, ergonomics deals with the relationship between man and
his occupation and environment, particularly the application of anatomical, physiological
and psychological knowledge to the problem arising thereof. Objective of ergonomics is also
to achieve a rational use of human capabilities and to an optimum adaptation of the work
situation to these capabilities. Ergonomics, known as Man-Machine-Environment System,
deals with the machine, its operator and working environment as a complete system affecting
the intended work performance. It is sometimes known as human factors engineering or
human engineering. Ergonomics is the study of designing equipment and devices that fit the
human body, its movements, and its cognitive abilities. It deals with the physical work
environment, tools and technology design, workstation design, job demands and
physiological and biomechanical loading on the body.
2. Ergonomics in Tractor and agricultural machinery design
The ergonomic aspects during application in agricultural machinery are of great importance
as the operator has to operate the machine in field. The physiological as well as psychological
fatigue affects performance of the operator. Objective of ergonomics is not only to improve
work performance but also to improve human comfort as well as safety. If ergonomic aspects
are not given due consideration, the performance of the system will be poor and the effective
working time will be reduced. The goal of ergonomics is to design workplace to conform to
the physiological, psychological, and behavioural capabilities of workers. There are many
factors acting as stress on the operator during the work. These stresses may be due to
workload, immobilization for longer duration work, ambient temperature, relative humidity,
vibrations, noise, dust, smoke and other gases. A feeling of chance of accident during work,
space confinement, overload of information to be handled, etc. results in psychological
fatigue. During the ergonomic studies, these stresses can be measured in terms of strain on
the operator. The most important among physiological strains are related to heart activity,
respiration, discomfort, muscular fatigue, etc. For the psychological /mental strain
measurements stress on eyes, hearing loss, errors, speed of work, work performance are
mostly used in studies (Fig.21.1).
3. Subjects
Whenever we have to plan for ergonomic study, subjects (operators or workers) are an
integral part of the study. The objective is to eliminate the affect of individual characteristics
from the rest of independent parameters and also to have an estimate of human workload
during the actual work. The subjects must be medically fit and represent real user population
in operation of the selected machinery. Their selection is made on the basis of gender, age
and weight. Generally male subjects are selected for conducting ergonomic studies on
agricultural machinery in India.
4. Physiological factors for measurements
Physical activities stimulate certain physiological responses in human beings. These

responses provide basis for human energy expenditure and fatigue. The physiological
measurements are made generally in terms of heart and respiration activities.
Fig.21.1. Stresses and strains in ergonomic studies

5. Heart rate
Heart rate (HR) is the most reliable dependent parameter in ergonomic studies. This is
because the heart rate has a direct and linear relationship with the human workload and
stress. A starting period of 2-3 minutes is sufficient for heart/pulse rate to stabilize
depending upon nature of exercise. Also, care has to be taken so that the operator is not
subjected to workload leading to heart rate more than HRmax i.e. the upper limit of heart rate
allowed during an activity.
Here,
HRmax = 220 – age ...(21.1)
6. Respiration rate
The respiration is another basic variable in work physiology as it is linearly related to the
workload. It is measured in terms of rate of volume of air inhaled or air exhaled or oxygen
intake (VO2) or respiration rate. The greater the demands made on the muscle by the physical
activities, the more air or oxygen is inhaled. The human energy expenditure is computed by
multiplying the oxygen consumption with the calorific value of oxygen. The human
workload has been categorized between light work and extremely heavy work depending
upon heart rate or oxygen consumption (Table.21.1).
Table 21.1. Limits of physiological responses and work category.
Physiological response
S. No. Work category
Oxygen consumption (l/min) Heart rate (beats/min)
1 Light work < 0.5 Up to 90
2 Moderate work 0.5 - 1.0 90-110
3 Heavy work 1.0-1.5 110-130
4 Very Heavy work 1.5-2.0 130-150
5 Extremely heavy work > 2.0 150-170
7. Discomfort rating
Body posture is one of the major factor which causes muscular fatigue and discomfort in the
body. Uncomfortable body posture in different activities reduces work efficiency, capacity
and safety of operator. It is widely agreed that awkward working postures are the principle
risk factor associated with muscular-skeletal injuries and disorders during occupational
activities. The effect due to working posture can be measured in terms of overall discomfort
rate and body part discomfort rate techniques. Table 21.2 gives the pain intensity score as
measure of overall discomfort rate. The same score can be used for measurement of body
parts discomfort rating.
Table 21.2. Pain intensity score as a measure of overall discomfort rating (ODR).
Subjective feeling ODR Score Subjective feeling ODR Score
Comfortable 0 Moderately painful 4
Uncomfortable 1 Highly painful 5-6
Pain starts 2 Very highly painful 7-9
Slightly painful 3 Extremely painful 10
Psychological factors for measurements
Certain working operations need overload of information, vigilance, danger or work

performance accuracy. In such conditions, there is a higher load on sensory/neuro organs of
the human body. Such situations cause higher stress on eyes, hearing system, brain activity,
etc. resulting in poor work performance, more errors, more missings, lesser endurance, etc.
These situations sometimes may lead to headache, drowsiness and even accident. These
stresses can be measured in terms of blink rate, flicker fusion, critical hearing threshold level,
speed & errors in work performance, etc.
1. Anthropometry
Anthropometry is the technology of measuring various human physical traits, such as body
dimensions of workers and their strength. Engineering Anthropometry is an effort to apply
such data to equipment and workplace design to enhance the efficiency, safety and comfort
of the operator. Anthropometric measures vary considerably due to effect of various factors
viz. gender, race, age, etc. The anticipated user population, therefore, controls the application
of anthropometric data. An anthropometric database, involving 79 body dimensions and 16
strength parameters, of agricultural workers is being prepared at the country level. It is
critical for the designer to consider the anthropometry at the time of conception of the design
rather than as a follow–up or add-on part of the design. The other application of such
database is workspace and controls layout for the machinery. Table 21.3 lists a few important
body dimensions and their usefulness. However, the database is to be given statistical
application in terms of range, mean, standard deviation, 5th and 95th percentile values.
Table 21.3. Some important anthropometric dimensions and their usefulness.
S.N. Dimension Definition Usefulness
1. Weight It is measured on a calibrated weighing scale. General body description.
2. Stature The vertical distance from standing surface to the General body description, work
top of the head. The subject stands erect and looks place designs.
straight-forward.
The vertical distance from standing surface to the

Vertical Workplace layout, design of
3. height of middle finger when arm hand and fingers
reach controls
are extended vertically.

4. Eye height inner corner of the eye. The subject stands erect Design of controls and displays
and looks straight forward.

Body linkages, work place
5. Knee height midpoint of knee cap. The subject stands erect and
design.
looks straight forward.
The distance from the wall to the tip of middle

Arm reach Design of controls and display
6. finger measured with subject shoulder against the
from wall panel, work place layout.
wall, his hand and arm extended forward.
The height, from the sitting surface, to the top of General body description,
7. Sitting height the head. The subject stands erect and looks control panel layout, work place
straight forward. layout.
The height from the sitting surface to the external Display and control panel
Sitting eye
8. canthus. The subject sits erect and looks straight design, seat design, visual field
height
forward. determination.
The height from the footrest surface of the

Knee height Work place layout, seat design,
9. musculature just above the knee. The subject sits
sitting general body description.
erect and looks straight forward.
The distance from the base of the hand to the top

Handle design, control panel
10. Hand length of the middle finger measured along the long axis of
design, hand tool design.
the hand.
The distance between the tips of right and left

Work place design, design of
11. Span middle fingers when the subject’s arms are
controls.
maximally extended laterally.
Lesson 22. Human engineering in tractor design
1. Introduction
Human factors when properly incorporated in design, allow the operator to perform task
with better efficiency, comfort and safety. Different factors which need to be considered in
tractor/farm machinery design from human factor point of view are:
1. Operator-Machine interface
2. Design of instrument panel of a tractor
3. Operator exposure to environmental factors
4. Location, arrangement and easy operation of controls
5. Operator seat
This chapter provides detailed information and principles of human factors that are essential
in the design of a tractor operator‘s workplace and are discussed below.
2. Operator- machine interface
In any activity, the tractor operator receives and processes information and then acts upon it.
There are many interfaces between the tractor operator and the tractor; they include various
actions such as:
 Riding in and out daily many times
 Maintenance such as cleaning, servicing and refuelling
 Riding on and operating the controls for performing desired tasks
Therefore, when a tractor operator operates the tractor, the sensing and decision making and
muscular powers of the operator are attached to an engineering system (tractor). The tractor
operator uses sensory system; hearing, sight, sense of smell, touch, heat/cold or feels through
nervous system to the brain. The brain feels senses and interprets the inputs from the
machine; the operator will then take action as a result of the decision and to interface the
control instruments through manipulation to achieve the desired output of the tractor as
shown in Fig. 22.1.
Fig. 22.1: Man –machine interface and decisions
For design of workplace for a tractor operator, following important factors/parameters

should be kept in view:
1. Safety, comfort and convenience of the operator.
2. Location and construction of the operator‘s work place.
3. The work place should be located on the machine so that visibility in the driving position is
good without requiring the operator to work in an awkward, tiring position.
4. The operator should be able to change his working position easily.
5. Levers, pedals and instruments should be conveniently and logically located.
6. The work place should fit both tall and short operators.
7. The work area should be free of sharp edges and obstruction such as transmission cases.
3. Design of instrument panel of tractor
Good visibility for the tractor operator is more important than abundant displayed
information about the tractor. In order to have proper visibility over the various displays, the
instrument panel of tractor should be close to the operator‘s line of vision with minimum eye
movement away from the tasks. This would require prime instrument panel that would
enhance operator‘s performance and minimize errors. The instruments and panel controls
should be logically positioned on the tractor so that all operators become familiar with the
system and be able to drive the tractor with confidence. For instrument panel design main
guidelines to be followed are:
1. The instrument panel designed should be symmetrical as far as possible.
2. A central zone of high priority instruments panel should be in 30° cone for easy eye
movements which is 380 mm wide at 700 mm from the operator‘s eye movements
which is 380 mm wide at 700 mm from the operator‘s eye.
3. Similar functions instruments or controls should be grouped on the panel.
4. The size of related group of instruments should be same.
5. The gauges should be grouped in the priority zone horizontally and according to their
functions e.g. engine gauges to the left, steering column, or tachometer or group of
indicator lights at the panel center and other functional gauges to the right side.
6. All other remaining instruments can be placed on either side of the priority group and
keep their relative position same.
7. The placement of controls on the instrument panel of tractor should also follow
standards. The priority controls should be on the right hand side and located such that
they may not interfere with the steering wheel.
8. The horn button should always be placed to the left of key ignition switch so that it
can be found out easily in an emergency by the operator.
4. Operator exposure to environmental factors
Agricultural tractors are generally used under varying agro-climatic conditions. The tractor
operators are exposed directly to thermal stresses due to excessive environmental
temperatures, humidity, wind, dust and even chemicals during spraying and dusting
operations. These environmental parameters especially temperature, humidity, air flow and
dust concentrations have considerable bearings on performance and safety of tractor
operator. Most of the parameters are interrelated and the tractor operator needs to be
provided with a comfortable environment in order to enhance his work efficiency and safety.
These parameters must be considered for design of operators enclosure of tractor to minimize
their effect and provide thermal comfort and quality air in enclosures. The comfort and
bearable zones of temperature, humidity and air ventilation rates are reported in Table 22.1.
However, the effect of ultraviolet radiations on humans is not known so far.
TABLE: 22.1. Comfort and bearable zones of different environmental parameters
Environmental Parameters
Sr. No. Environmental Zone
Temperature Humidity
Ventilation rate (m3/min)
(°C) (%)
Comfort Zone
I Lower Limit 18 30 0.37
Upper Limit 24 70 0.57
Bearable Zone
II Lower Limit -1 10 0.14
Upper Limit 38 90 1.4
i. Dust exposure: During performance of field operations with tractor a lot of dust is
generated near the tractor operator‘s breathing zone especially during land levelling, tillage,
harvesting (combining operation) and crop threshing. However, no specific information
about the dust concentration levels near operator‘s breathing area is available but, some of
the dust concentrations reported in field operations are:
1. In tillage operations peak dust concentrations of 577 mg/m3 with mean value of 144
mg/m3 have been reported
2. Permissible guideline limit for dust concentration on combines in Netherlands is 15
mg/m3.
3. In tractor‘s pressurized cab at 50 Pa fitted with air filters of fine quality, dust
concentration of 24.7 mg/m3 in operator‘s breathing zone has been found.
ii. Exposure to chemicals: Greater use of pesticides in the field crops exposes the tractor
operator to hazardous chemicals during plant protection operations. Therefore, in pesticide
application operations the tractor operator should either use personal protective equipments
or tractor cab/enclosure as a protective device.
iii. Thermal comfort: It is defined as state of mind that expresses satisfaction with the
thermal environment. Thermo-dynamic heat exchange process between tractor operator and
his environment was given by Gagge et. al(1941) as given below:
S = M – E ± R ± C – W ...
(22.1)
Where, S= amount of heat gained or lost, if body is in thermal balance, S=0
If S has positive value, it will cause the mean body temperature to rise and negative value
will cause it to fall.
M= metabolism, 70-140 watts/m2
E= Evapo-transpiration
R= Radiation
C= Convection
W= work accomplished
The above heat exchange is related with the operator‘s body surface area. The metabolic rate
for a tractor operator will be in the range of 70-140 watts/m2. Average body surface area of a
man will be 2m2 resulting in 140-348 watts. In order to maintain thermal equilibrium tractor
enclosure environment must be maintained to balance the metabolism of tractor operator.
a. Metabolic heat of operator
Amount of heat produced in the body by metabolism depending on activity being performed
by the operator is expressed by the following metabolic energy equation:
I= W+ M+ S ...
(22.2)
Where, I= energy input via nutrition
W= external work done by the operator
M= metabolic heat generated in the body of operator
S= energy stored in the body
or I-W= Constant = M+S ...(22.3)
The system is in balance if all the metabolic energy M is dissipated to environment without
change in quality S. The metabolic energy required to perform different physical activities is
given in Table 22.2
Table 22.2: Metabolic energy required to perform different physical activities
Heat produced
Activity
(Kcal/min) (KJ/min)
Basal condition 1 4.3
Light physical work <3.50 <13.0
Moderately heavy physical work 3.50-5.25 13.0-22.0
Heavy physical work >5.25 22.0
b. Heat exchange between operator body and environment
Heat from the tractor operator body is exchanged with the environment through Radiation
(R), Convection (C) and Evaporation (E) as given below:
M±R–E=±S (22.4)
Where, M= heat metabolism (according to level of physical activity)
R= radiation heat gain or loss
E= evaporation heat loss
S= amount of heat gain or loss by tissues of body (In case of thermal equilibrium S=0)
c. Heat exchange through Radiation
Radiant heat gain or loss by the tractor operator is given by
R= 5.7 (ts-tr) ... (22.5)
Where, R= radiant loss or gain, kcal/m2/hr
ts= skin temperature, °C
tr= radiant temperature of surface, °C
Heat exchange through Convection
The heat gain or loss by the operator through convection is given by
... (22.6)
Where,
C = amount of heat loss/gain in kcal/m2/hr
V = air speed, m/min
= skin temperature, °C
= air temperature, °C
d. Thermal comfort in operator enclosures
Tractor enclosure design: The tractor operator‘s enclosure must provide clean air and proper
air velocity, temperature and humidity for his thermal comfort to enhance his work efficiency
and safety. Therefore, the enclosure design must include cab pressurization, filtration, air
filtration, air movement, heating, cooling and window defrosting etc.
Comfort Equation: To predict comfortable environment in terms of combination of air

temperature, man radiant temperature, air humidity and relative velocity, Fanger (1972)
developed following comfort equation:
... (22.7)
Where,
H/ADu = internal heat production per unit body surface area (ADU= DuBois area)
A tractor operator will expend 150 kcal/h.m2
Secondary person will average 50 kcal/h.m2

Icl = thermal resistance of clothing
Heavy clothing values of 0.5, 1.0, 1.5 respectively.
ta = air temperature. °C
tmrt = mean radiant temperature,°C
On bright sunny day tmrt can be 5°C to 10°C above cab air temperature
Pa = pressure of water vapour in ambient air
V = relative air velocity, m/s. Cab air velocity should be in the range of 1 to 3 m/s
Above comfort equation developed by Fanger can be effectively used to predict the effects of
any combination of environmental factors on the comfortable environment for a clothed
tractor operator performing field operations especially during summer season.
e. Effective Temperature Scale (ET): Effective temperature is based on simple model of

human physiological response and is defined as an empirical index for human thermal
comfort. Most individual will be comfortable if ET (Effective Temperature) is between 24°C
and 27°C. The operator can make appropriate adjustments to meet his comfort by changing
following environmental factors:
1. Air speed and its direction
2. Air temperature
3. Clothing worn
5. Spatial, visual and control requirement of the operator
i. Work place layout: The layout of workplace should be compatible with not only system
performance requirement but also with the user. It should also ensure safety and comfort of
operator and controls must be within the reach to minimize errors. Proper workplace layout
requires consideration of workplace dimensions, controls and operations being controlled
with due regard to:
 The operator‘s size
 His position and the directions in which he can most easily work.
 The optimum spaces in which he can manipulate the controls
 Arrangement of controls and displays
 Visual requirement for maximum operator efficiency
 Working posture of the operator viz. Sitting, standing or squatting
 Special influence such as protective clothing.

To decide about proper workplace layout following important factors must be considered:
 Anthropometric parameters of operators
 Placement of operator on tractor for optimum work task vision or vision of displays
 Placements of controls in optimum areas for the operators.
ii. Anthropometric Data: Human being must not only fit spatially in a man task system, but
must also be able to move in the work space. With the aid of anthropometric data we can
provide an optimum work space layout, including good posture, contributing to considerable
decrease in work load and an improvement in the performance. In design of work space and
other facilities various considerations need to be taken. In particular, the type of people and
their body dimensions are given in Table 22.3. Normally, during collection of human
engineering data skip the first and last five percentile. Thus while designing a seat, it should
be designed to accommodate a reasonable range of individuals, usually from 5 th to
95th percentiles. The seat must be adjustable in a fast, easy and safe way-in horizontal and
vertical direction to realize an adoption to the measurements of various population groups.
Seat should be designed to take maximum weight expected. In order to realize a good
performance, it is necessary that the movements of the body members are in synchrony,
simple and logical motions are made, which can be performed almost automatically by the
central nervous system. Lower percentile values of seat height and seat depth should be
taken. Layout studies can be carried out to find maximum and optimum work space area.
Table 22.3: Body dimensions of tractor operators
Percentile
S. N. Dimensions
5th 50th 95th
1 Height, cm 162 173 185
2 Seating height erect, cm 84 91 97
3 Seating height normal, cm 80 87 93
4 Knee height, cm 49 54 59
5 Popliteal height, cm 39 44 49
6 Elbow rest height, cm 19 24 30
7 Thigh clearance height, cm 11 15 18
8 Buttock knee height, cm 54 59 64
9 Buttock Popliteal length, cm 44 50 55
10 Elbow to elbow breadth, cm 35 42 51
11 Seat breadth, cm 31 36 40
12 Weight, Kg 58 75 98
iii. Placement of operator for optimum vision
The seat of tractor must give the operator an optimum field of vision and be in a position on
the tractor which helps give him comfortable and safe operating conditions. Tractor operator
may require vision to front and rear, or front and sides. A wide field of vision is required for
both short and long ranges. Moreover close range vision is required during handling of
mounted implements. These visibility requirements are satisfied by upright seating posture
in order to permit easy movements of head and upper body from the front, to side, or rear as
required for gathering necessary visual information. Good visibility for the operator is more
important than excessive number of displays, especially when the machine is operating
satisfactorily. The display area has to be close to the operator‘s line of vision which requires
only minimum eye movements away from his task. Table 22.4 would be quite helpful in
designing the location of displays of tractor in relation to the operator.
Table 22.4: Optimum vision of operators
Lateral Vertical
Type of movement Direction Direction
Opt. Max. Opt. Max.
Head rotation only Left and right 0 60 Up and down 0 50
0 25
Eye rotation only -do- 15 35 -do-
30 35
0 75
Head and eye rotation -do- 15 95 -do-
30 85
iv. Control requirements of operator
A control is a device or hardware that can be considered as a link between the tractor and
operator which converts the output of operator into input and change of state of tractor.
Concept of optimum dimensions and limiting dimensions is used in placement of controls in
space and dimensions usually chosen to define boundaries of the space is estimated to cater
for 5th to 95th percentiles of operators. The optimum dimensions defines that most desirable
space or ideal area for the location of most important and frequently used controls both in
neutral position as well as in working position in any direction. The limiting dimensions
define the acceptable but not the most desirable space for location of controls as the controls
are neither too close nor too far from the operator. Generally two types of controls are used in
tractors i.e. hand controls and foot controls.
a. Hand Controls:
Variety of hand controls is commensurate with the versatility of the hands. Hand controls
can be operated either in sitting position or standing position, but seated position is preferred
to the standing position especially when the controls are used for any length of time. Use of
controls in standing position is less efficient and results in fatigue. Moreover, the accuracy of
movement will be lesser in standing position. Hand controls are precise and have high speed.
Certain hand controls can be used effectively without vision or without looking at the control
e.g. gear levers. Hand controls are much more accurate and are preferred to foot control
where, accuracy of control positioning is important and continuous or prolonged application
of moderate or large forces (89N or more) is necessary.
b. Location of Hand controls:
The comfort zones are easy to reach and the controls which do not require movement of
upper body should be located based on anthropometric dimensions of tractor operators. The
comfort angles of hands should be maintained for easy reach of controls. The forearm should
not be raised much above the horizontal to avoid fatigue. The controls must look efficient,
attractive and easy to use. When all controls in a tractor are put together, it is desirable that
these are logically arranged in orderly manner and well balanced and well placed that
enables the operator to perceive the interrelationship. Preferred hand should be used where
speed, accuracy or strength of controls movement is important. The optimum area of hand
controls for adult operators in seated position is given in Fig.22.2.
Fig. 22.2: Optimum area of hand controls for an adult operators in seated position
For proper location of hand control following points must be keep in mind.
 Normally the dimensions of control placement are with respect to seat reference point.
 The reference point should be adjustable at least 75 mm horizontally and 125 mm

vertically.
 Recommended dimensions for optimum manual control area is about 600 mm wide
and 300mm to either side of midline.
 When all controls cannot be placed with in the optimum area, locations immediately
adjacent to optimum control areas are more desirable than those farther away.
 The upper arm should make 50° angles with the upper body line and the fore arm
should be 165° to the upper arm.
 The controls must be kept approximately in a line ahead of shoulder joint so that the
elbow is not required to move sideways from the body at angle more than 20°.
 Grouping of the controls is important. Primary controls which are used continuously
for a longer period of time should be placed as near to or within the horizontal planes
0-300 mm.
 The controls such as engine and transmission (throttle, gear shift), hydraulic function
controls which require accurate manipulation should be grouped and placed on the
right hand side of operator.
 The controls which generally do not require accurate adjustment i.e. P.T.O clutch,
differential lock, parking brake can be provided towards left hand side of operator.
However, these must be visible and reached easily by the operator. Steering wheel can
be operated by left hand during use of other controls.
 A difference in shape in knobs of different controls will help avoid errors in their use
separately. Moreover clearance between the adjacent knobs should be 25-50 mm. if
these controls are used blindly their spacing should be 125-175 mm with shape coded
knobs
v. Foot Controls: Foot controls should be designed to be operated in seated position and
backrest should be provided. Most people prefer the right leg especially for critical tasks. A
maximum of 4 foot controls can be operated by an operator who does not require skill or
practice. These are best for provision of powerful or continuous force. Foot controls are to be
used in preference to hand controls where,
a) There is continuous control task and precision control positioning is not important.
b) Application of moderate to large forces (89-130N) is needed intermittently or continuously.
c) Hands are in danger of being overburdened with control tasks.
Pedals are provided in relation to floor and seat, based on anthropometric data of operators.
The pedals should be provided with non-slip surface. The force required to operate each
control is dependent on mechanical equipment and comfort of riding the tractor. The
restoring force of pedal should be large enough to support the weight of foot. The pedals are
divided into two groups:
 Group-I: When the force used by the leg is above 44-89N, e.g. brake pedals.
 Group-II: Where small force (about 44N) is largely obtained from the ankle for
continuous operation e.g. accelerator pedal.
Location of foot controls: After determination of optimum seat position on the tractor,
location of most frequently used controls in relation to seat should be provided for comfort
and safety of operator. The size, shape and location of foot controls and the space in which
the operator has to work must be decided based on anthropometric dimensions of operators
from 5th percentile to 95th percentile. Both small and large operators sit with their heels on the
same heel point. The optimum foot pedal area may be selected by locating the comforts zones
which are easy to reach. The optimum foot pedal area for location of foot controls both in
neutral position and when displaced in any direction. The angle of comfort of leg 20° either
side of centre may be taken for location of foot controls and accordingly brake pedal and
clutch pedals may be positioned.
(a) For light pedal pressures (44-89N), the foot should be applied to the pedal so that long
axis of the tibia (lower leg) is immediately over and in line with the axis of pivot of pedal.
(b) The long axis of foot and lower leg should form 90o angle, thus requiring least muscular
effort to hold the foot in position.
For location of foot controls in seated position in optimum areas, following are three main
considerations:
(i)The fore and aft location : The distance from seat reference point (S.R.P) to pedal is an
important determinant of amount of pressure exertible on the foot control, as smaller the
distance more the exertaible force.
(ii)Vertical location: Where comfort matters more than the exertible force, the foot pedals can
be placed below S.R.P. by vertical distances varying from type of task performed.
(iii) Lateral fore and aft location : As pedals are moved laterally from midline of leg, the
exertible force decreases and discomfort of operator increases. The reduction in exertible
force is related with the lateral distance and is given in Table 22.5.
TABLE 22.5: Relation between lateral distance of leg and exertible force
S.N. Lateral distance on either Reduction in exertible

Side of leg, mm force (%)
1. 75 10.0
2. 175 27.0
3. 250 37.0
Therefore, when placement of pedal at leg mid line is not possible, it should be displaced
only 75-125 mm from mid line.
6. Operator seat
Tractor seat is most closely linked with the operator‘s comfort and it must be able to provide
with comfortable and controlled seated posture to the operator. It must provide the operator
adequate vision to perform all the tasks safely and efficiently. All the hand and foot controls
should be positioned in relation to seat in such a way that these can be operated with ease
and with minimum possible efforts by the operator in seated position. Above all it should be
able to reduce/absorb the mechanical shocks and vibrations transmitted to the operator. It
should be strong, stable and reliable and extremely durable with minimum cost. Seat should
be designed to accommodate, equally well, the total population of tractor operators,
regardless of age and gender with a reasonable range of individuals, usually from 5 to 95
percentiles. The top view of tractor operator seat and the terminology related with tractor
seat is given in Figs. 22.3 and 22.4 respectively. Therefore, for ergonomic design of tractor
seat following important points must be considered:
Fig. 22.3: top view of tractor operator seat
Fig. 22.4: terminology related with tractor seat
i. Seat height range:
The seat height should accommodate 5 to 95% population. So, based on anthropometric data,
the seat height for small people with a 10 cm seat adjustable to accommodate larger people
should be selected.
1. Seat adjustments should provide at least 150mm of fore and aft movement for
accommodating larger size operators.
2. Seat adjustments should provide at least 100 mm of vertical movement to

accommodate larger size operators.
ii. Seat width: The seat width should be selected for 95% population.
iii. Seat depth: Again, it should accommodate 95% population.
iv. Seat cushion:
1. Weight of buttocks and thighs should be properly supported by a seat cushion.

Human buttocks have bony structure known as ischial tuberosities are capable of
transmitting body weight directly and uniformly from spinal column to the seat
cushion. If seat cushion is not properly designed according to physiology of buttock
region, after a prolonged time (2 to 4 hours) it may result in high degree of discomfort
or pain to the operators.
2. Most of body weight of operator should be supported by ischial tuberosities. Peak

pressure under the ischial tuberosities should be limited to 90 g/cm2 by providing flat
and firm cushion in the central region of seat.
3. The pressure in the thighs of operator should be limited to 30 g/cm2 to avoid pinching
of nerves of thighs which can be accomplished by cushion contour, cushion tilt,
cushion firmness at the front and seat height above the foot support.
4. The seat cushion should be elevated by 5 degree seat angle from horizontal from the
front side of seat.
v. Back cushion:
1. In order to minimize backache and fatigue the upper body of operator should be
properly supported by cushion known as lumbar support according to natural
geometrical shape of spinal column for the required operating posture.
2. The included angle between the thigh and spine or angle between back rest and seat
should be at least 95°.
3. Backrest must support the lumbar back properly for longer period of sitting. The
lumbar support should be adjustable to fit particular operating conditions.
4. The back cushion/support up to sacral level (75 to 150 mm above seat cushion in
compressed position) should provide firm support to the operator‘s back during
normal operation i.e. reaction forces due to foot pedal operations.
5. For free swing of shoulders and arms the back cushion width of tractor seat should be
limited to 330 mm.
6. For free swing of shoulders and arms the back cushion height of tractor seat should be
limited to 330 mm.
vi. Arm rests:
(a) Armrests should be provided for support and comfort to shoulders
(b) Armrests should be adjustable vertically for varying sizes of persons.
vii. Location of controls in relation to seat:
 All the hand and foot controls should be positioned in relation to seat in such a way
that these can be operated with ease and with minimum possible efforts by the
operator in seated position.
 Leg to thigh angle should be 110-120° for pedal operation with a minimum foot-to-leg
angle of 90°.
Fig. 22.5 Optimum design of tractor seat
Based on anthropometric data of tractor operators the optimum design of seat incorporating
all the desirable features are reported in Table 22.6 and Fig. 22.5 given below:
Table 22.6: Optimum tractor seat design dimensions, mm
Sr. No. Description Item Maximum Minimum Nominal
1 S.R.P height A - 375 400
2 Seat depth B 400 375 -
3 Distance of arm length from seat back C 150 125 -
4 Distance of S.R.P from lower end back D 200 175 -
5 Back cushion length E 150 125 -
6 Fore and aft. Adjustment F 150 100 -
7 Vertical adjustment G
8 Seat cushion width H - - 475
9 Back cushion width I 325 - -
10 Arm rest height J 250 200 -
11 Arm rest lateral spacing K - - 475
12 Seat cushion angle Ɵs 7° 5° -
13 Back cushion angle Ɵb 115° 110° -
Lesson 23. Tractor noise, vibration and other environmental factors
1. Introduction
There are different sources of pollutions, when tractor is used to perform different operations
in agriculture. Operator is the main subject to be affected by tractor noise and vibration
including other environmental factor like dust etc. Different types of pollution sources
during tractor operations are explained in the following sections
2. Noise
The noise produced by engines may cause discomfort, nervousness, tension, irritability and
fatigue. Levels from 86 to 115 dB(A) can cause specific effects to the ear such as the damage of
the corticells and can involve psychosomatic diseases. Noise also results in increase in the
pulse rate & blood pressure and irregularities in heart rhythm. Occupational Safety & Health
Administration, USA has given a standard OSHA-1910.95 for occupational noise exposure. It
mentions that the permissible daily (8-h) exposure to the operator is to be upto 90 dB (Table
23.1). The other remedial measures against noise as health hazard may be noise reduction at
source or at emission or use of personal protection such as ear plugs.
Table 23.1. Permissible daily noise exposure as per OSHA -1910.95.
Sound level,
Duration per day, hours Duration per day, hours Sound level, dB(A)
dB(A)
8 90 1.5 102
6 92 1.0 105
4 95 0.5 110
3 97 0.25 115
2 100 -- > 115
i. Operator exposure to noise
Zander (1972) stated that the application of human biological sciences to achieve the
optimum mutual adjustment of man and work, the benefits being measured in terms of
human efficiency and well being. Human factors when properly incorporated in design,
allow the operator to perform task with better efficiency, comfort and safety. In tractor
design, noise is one of the important factors which need to be considered, as the design of
tractor operator work place has direct impact on noise levels at operators‘ ear level. Noise is
unwanted sound and its effect depends on frequency, sound pressure level and duration of
exposure. Noise in tractor is generated due to rotating and reciprocating parts, vibration in
engine components, exhaust gases and flow of hydraulic fluids. It is transmitted by the
moving (rotating, reciprocating and vibrating) structural components of tractor or air borne
or combination of the two. The tractors generate sound in the range of 125-500 Hz depending
upon age and ear sensitivity. Hence, continued exposure of tractor noise to its operator will
have harmful effects on their comforts and efficiency. Noise has annoying and damaging
effect. Therefore, the design of mechanical components of tractor and its engine to limit the
sound energy levels for operator‘s comfort and efficiency is a challenge for the design
engineers.
Noise: It is defined as acoustic sound or unwanted sound and is wasted energy damaging to
human ear which is physically speaking, mechanical vibrations in gaseous, fluid or solid
medium. It is characterized by frequency, amplitude and phase. The simplest vibration is a
pure tone that consists of sinusoid with frequency
The frequency is given by
... (23.1)
Where,
T = period in seconds.
The magnitude of noise is usually expressed in terms of RMS (root mean square) value,
which is given by
... (23.2)
It is measured with the help of noise level or decibel meter has got three frequency weighing
scales A, B and C. It is expressed in terms of dB(A). The sound level meter incorporates
electrical circuits known as weighing networks. A, B, C scale operating conditions can be
selected on the sound level meter. Least sensitivity is provided in A-scale and highest in C-
scale. A-scale is used for measuring frequencies that human ear can detect.
Sound Pressure Level (SPL): It is expressed as sound level (SPL) relative to reference sound
pressure.
... (23.3)
And ... (23.4)
Where,
P = measured RMS sound pressure, N/m2
P0 = reference sound pressure, N/m2
log = logarithm to the base 10
Sources and effect of noise on tractor operator: According to Nebraska‘s Organization for
Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD). Tractor tests the tractor noise level at the
operator‘s site will be in the range of 89-98 dB (A). Almost all the models of tractors
manufactured n India also produce noise level in the range of 88-100 dB (A). Noise levels of
farm machinery ranged from 90 to 97 dB (A) for the operations normally carried out by the
operators.
Noise sources in tractor: One of the major problems associated with the tractor is the high
level of noise emission. Main sources of noise in tractors given under different categories are
as:
Tractor engine: High noise generating components in tractor engine are:
(a)Engine exhausts (b) Intake

(c) Combustion (d) Piston slap
(e) Fuel injection pump (f) Valve train
(g) Gears (h) Bearings
(i) Crank shaft
 Hydraulic system
 Differential (power transmission system)
 Brakes etc.
Out of the above noise sources in a tractor, the noises produced by combustion and piston
slap are the biggest sources of noise. It is mainly caused due to pressure pulsation and
turbulent flow created by sudden opening and closing of inlet and exhaust valves. The
tractor operators in India are exposed to noise levels above the safe permissible limit drawn
by Occupational Safety and Health Agency (OSHA), ILO and BIS in 90% of models of all
category of tractors.
Levels of noise of different sources: The generation and transmission of noise by various
sources depend on the frequency and level of noise. It has been reported that highest sound
levels on tractors were in the frequency range of 75 to 300 Hz (Weston 1963). Noise levels of
different sources are given in Table 23.2.
Reference air borne sound pressure level (SPL) = 0.00002 N/m2 = 0 dB
The noise conservation measures are mandatory at 65 dB (A) and noise controls are required
when noise levels reach 90 dB (A) for 8 hours a day.
Principal effects of noise: Communication between man and his tasks (or men) takes place
through hearing. Human ear converts the sound wave into neural signals which can be
transmitted to brain. Exposure to noise may adversely affect overall efficiency, Safety and
hearing ability of the workers. The entire spectrum of audible noise range from 20 Hz to 20
kHz and deterioration in threshold of hearing (DITH) was observed in all the audible
frequencies if close of noise is continuous for longer period of time. The noise generated is
beyond tolerable limits. OSHA in USA has set permissible noise exposure level of 90 dB (A)
to 8 hours per day. The average working hours per day of farm machinery operators vary
from 12-14 in sowing and harvesting season and 5-6 h in lean season. The exposure to noise
in sowing/ harvesting season is sufficient to cause noise induced hearing loss (NIHL).
Table 23.2: Different sources and levels of noise
Sr. No. Source Levels
1. Modern Tractor with cab 80 dB (at operator’s ear)
2 Tractors without cab 89-98 dB (at operator’s ear)
3. Threshers and Combine harvesters 90-98 dB
4 Power operated spray pumps 90-98 dB
5 Power Tiller operator zone 105-110 dB
6 Milling machine (1.2 m) 86 dB
7 Cotton ginning Machines 96 dB
8 Power lawn mover 98 dB
9 Pneumatic chipper (2m) 113 dB

The noise environment and its severity associated with the tractors may have following main
effects on the operators:
 Undesired physiological reactions as noise is annoying (objectionable to unbearable).
 Lowering of concentration, fatigue due to longer exposure and interference which

decreases the speed, quality and precision of work. Longer exposure to noise may
affect the performance in terms of rhythm disturbance and interference with worker to
worker communication in a team.
 Hearing loss due to continuous and prolonged exposure to high noise levels.
 Damage to hearing caused by noise (temporary and permanent) due to hearing thresh
hold shift. Excessive noise would cause more strain on operator and may result in
permanent hearing loss. They experience stress related disorders and suffer temporary
or permanent shifts to hearing ability. This is due to deterioration in threshold of
hearing (DITH).
 Heart rate of tractor operator increase with increased exposure of noise.
 Greater incidence of physical illness and increased strain among those exposed to high
intensity noise. Evidence of pathological effect of continuous exposure of 95 dB (A) or
more was reported by some researchers.
3. Vibration in tractor
The vibration is defined as oscillatory motion about a fixed point. It is defined usually by its
frequency, amplitude, velocity, acceleration and direction. However, the human vibrations
are measured in terms of acceleration only. Mechanical vibrations have instantaneous and
long term effects upon the human body. Kinds of effect depend upon the duration of
exposure and the frequency of vibrations. In walk behind type machine, vibrations are
transmitted to the operator through his hands. In case of a riding type, vibrations are
transmitted to the operator through seat as whole body vibration (WBV) and through his
hands as hand transmitted vibrations (HTV). Workers exposed to hand arm vibrations often
experience aches and pains in upper limbs. Daily exposure to hand arm vibrations over a
period can cause permanent physical damage known as "White Finger Syndrome‖ or
Reynaud‘s phenomenon of occupational origin. Exposure to whole body vibrations can cause
back injury. Hence measurement and evaluation of human vibrations are necessary for
assessing operator‘s comfort and to suggest remedial measures for continuous operation of
machine. The vibration studies are to be conducted as per standard guidelines. The ISO 5349-
1 & 2: 2001; ISO 2631-1: 1997; ISO 9996: 1996; ISO 5805: 1997; ISO 13090-1: 1998; ISO 10816-6;
BS 6841: 1987; IS 13548: 1992 are used in vibration studies.
I. Human exposure to vibrations: Any engineering system possessing mass and elasticity are
capable of relative motion. When this motion repeats after a given interval of time, then this
motion is known as vibration. In many cases it is undesirable and is a form of wasted energy.
This is particularly true in tractors and farm machinery as they generate noise, break down
parts and transmit unwanted forces and movements to different components. Vibrations and
noise in tractor are generated due to rotating and reciprocating parts, vibrations in engine
components, exhaust gases and flow of hydraulic fluids. These are transmitted by the moving
(rotating, reciprocating and vibrating) structural components of tractor of air borne or
combination of the two. The physical objects have their individual resonant frequencies
which are a function of their mass. Tractors with pneumatic tyres have resonant frequencies
primarily in the range of 1 to 4 Hz and for track type tractors more than 4Hz. It is important
to note that in the frequency range of 4 to 8-Hz, human tolerance to vibration is minimum.
Exposure of human body to vibrations can result in
 Biological effects
 Mechanical effects
 Psychological effects
II.Vibration: It can be defined as an oscillatory motion of mechanical system and can

generate sound in a gas, fluid, or solid medium. Vibration is characterized by frequency,
amplitude and phase. In the simplest case mechanical vibration can be derived from simple
harmonic wave form. In vibration analysis, the frequency of periodic motion is number of
cycles per unit time and it is a function of time period as given below.
Where,
T= period in time required for a periodic motion to repeat itself in seconds
The frequency of vibration can be sinusoidal, complex or random. It is important to note that
in the frequency range of 4 to 8Hz, human tolerance to vibration is a minimum.
III. Types of Vibrations
The vibration in a system can be of following two types:
Forced vibration: It is defined as the periodic motion observed, as the system is displaced
from its static equilibrium position. The forces acting are spring force, the friction force, the
weight of the vibrating mass and external forces acting on the system during its vibratory
motion. The system will tend to vibrate at its natural frequency at forced vibration. This will
follow the frequency of the excitation force. In the presence of friction, the portion of motion
not sustained by sinusoidal excitation force will gradually die out. As a result of this the
system will vibrate at the frequency of excitation force regardless of initial conditions or
natural frequency of the system. The part of sustained vibration is called as steady state
vibration or response of the system.
Free vibration: It is defined as the periodic motion observed as the system is displaced from
its static equilibrium position. The forces acting are spring force, the friction force and the
weight of the vibrating mass. This may occur when after an initial disturbance, no external
force is present i.e. F (t) =0. The vibration will diminish with time due to pressure of friction.
This is sometimes called as transient vibration. The differential equation for free vibration
would be as under:
iv. Vibration in tractor chassis: The tractor driving may have considerable ill-effects on the
health of operator. This is largely due to effect of vibrations and shock continuously acting on
human body and setting up harmful stamina and partly to the need to keep the body in
cramped condition and unhealthy posture for long period. Tractor ride vibration intensities
are normally related with the ground speed. The vibrations become intolerable as the speed
is increased. Tractors with pneumatic tyres have resonant frequencies primarily in the range
of 1 to 4 Hz and for track type tractors more than 4Hz. It is important to note that human
tolerance to vibration is minimum in the frequency range of 4 to 8 Hz, According to survey
majority of large tractor are found to be operating at less than two-third of maximum power
because of following reasons.
 Operator‘s inability or unwillingness to withstand the ride at full speed.

 Ride induced vibrations do have ill-effects on the operators.
Therefore, proper care must be taken in designing tractors particularly their seat.
 To reduce vibrations and shocks to a minimum by appropriate suspension and shock

absorption.
To arrange the tractor controls in a manner to a comfortable posture and minimum
effort.
Vibration input to tractor seat due to vertical motion of tractor body as tractor ride vibration
intensities are positively related with ground surface and ground speed during field
operations is given by following equation:
... (23.5)
Where, Zi = Vertical motion input to tractor seat, m
Zt = Vertical motion of tractor e.g., m
θ = Rotation or pitch about tractor e.g, radians
g = Longitudinal distance from tractor seat to c.g, m
4. Tractor Seat Design
From vibration point of view: Tractor seat suspension for vertical vibrations transmitted by
the tractor chassis to the seat and experienced by the tractor operator. During the process of
whole body vibration of tractor operator, the vibration transmitted to the body can be
amplified or attenuated due to body posture, type of seat and frequency of vibration. The
dynamic performance of seat suspension can be analyzed based on output vibration in
response to a given input vibration, which can be expressed as a function of
- frequency of input vibration
- seat spring rate and
- mass damping properties
From eqn. 23.6, it is clear that ω (undamped natural frequency) of the seat is a vital Parameter
for matching with vibration input from the tractor. The value of ω (undamped natural
frequency) of the seat should be less than the frequency input from the tractor chassis.
Therefore,
to avoid vibration attenuation in the seat suspension. A soft spring should be used to keep
the natural frequency value to a minimum. This will also affect ease of adjustment and
convenience of the operator.
Also ... (23.6)
Where, M = mass of tractor seat and tractor operator, kg
ωn= undamped natural frequency of tractor seat, rad/s

It has been observed that the seat suspensions used on tractors and agricultural machines
would normally require a damping rate © of about 30-50% of critical damping rate (Cc).
Damping can be controlled by appropriate seat design, spring design and cushion of seat.
Thus, the physical effects of vibration on whole body of operator are greatly influenced by
body posture, and materials provided between the body and source of vibration i.e. seat,
cushion and springs etc.
A properly designed seat can effectively reduce the vibration intensity which would
otherwise be transmitted to operator, especially in low frequency range (2 to 5 Hz) and may
have considerable ill-effects on the health of operator. The tractor seat suspensions are
comprised of cushions mounted to resilient spring/damper to reduce the level of input
tractor chassis vibrations.
5. Effect of whole body vibrations on operations
Exposure of human body to vibration can result in Biological, Mechanical, Physiological and
Psychological effects as given below:
1. There may be direct mechanical interference with the activity due to whole body
vibrations.
2. The whole body vibrations may result in increased working stress level, tension and
deformation as a source of localized pain and fatigue.
3. General discomfort and anxiety with certain subjective sensations which may be annoying
to the operators.
4. Abdominal, chest and testicular pains which may be contributing to operator‘s long term
health.
5. There may be indirect physiological induced alterations/effects on metabolism.
6. The combined mechanical, physiological and physiological responses to sinusoidal

vibrations can affect the operator‘s ability to perform control functions in different types of
tasks as under:
(i) Visual tasks: dial reading, visual scanning
(ii) Simple motor task that require precision and coordination
(iii) Psychomotor tasks including tracking tasks
7. Fatigue in the body.
6. Dust
Dust consists of tiny solid particles carried by air currents. Agricultural activities like field
preparation, harvesting and threshing produce a lot of dust. Larger particles settle down
while lighter ones remain suspended in the air.Respirable dust (size 0.1 to 5 microns)
penetrates the respiratory system and settles deep into the lungs; thus acting as serious
health hazard. Personal dust protecting masks, having plastic net, tissue paper, cloth, foam,
etc. as filtering material, gives sufficient protection against respirable dust.
Lesson 24. Safety features including ROPS in tractor
1. Introduction
Farm mechanization along with increased application of other agricultural inputs enhanced
the productivity and production in agriculture. But on the other hand, it has also increased
casualties through agricultural accidents. Loss of human life brings sorrow to the victim‘s
family and to the society; in addition to causing considerable loss to the country as a whole.
There is a wide ignorance or misconception about the meaning of accident. The definition of
accident states that a) accident is an unexpected, unplanned and unwanted event or a
sequence of events; b) occurs through a combination of causes; and c) results in physical
harm (death or injury) to an individual, damage to machine or properties, economical loss or
a near miss. Tractors are frequently involved in accidents leading to major physical injuries
and even death. The tractor and trailers related accidents can be reduced by installing safety
gadgets and by following safety guidelines during use.
2. Slow Moving Vehicle Emblems (SMVE):
It is a fluorescent orange equilateral triangle with a red reflective border. It is to be fitted on

rear side of tractor seat and on left and right rear side of trailer. The orange colour is visible in
sunlight; whereas, red border reflects light when headlight of vehicle coming from rear side
falls on it. The length of each sides of SMVE should be 44.5 cm but not less than 20.0 cm, if
need be. Due to Government regulation all of new tractors being sold in India are fitted with
SMVE (Fig. 24.1).
3. Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS):
A tractor with Roll Over Protection Structure (ROPS) provides the safety to operator (Fig.
24.1) against being crushed under the tractor in case of accidental overturning. The ROPS
have sufficient strength to bear safely the load of tractor in case of overturning. However, the
driver must wear seatbelt to get benefit of ROPS.
4. Hydraulic brakes for trailers:
The tractor brakes should be in a good condition to stop it within desired distance. If the
tractor is to be frequently operated with a loaded trailer, hydraulic brakes can be fitted on
trailer too. The hydraulic brakes of trailer are coupled with tractor near the PTO link. The
brake pedal of tractor, when pressed, activates the brakes of tractor as well as trailer (Fig.
24.2).
5. Lights:
The tractor should have all lights in full operational conditions. These lights include
headlights, tail-lights, brake lights, reversing lights and turning indicators. The trailer should
also have lights fitted on the rear side. These lights can be coupled with tractor in such a way
that control switches provided on the tractor operates the tractor as well the trailer lights.
6. Other Safety guidelines during tractor trolley use:
 Don‘t use intoxicants like liquor, opium, etc. while operating.
 Don‘t make adjustments when tractor is in operation.
 Don‘t put or take off belt while pulley is running.
 Don‘t sit or stand at unsafe places such as drawbar, mudguard, load, etc. when tractor
is moving.
 No person should mount or dismount from a tractor while it is in motion, except in an

emergency.
 Don‘t wear loose clothes, shoes, etc.
 Put the gear, PTO to neutral and lower the attached implements to ground before
leaving the stopped tractor.
 Lock the brake pedals together when traveling on public roads.
 Stop at all unguarded railway crossings and make sure that no train is coming.
 Operator should use a seat belt when operating tractor fitted with ROPS or cabin. It is
strongly recommended that no seat belt be used if ROPS or cabin is not provided.
 To avoid sideway overturning of tractor, special care should be taken during driving
at sharp slope, uneven, soft or slippery ground, alongside ditches or banks, during
turning or reversing.
 To avoid tipping backward, special care should be taken while driving heavy loads on
a slope, soft ground, ditches or uneven ground. If necessary, front of tractor should be
fitted with dead weights.
 When traveling on public roads, keep on the correct side of the road. Use light signals
with intention to turn, stop or slow down.
 While transporting farm produce, trailer should not be overfilled or over loaded.
 Use rear view mirror in properly adjusted angle.
Module 10. Tractor testing
Lesson 25. Standardization and importance of testing for tractors
1. Introduction
Agricultural machines are mostly being manufactured by the small scale manufacturer
except established manufacturers of tractors. Testing of Agricultural machinery including
tractors is the only solution to make the manufacturers clear about performance and
durability of the equipment for proper/efficient utilization along with the technical
information available to the farmers for proper selection of the required equipments.
Testing is defined as analysis of behaviour of machine when compared with standard

codes/norms under ideal and repeatable conditions. On the other hand evaluation involves
measurement of performance under actual field/working conditions. Testing deals with
measurement, variation and computation of various indices as per norms prescribed by an
authorized institution. Testing of farm machines with a standardized set out procedure has a
major role in the judicious selection. Testing provide an important means not only for
making an appraisal of an equipment but also for in-building the requisite level of quality by
exercising proper checks during production.
2. Importance of testing:
Testing of a machine means systematic determination of functional performance, structural

strength, durability, power requirements and capacity by running the test under a wide
range of conditions in the laboratory and field. Testing is useful for all the stakeholders like
manufacturers, consumers/farmers, exporters, export inspection agencies as well. How
testing is important for
Manufacturers:
- Streamlining of production processes and introduction of quality control system.
- Independent audit of quality control system by BIS
- Reaping of production economies accruing from standardization
- Better image of products in the market both internal and overseas
- Winning for wholesaler‘s retailers and stockiest consumer confidence and goodwill
- Preference for standard marked products by organized purchasers agencies of Central and
State government, local bodies, public and private sector undertaking etc. Some organized
purchases offer even higher price of standard marked good.
- Financial incentives offered by the Industrial Development Bank of India (IDBI) and
nationalized banks.
- To know where his machine stands in comparison with similar types of machines in the
market, and he can improve his product.
- It enables him to add more information to the technical literature relating to the machine.
Consumer
- Conformity with Indian standards by an independent technical national level organization.
- Helps in choosing a standard product
- Free replacement of standard marked products in case of their being found to be of

substandard quality
- Protection from exploitation and deception
- Assurance of safety against hazards to life and properly
- The knowledge of the comparative performance of similar type of machinery will help the
user to choose an appropriate machine to his requirement at the lowest cost
Organized purchasers
- Convenient basis for concluding contracts
- Elimination of the need for inspection and testing of goods purchased saving time, labour
and money
- Free replacement of products with Standard Mark found to be substandard
Exporters
- Exemption from pre-shipment inspection wherever admissible.
- Convenient basis for concluding export contracts
Export Inspection Authorities
- Elimination of the need for exhaustive inspection of consignments exported from the
country, saving expenditure time and labor.
3. Authority for testing:
Testing of tractors is being conducted since 1919, when the Nebraska Tractor Test Law took
effect in USA. The idea for official tractor testing at the University of Nebraska, Lincoln (UN-
L) was started when Polk County farmer purchased a lemon back in 1916. Tractors were
something new on the farm then, just beginning to replace real, live, oats-powered
horsepower. Farmer bought a "Ford B" tractor to replace his mule team, from the
Minneapolis, Minnesota Ford Tractor Company. New purchased tractor gave him so much
trouble that he demanded a replacement from the company, but the replacement tractor was
no better than earlier one. A representative of every model of tractor rated at 40 horsepower
or more sold in USA, must be tested at the Nebraska Tractor Test Laboratory (NTTL) on East
Campus. Today, NTTL is the only officially designated agriculture tractor testing lab in the
Western Hemisphere, elevated to worldwide status as a sanctioned testing station for the
Paris-based Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD). There are
other active testing facilities in Germany, France, Italy, Spain, Japan and China for instance,
but for U.S. farmers and tractor owners, it all comes down to the track of concrete at UN-L.
Central Farm Machinery Training and Testing Institute, Budni (MP) is responsible for testing
of the locally manufactured tractors in India.
OECD Tractor Codes allow participating countries to perform tractor tests according to
harmonized procedures, and to obtain OECD official approvals which facilitate international
trade. The codes cover the testing of:
 Tractor performance - All tested tractors must complete compulsory tests of: engine
power output and fuel consumption; drawbar power output and fuel consumption;
hydraulic power output; hydraulic lift capacity. In addition, the manufacturer can
complete optional test procedures including: braking performance, turning area and
turning circle; low temperature starting; centre of gravity location; external noise level;
axle power; engine (bench) test); waterproofing test; performance in a hot atmosphere.
 Noise levels at the operator's driving position
 Operator safety - Roll-over Protective Structures (ROPS) and Falling Object Protective
Structures (FOPS)
4. Major testing and evaluation centers in India for Agricultural Machinery
Following organizations are involved in testing of agricultural machinery. But CFMTTI,

Budni is involved in tractor testing as a main authority in India.
1. Central Farm Machinery Training and Testing Institute, Budni, Madhya Pradesh-
2. Northern Region Farm Machinery Training and Testing Institute, Hisar, Harayana
3. Southern Region Farm Machinery Training and Testing Institute, Anantpur, Andhra
Pradesh
4. Eastern Region Farm Machinery Training and Testing Institute, Biswanath Chariali,
Distt. Sonitpur (Assam),
5. BIS Testing Laboratory, Sahibabad, Uttar Pradesh
6. BIS Centers of Tractor, Power Tiller, Diesel Engine, Electric Motor, Irrigation Pumps
7. ICAR Institutes
8. Agricultural Universities
9. Central Food Technology Research Laboratory, Mysore, Karnataka
Lesson 26. Procedure of testing and standard code for testing of tractor performance
1. Introduction
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is the apex body in the area of
standardization at international level and has its membership on National Standards Bodies
of various countries. In the context of farm machinery, it has been observed that acceptance
of farm machinery by the farmers largely depends on their quality. Hence, in order to reap
the benefits of standardization including manufacture of high quality products, a need was
felt for preparation of India Standards for agricultural machinery. Organized efforts in this
direction were made by the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) in late 50‘s by way of setting up
a Technical Committee for formulation of standards for this group of industry. The
committee is generally consisted of representatives of Government department, research,
education and testing institutions and the manufacturing industries.
2. Procedure of testing
BIS. has published standards on machine/components for the machines used in the country.
Mostly testing of the particular machine is undertaken as per relevant clauses of the code. In
case, the standard has not been published for the machine, code and procedure is developed
by the testing center and same used for testing purpose. These test procedures help in
formulation of test codes by BIS. The complete testing of a machine involves:
i. Checking of specifications
ii. Development of test facilities and instrumentation
iii. Conduct actual tests
iv. Analysis of the data
v. Presentation of data and report writing
vi. Product certification marks scheme
i. Checking of specifications: Generally the test codes include few important specifications
of the machine/equipment those are mandatory to meet a specific requirement. Few
specifications have to be specified by the manufacturer and the testing center has to verify
such dimensions within the tolerance limits.
ii. Development of facilities and instrumentation: The test codes give a guide line for
development of test set up required for carrying out a specific test in the
machine/equipment/component. The testing center has to develop a setup which should
meet the requirements specified in the test procedure of the test center. As far as possible the
high quality instrumentation should be included in the test set ups.
iii. Conduct actual tests: The actual tests should be carried out on the machine as per the test
procedure specified and data recorded in the given blank tables.
iv. Analysis of data: The data obtained during testing is analyzed for presentation in the
required format. Use of computer should be encouraged.
v. Presentation of data and report writing: The report should include the sections for the
clauses those comply with the standard and those do not conform to the standards.
vi. Product Certification Marks Scheme: The Bureau operates a certification marks scheme
under the Bureau of Indian standards Act, 1986 and the Rules and regulations framed there
under. The Bureau‘s standard Mark (ISI) on an article certifies that the article complies with
the requirements specified in the relevant Indian standards and also guarantees that the
manufacturer operates a quality control system in his production which is monitored in
terms of regular inspections and checks in such a form as to give assurance that the article
will comply with the requirements of the relevant Indian standards. The Certifications Marks
schemes also provide an inbuilt mechanism for ensuring the quality of the product right from
the raw material stage to the finished product. The BIS Certification Marks Scheme is
operated on voluntary basis.
3. Tractor Tests Eligible for OECD Approval :
Compulsory Tests: Approval shall require checking as follows:
 Main power take-off and five extra points for calculating fuel consumption
characteristics
 Hydraulic power and lifting force
 Drawbar power and fuel consumption (un ballasted tractors)
Tractors without a main power take-off or with one that cannot transmit the full engine
power can be tested at the engine flywheel or by drawbar tests. The testing station in
agreement with the manufacturer shall make the choice between the two methods. Tractors
without a lifting system and/or without a hydraulic service coupling remain eligible under
the Code. However, the design of these tractors shall be specified in the test report. Optional
tests may be performed and reported in any combination provided they are requested
simultaneously with the compulsory tests
Optional Tests: Approval of any optional tests shall require checking as follows:
 Engine test
 Additional Power take-off ratio (economy)
 Reagent consumption during Power take-off and Drawbar Power testing
 Hydraulic power: optional tests
 Performance at the belt or the belt pulley shaft
 Performance in a hot atmosphere
 Low temperature starting test
 Additional drawbar tests
 Ten-hour test (ballasted tractors)
 Axle power determination
 Turning area and turning circle
 Centre of gravity
 Braking (wheeled tractors only)
 External noise level (wheeled tractors only)
 Waterproofing test
Repeats of Any of the Compulsory or Optional Tests at Different Settings: Approval shall
require checking as follows:
 Eligibility for the same category
 Compliance with test conditions under the Code
 Clear specification of differences from original tests and caveat
 Compliance with Specimen Test Report
 Results.
Other Tests: Tests performed according to other internationally recognized methods, to be

reported and clearly marked as not being subject to the OECD approval procedure. Such test
methods would have to be mentioned in the report and made available to the OECD in a
published form, in either of the official languages of the Organisation.
4. Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) for Tractors:
Tractor Test:
The brief outline of various types of tests performed by Center of Farm Machinery Testing
and Training Institute (CFMTTI), Budni (MP) are as under. Tractor test is carried out in
accordance with Indian Standard (IS):5994-1998 as amended from time to time. A tractor is
subjected to the following tests & evaluation
Laboratory Tests
 Checking of specifications
 PTO performance test
 Belt pulley test(optional)
 Drawbar performance test
 Power lift & hydraulic performance test
 Brake test
 Air cleaner oil pull over test
 Noise measurement
 Mechanical vibration measurement
 Location of centre of gravity
 Turning ability
 Visibility
Field tests: - For Initial commercial tests (ICT) for 35 h and for batch test of 35 h. (if there is
any major breakdown during the ICT) of field tests with the following implements
Plough/ Rotavator(20 hrs. for I.C.T & 20 hrs for Batch Test )
Puddling test of 10 Hrs. duration under actual field conditions followed by Water Proof Test
of 5 h for ICT and batch test if applicable.
Haulage test: This is done with 2/4 wheel trailers and the gross load recommended by the
manufacturer. Components & assembly inspection is done to assess the wear, breakdowns,
etc.
Power Tiller Test
Performance evaluation of power tiller is conducted in accordance with Indian Standard

(IS):9935-2002 as amended from time to time. A power tiller is put into the following tests
and evaluation:
Laboratory Tests
 Specification checking.
 Engine performance test.
 Rotary shaft performance test.
 Drawbar performance test.
 Parking brake test.
 Noise measurement.
 Air cleaner oil pull over test.
 Mechanical vibration measurement.
 Turning ability test.
 Chemical composition test and wear characteristics test of rotavator blades.
Field tests: For Initial commercial tests & batch test 35 h, of field tests with the following
implements
 Mould board ploughing (20 hrs. for I.C.T. only) dryland
 Dry rotavation (35 hrs. for I.C.T. & 35 hrs. for Batch tests)
 Puddling under actual field condition ( 15 h for I.C.T. & Batch test both)
Haulage test: Components and assembly inspection is done to assess the wear, breakdowns,
etc.
5. Quality system
The organizational structure, responsibilities, procedures, processes and resources used to

implement quality policy and objectives are collectively referred to as quality systems. To
cope with the growing change of competitiveness, ISO 9000 series of standards has been
formulated by ISO to provide for quality management systems. Indian has adopted ISO 9000
series of standards as IS/ISO 9000 series of standards. These standards provide not only
guidance and criteria for formal control of products and services by the company but also
give an assurance to the purchaser and the set of stated requirements
ISO 9000 series of standards are generic in nature and applicable to the wide arena of
business activity covering all the four main heads: Hardware, Software, Processed materials
and Services
ISO 9001 is applicable to those manufacturers who have design, development and
production facilities.
ISO 9002 is applicable to those manufacturers who have only production in facilities.
ISO 9003 is suitable only for trade houses.
In common usage the concept of quality is linked to excellence which is subjective in nature.
Thus the perception of quality varied from person to person, what may be of good quality to
one, may be of poor quality to the other or vice versa, depending upon the individual needs,
wants and desires. Quality should not be defined in comparative terms as poor, fair, good or
excellent. Quality is an absolute entity and viewed from the point of customers. Quality is the
goal of each and every business. So, the objective definitions of quality are:
 Fitness for use
 Fitness for purpose
 Conformance to requirements
 Conformance to specifications
 Customer satisfaction
 Product satisfaction
 Product designed and made to work properly
 Worth for money
Module 11. General revision
Lesson 27. Indian Tractor Industry
1. Introduction
Tractors came to India through imports and later on indigenously manufactured with the
help of foreign collaborations. Indian tractor industry is relatively young, as manufacturing
process of tractors started in 1961-62. But now has become the largest market worldwide.
Higher productivity and greater output are the two major contributions in farm
mechanization. Tractors form an integral part of farm mechanization and have a crucial role
to play in increasing agricultural productivity. Tractor is a highly versatile piece of
machinery having a multitude of uses mainly used in agriculture. Besides that, Tractors are
also used as a mode of transport, in electricity generation, in construction industry and for
haulage operation. It has now become an integral part of farm structure .The application of
tractor for agricultural activities which swept India during the last twenty years have erased
the problem of farmers.
Farm mechanization program in India aims to integrate the use of available human and
animal farm power with mechanical sources of power for increasing the productivity. Indian
tractor industry, have expanded at a spectacular pace during last four decades. Consequently
it now occupies a place of pride in India's automobile industry. U.S.A., U.S.S.R. and only a
few Western European countries exceed the current production of tractors in India, but in
terms of growth India's growth is unmatched even with countries of long history of tractor
manufacturing.
2. Comparison with Tractor Industry World over
The tractor industry in India has made a significant progress in terms of production and
capacity as well as indigenization of technology. It is a typical sector where both imported
technology and indigenous developed technology have developed towards meeting the
overall national requirements. The global spotlight on tractor manufacturers certainly in
terms of volume seems to be swinging away from the USA, UK and Western and Eastern
Europe towards India where growth in the number of producers and the total volume in
recent years have been impressive. In India tractor industry has played a vital role in the
development. India's gross cropped area is next only to United States of America and Russia
and long with fragmented land holdings has helped India to become the largest tractor
market in the world. But it drops to eighth position in terms of total tractor use in the country
when compared to international figures, only 3% of total tractors used all over the world . It
is to be noted that while the overall automobile industry is facing recession the tractor
industry is growing at 9-10%. About 20% of world tractor production is carried out in our
country only. The arable land in India is high as 12% of the total arable land in the world.
Tractor market in India is about Rs 60000 million. On an average around 400000 tractors are
produced and their sale is 260000.Uttar Pradesh is the largest tractor market in our country.
One out of every four tractor is being purchased in India.
3. Growth of Tractor Industry in India
The tractor penetration level in India is very low as compared to the world standards. Also
the penetration levels are also not uniform throughout the country. While the northern
region is now almost saturated in terms of new tractor sales, the southern region is still under
penetrated. The medium horse power category tractors, 31-40 HP are the most popular in the
country and fastest growing segment. There are currently 14 players in the industry
including two major international players i.e. John Deere and New Holland.
Mahindra & Mahindra is the leading player in the industry. Monsoon season is a key driver
for sales of tractors. A series of good or bad monsoon can affect the sales. In recent years the
industry has registered a good growth in sales, both domestic as well as exports. This is also
partly because of the initiative of the government to boost up agriculture and agricultural
machinery industry. The tractor industry reported a strong 28.3% growth in sales volumes
during 2009-10, there by ending the phase of cyclical correction that had pulled down tractor
sales during the preceding two years (2007-09). Significantly, the revival of 2009-10 happened
despite the drought-like conditions in many states during the kharif season dampening
sentiments.
4. Tractor demand drivers in the country
The key factor enabling the demand growth of 2009-10 was strong rural liquidity, which in
turn was sustained by several factors, including:
 Higher minimum support price (MSP) for crops
 More ability of farmers to make cash purchases (including the usage of Kisan Credit
Card which are increasingly being used to part-finance tractor purchases)
 Enhanced employment opportunities (with rural employment schemes being

implemented by the Government of India)
 An improved credit environment
 Continuance of replacement demand
Apart from these factors, non-agricultural use of tractors especially for haulage in
construction and infrastructure projects continued to increase, benefiting tractor demand.
Availability of labour for agricultural activities continued to decline, with infrastructure
projects and rural employment schemes increasing employment opportunities. Hence, even
farmers with medium-sized land holdings to either rent their land or purchase tractors. On a
regional basis, the performance of the eastern, northern and western parts of the country was
robust during 2009-10 in terms of tractor demand, while that of the southern region was
moderate. A strong growth in tractor volumes, albeit on a low base, was witnessed in the
eastern States, including Bihar, Orissa and Jharkhand, which had a good paddy crop.
Indian agriculture is characterised by low farm mechanization, fragmented land holdings,

and high dependence on monsoon rains (in the absence of adequate irrigation facilities).
Tractor penetration in India is low at around 13 tractors per 1,000 hectares as against the
global average of 19 and the US average of 29. While this does indicate the relative
backwardness of Indian agriculture, it also points to the significant scope that exists for
raising tractor penetration, which is well for tractor demand over the long term.
5. Government support for tractor industry
Although agriculture contributes just around 20% to India‘s GDP, it provides employment to
a large rural population, which is why the sector remains a strong focus area for the
Government. The tractor industry benefits significantly from the Governmental focus on
agriculture, with measures such as nil excise duty on tractors (even the excise duty on tractor
parts has been lowered from 16% to 8%) and inclusion of tractor financing under priority
sector lending (by PSBs) serving as long-term demand drivers. Financing of tractor purchase
is of great significance for the industry, it being a key demand facilitator.
6. Tractor Exports :
Indian tractor manufacturers have been increasingly targeting the international markets over
the last few years. The industry exported a total of around 37,900 tractors during 2009-10,
with the USA, Africa, South America, and some Asian countries being the top destinations.
The industry leader, Mahindra and Mahindra (M&M), has acquired Yan cheng Tractors, the
fourth largest tractor manufacturer in China (in terms of FY2008 volumes), to improve its
presence in the country. In the developed markets, Indian tractors have a relatively marginal
presence, with sales being largely restricted to the hobby farming segment. Tractor exports
from India grew at a CAGR of 36 % from 2005-06 to 2009-10. Around 60 % (in 2005-06) of
these exports were to the US mainly driven by an increase in hobby farming in the country.
Exports to other countries such as South Asian countries, Malaysia, Turkey and Africa are
estimated to have been growing fast as well. In year 2006-07, over 50 % of exports were to
non US destinations.
7. Market Share of different players
The market shares of the top four players in the Indian tractor industry did not change much
during 2009-10 in comparison with 2008-09. M&M remained the market leader with around
41.1% market share, followed by TAFE with a market share of around 22%, Escorts with
around 12.1%, and International Tractors (ITL) with around 8.9%. M&M remains particularly
strong in the southern region (50.4% market share during 2009-10). However, John Deere
was able to increase its market share in the region by around 250 bps in 2009-10, mainly at
the expense of M&M (market share down by 140 bps) and Escorts (down by 140 bps). In the
western region too, John Deere performed well in 2009-10, increasing its market share by 190
bps, even as TAFE lost market share by around 90 bps there. In the northern region, where
M&M has been traditionally weak, the company increased its market share by 140 bps during
2009-10, even as ITL and Escorts lost market shares by around 90 bps and 60 bps respectively,
there. In the eastern region, M&M was able to raise its market share by around 140 bps in
2009-10 at the expense of Escorts and TAFE.
8. Recent trend in volume and growth of tractor industry
Volume and growth of tractors in last five year plan is shown in Table 27.1. The Indian
tractor industry has experienced strong volume growth during last two years (2010-2012) on
the back of favourable cyclical and structural demand drivers. The demand-side economics
in the tractor industry continue to find favour from factors such as support from the
Government of India (GOI) towards rural development and agri-mechanisation; scarcity of
farm labour especially during the sowing season; increase in credit flow to agriculture;
increase in non-agri application of tractors as in infrastructure projects; growth in niche
power segments [<20HP (14.91 kW) and >50HP (37.28 kW)] and untapped territories; besides
healthy export sales. However, there are some concerns emerging over the earnings of
farmers from the crops; growing non-performing assets (NPAs) of tractor loans with public
sector banks; and demand fatigue after strong sales growth during the last 2.5 years. On a
regional basis, the western and southern parts of the country have performed above par
while the eastern and central parts have reported muted growth figures in the year 2012.
Further, the northern region, which is the largest tractor market of the country, grew at a
healthy pace during the period, benefiting from sustained replacement demand.
Table 27.1: Volume and growth of tractor industry in India
FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12
Volume (Domestic + Export) 346,508 345,827 441,174 545,128 605,092
Growth (%) -2% 0% 28% 24% 11%
The demand outlook from southern India continues to be robust over the medium term and
many OEMs are shifting focus from saturated markets to relatively under penetrated
geographies in southern states. In fact, roughly 50% of the incremental capacity expansion for
the industry is expected to come up in southern India. The domestic tractor industry is
currently in a capacity augmentation phase and supply-demand dynamics of the industry are
expected to change with the commissioning of large manufacturing capacity. Sharp increase
in production capacity may have a bearing on the pricing power of tractor OEMs, ultimately
putting pressure on their profitability metrices. Even during 2012, Indian tractor
manufactures witnessed margin contraction in light of continued hardening of rubber and
steel prices, notwithstanding price increases to offset hike in input cost as well as change in
emission norms (only for greater than 50 HP (37.28 kW) category).
Volume growth in the Indian tractor industry has remained good in the year 2012 but lesser
than half as for the previous two years. But in comparison, automotive industry has
experienced slackening demand on account of rising inflation, hardening interest rates and
increasing fuel prices. After a period of downturn during 2008-09, the up-cycle in the tractor
market has extended over the last three years (2010-12). Some of the cyclical factors that have
contributed to healthy demand side economics are good south-west monsoons supporting
farm output, strong rural liquidity sustained by higher minimum support price (MSP) for
crops and double digit food inflation, besides adequate credit availability driven by NBFCs
and private banks. Structural drivers like scarcity of farm labour in light of alternate
employment opportunities, steady replacement demand and growing non-agricultural use of

tractors have also supported tractor volumes. In addition, long-term drivers of the industry
such as low tractor penetration, increasing budgetary allocation towards the rural sector and
government support for farm mechanisation remain favourable.
Lesson 28. Cost estimation and selection of tractor
Machinery and equipment especially tractors are major cost items in farm businesses. Larger
machines, new technology, higher prices for parts and new machinery, and higher energy
prices have all caused machinery and power costs to rise in recent years.
1. Cost estimation
Farm machinery/Tractor costs can be divided into two categories: annual ownership costs,
which occur regardless of machine use, and operating costs, which vary directly with the
amount of machine use.
The true value of these costs is not known until the machine is sold or worn out. But the costs
can be estimated by making a few assumptions about machine life, annual use, fuel and
labor prices.
Ownership costs (also called fixed costs) includes depreciation, interest (opportunity cost),
taxes, insurance, and housing and maintenance facilities.
Operating costs (also called variable costs) include repairs and maintenance, fuel, lubrication
and operator/labor cost.
a. Fixed Costs :
Depreciation
Depreciation is a cost resulting from wear, obsolescence, and age of a machine. The degree of
mechanical wear may cause the value of a particular machine to be somewhat above or
below the average value for similar machines when it is traded or sold. The introduction of
new technology or a major design change may make an older machine suddenly obsolete,
causing a sharp decline in its remaining value. But age and accumulated hours of use are
usually the most important factors in determining the remaining value of a machine.
Before an estimate of annual depreciation is calculated, an economic life for the machine and
a salvage value at the end of the economic life need to be specified. The economic life of a
machine is the number of years for which costs are to be estimated. It is often less than the
machine‘s service life because most farmers trade a machine for a different one before it is
completely worn out. A good rule of thumb is to use an economic life of 10 to 12 years for
most farm machines and a 15-year life for tractors, unless it‘s known that machine will be
traded sooner.
Salvage value is an estimate of the sale value of the machine at the end of its economic life. It
is the amount expected to receive as a trade-in allowance, an estimate of the used market
value if expected to sell the machine outright, or zero if plan is to keep the machine until it is
worn out.
Note that for tractors, combines and forage harvesters the number of hours of annual use is
also considered when estimating the remaining value. The factors were developed from
published reports of used equipment auction values, and are estimates of the average ―as-is‖
value of a class of machines in average mechanical condition at the farm. Actual market value
will vary from these values depending on the condition of the machine, the current market
for new machines, and local preferences or dislikes for certain models. There are many four
methods for calculating the depreciation of any machinery
Straight Line Method: The annual depreciation charge is given by following relationship,
Alternative method. Depreciated value after n-years may be expressed as:
Where,
P= Purchase price, Rs
S= salvage Value, Rs
L= Economic machine life, years
This method is the simplest, as it change on easily calculated, constant amount each year.
Declining-Balance Method: An uniform rate is applied each year to the remaining value
(includes salvage value) of the machine at the beginning of the year. The depreciation
amount is different for each year of the machines life. It is given by following relationship,
D= Vn –Vn-+1
Where,
D= The amount of depreciation charged for year (n+1)
N= The number representing the age of the machine in years at the beginning of the year in
question
V= The remaining value at any time
x= The ratio of the depreciation rate used to that of the straight line methods. The value of x
may be any number between 1 and 2.
Alternate Method: Depreciated value after n-years may be expressed as
And solvage value may be expressed as
S = (1-r)L *P
Sinking Fund Method: This method is generally used by engineering economist. This
method considers the problem of the depreciation as one of establishing a fund which will
draw compound interest uniformly annual payments to this fund are such a size that by the
end of life of machine the funds their interest have accumulated to an amount which will
purchase another equivalent machine.
Sinking fund annual payment (SFP) and the value at the end of year n are,
If x= 2, the method is called a double declining balance method permitted by IRS. For used
machines the maximum rate is x= 1.5
Sum of the years-Digits Methods. It is given by following relationship,
Where, YD = The sum of years digits, (1+2+3+….+L)
N= The age of the machine is years at the beginning of the year.
An example problem will be used throughout this chapter to illustrate the calculations. The
example is a 50-PTO horsepower diesel tractor with a list price of Rs. 600000. An economic
life of 15 years and an interest rate of 8 % is assumed. The tractor is expected to be used 400
hours per year.
For the 50-hp (37.3 kW) tractor with 400 hours of annual use in the example, the salvage
value after 15 years is estimated as 23 % of the new list price:
Salvage value = current list price x remaining value factor =600000 x 23%
= 138000
Total depreciation = purchase price - salvage value =600000 – 138000
=462000
Annual Depreciation (considering 15 years life of the tractor = Rs. 30800

Interest:
If money is borrowed to buy a machine, the lender will determine the interest rate to charge.
But if you use your own capital, the rate to charge will depend on the opportunity cost for
that capital elsewhere in your farm business. If only part of the money is borrowed, an
average of the two rates should be used. For the example we will assume an average interest
rate of 8%.
Interest is calculated on the average investment of the machine taking into consideration the
value of the machine in first and last year. It is given by following relationship,
Where, i= % rate of the interest
H = working hours per year, h
Annual Interest paid = 738000/2 x 8% = Rs. 295200
Taxes, insurance, and housing (TIH):
These three costs are usually much smaller than depreciation and interest, but they need to
be considered. There is no taxes on ownership of farm machinery but recently taxes are put
on tractor. Insurance should be carried on farm machinery to allow for replacement in case of
a disaster such as a fire or accident. If insurance is not carried, the risk is assumed by the rest
of the farm business. There is a tremendous variation in housing provided for farm
machinery. Providing shelter, tools, and maintenance equipment for machinery will result in
fewer repairs in the field and less deterioration of mechanical parts and appearance from
weathering. That should produce greater reliability in the field and a higher trade-in value.
An estimated charge of 1.0 % of the purchase price is suggested for taxes, insurance and
housing costs.
Annual TIH = 0.01 x purchase price
For our tractor example, these three costs would be: TIH = 600000x 1% =6000
Total ownership cost
The estimated costs of depreciation, interest, taxes, insurance and housing are added together
to find the total ownership cost. This is almost 10 %t of the original cost of the tractor.
Total ownership cost = 30800 + 29520 + 6000
=Rs. 66320 per year
If the tractor is used 400 hours per year, the total ownership per hour is:
Ownership cost per hour = 66320 / 400 hours
= Rs. 166 per hour
b. Operating Cost
Fuel
Fuel costs can be estimated in two ways. One method is that how many drums of diesel are
consumed in a year. The total numbers of litres can be divided by 400 hours and per hour
diesel consumption of tractor can be calculated. If fuel meter is attached with the tractor fuel
line then exactly for each operation, fuel consumed per hour can be measured.
Average fuel consumption (in gallons per hour) for farm tractors on a year-round basis
without reference to any specific implement can also be estimated with these equations:
0.14 x maximum PTO horsepower for diesel engines
For our 50-horsepower diesel tractor example: Average diesel fuel consumption = 0.14 x50
horsepower = 7 litres/hour
Average fuel cost per hour = 7 l/hour x Rs. 50/litre =Rs. 350/hour
Lubrication
Surveys indicate that total lubrication costs on most farms average about 15 % of fuel costs.
Therefore, once the fuel cost per hour has been estimated, you can multiply it by 0.15 to
estimate total lubrication costs.
For our tractor example, average fuel cost was Rs. 350 per hour, so average lubrication cost
would be:
Lubrication cost = 0.15 x 350 = Rs.52.5/hour
Repairs and maintenance
Repair costs occur because of routine maintenance, wear and tear, and accidents. Repair costs
for a particular type of machine vary widely from one geographic region to another because
of soil type, rocks, terrain, climate and other conditions. Within a local area, repair costs vary
from farm to farm because of different management policies and operator skill.
The best data for estimating repair costs are records of your own past repair expenses. Good
records indicate whether a machine has had above or below average repair costs and when
major overhauls may be needed. They will also provide information about your maintenance
program and your mechanical ability. Without such data, though, repair costs must be
estimated from average experience.
Because the tractor in the example will be used about 400 hours per year, it will have
accumulated about 6,000 hours of operation by the end of its 15-year economic life. As an
estimate that after 6,000 hours of use, total accumulated repair costs will be equal to about 25
percent of its new list price. So, total accumulated repairs can be estimated to be:
Accumulated repairs = 0.25 x 600000 = Rs. 150000
The average repair cost per hour can be calculated by dividing the total accumulated repair
cost by the total accumulated hours: Repair cost/hour= 150000 / 6,000 hours = Rs. 25/hour
Labor
Because different size machines require different quantities of labor to accomplish such tasks
as planting or harvesting, it is important to consider labor costs in machinery analysis. Labor
cost is also an important consideration in comparing ownership to custom hiring.
Actual hours of labor usually exceed field machine time by 10 to 20 percent, because of travel
to and from field and the time required to lubricate and service machines. Consequently,
labor costs can be estimated by multiplying the labor wage rate times 1.1 or 1.2. Using a labor
value of Rs. 25 per hour for our tractor example:
Labor cost = 25 x 1.1= Rs.27.5/r
Different wage rates can be used for operations requiring different levels of operator skill.
Total operating cost
Repair, fuel, lubrication and labor costs are added to calculate total operating cost. For the
tractor example, total operating cost is:
Total operating cost = 350 +52.5 +25+27.5 = 455 per hour
Total cost
After all costs have been estimated, the total ownership cost per year can be added to the
operating cost per hour to calculate total cost per hour to own and operate the machine. Total
cost per hour for our example tractor was:
Total cost = 166 + 455=Rs.621 / per hour
Implement costs
Costs for implements or attachments that depend on tractor power are estimated in the same
way as the example tractor, except that there are no fuel, lubrication or labor costs involved.
Used Machinery
Costs for used machinery can be estimated by using the same procedure shown for new
machinery. However, the fixed costs will usually be lower because the original cost of the
machine will be lower. And repair costs will usually be higher because of the greater hours of
accumulated use. Therefore, the secret to successful used machinery economics is to balance
higher hourly repair costs against lower hourly fixed costs. If you misjudge the condition of
the machine such that your repair costs are higher than you anticipated, or if you pay too
high a price for the machine so that your fixed costs are not as low as you anticipated, the
total hourly costs of a used machine may be as high or higher than those of a new machine.
Total Costs per Operation
Tractor costs must be added to the implement costs to determine the combined total cost per
hour of operating the machine. Total costs in the example are:
Total cost = Rs. 621 per hour
Finally, total cost per hour can be divided by the hourly work rate in acres per hour or tons
per hour to calculate the total cost per acre or per ton.
The hourly work rate or field capacity of an implement or self-propelled machine can be
estimated from the effective width of the machine (in meter), its speed across the field (in
kms per hour), and its field efficiency. The field efficiency is a factor that adjusts for time lost
due to turning at the end of the field, overlapping, making adjustments to the machine, and
filling or emptying tanks and hoppers.
2. Tractor Selection
It is vital to select the right options and optimise the way the tractor is operated to reduce
costs. There are many choices when purchasing a tractor, especially in the area of
transmissions, tyres and ballast. In some hp sectors there is even a choice of tractor size and
weight as well. The starting point is knowing what the tractor is used for. Crucial questions
include which tasks the tractor will perform, the hours taken on each task, the speed required
and the implements to be used with it. Technology is becoming available to assist this task in
the form of telematic systems which will be able to monitor how the tractor is used including
engine load levels, hours by application, idle time and detailed fuel usage but these are not
yet widespread and the purchaser must make judgements.
a. Power:
A suggested procedure for determining the minimum horsepower needed is:
Step 1: Determine the most critical field operation requiring implements with a high draft Ex.
Mixing of rice straw in field using rotavator
Step 2: From past experiences, estimate how many days are available to complete this critical
field operation Ex. Sowing of wheat after rice harvesting in narrow window period of about
15 days. If you plan to run a double shift be realistic about maintenance of the machine and
the operator's personal time.
Step 3: Calculate the capacity needed in acres per hour in order to get the job done within the
time allotted.
Step 4: Determine the size of implement needed.
Step 5: Select a tractor of proper size to pull the implement. To do this:
1. Determine draft of implement
2. Determine drawbar horsepower needed to pull implement,
3. Determine PTO horsepower needed.
Obviously the most important decision is to determine the size of the largest tractor.
Normally the size of the largest tractor should be based on getting the critical, high-power
jobs done within a specified time period. It follows, then, that as much use as possible should
be made of the same tractor for other operations. Keeping in mind, also, that large tractors
should be matched with large, heavy duty equipment to withstand the heavy loads created
by the tillage implements. By the same, overloading a tractor can lead to serious mechanical
failure. This can lead to down time and when a tractor is down, all work associated with that
tractor stops.
Several terms are used by manufacturers to describe the capacity of their tractors. The basic
definitions are:
Brake Horsepower - - The maximum power the engine can deliver without alterations. This
power is particularly useful in sizing stationary engines.
Power-Take-Off-Horsepower (PTO) - - The power as determined at the power-take-off shaft

of the tractor.
Draft (Drawbar) Horsepower - - The power transmitted by the tractor to the implement. The
Nebraska Tractor Tests indicate that maximum drawbar horsepower will average
approximately 85 percent of the maximum PTO horsepower for most of the tractors.
b. Two wheel drive, Front wheel assisted or Four wheel drive tractors
Tractors can be divided into 3 categories:
(i) Two-wheel drive (2-WD)
(ii) Front-wheel assisted (FWA) or unequal 4-wheel drive
(iii) Equal 4-wheel drive tractors (4-WD).
Each one of these tractors has different tire configurations and different ballast requirements.
Two-Wheel Drive Tractors (2WD) are most commonly used in dry or upland farming
situations and for transportation. They need 80% of the weight distributed over the rear axle
to maximize traction. The biggest advantages of this type of tractor over other 4-wheel
tractors are smaller turning circle, simplicity of design, fewer mechanical parts and lower
purchase price. However, a 2WD tractor does not work at all well in wet, hilly and muddy
conditions.
Front Wheel Assist (FWA) is commonly known as 4-WD or unequal 4-wheel drive. It is the
most popular 4-wheel tractor in many parts of the countries worldwide. These tractors range
in size from 5 HP - 240 HP (3.73- 178.96 kW) and are capable of delivering between 50-55% of
the rated power at the drawbar. Typically, between 75 and 85% of the rated engine HP is
delivered to a rear PTO (Power Take-Off) on any diesel tractor.
On a FWA tractor the front drive tires are smaller than the rear tires. These tractors require
40% of the weight distributed over the front axle and 60% over the rear axle. The major
advantage in using this type of tractor is that it can deliver 10% more power to the ground at
all 4 tires for the same fuel consumption, and thus has much better traction and flotation
capabilities than 2-wheel tractors of the same size. FWA tractors normally cost about 15-35%
more than the same horsepower two wheel drive tractor.
Equal Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) tractors have all four tires of equal size and range in size
from 35 HP - 600 HP (26.1 -447.42 kW). This tractor type has the greatest power to weight
ratio and can deliver between 55-60% of power at the drawbar. It is challenging to maneuver
and often the size and expense makes these tractors impractical.
c. Fuel consumption
This parameter plays very important role in selection of a tractor. Specific fuel consumption
g/kWh. is the measure of the number of grams of fuel used to produce 1 kW for 1 hour and
appears in official tests as it allows you to compare tractors of different horsepower. This is
measured at the engine flywheel, the PTO or at the drawbar depending on the type of test.
The main tests are according to OECD standards and notably carried out by Nebraska Test
Laboratory and CFMTTI, Budni.
Fuel Efficiency litres/unit of production. This measurement tells you how much work you
achieve from a litre of fuel. It could be litres/hectare or litres/tonne and is by far the most
meaningful figure to use as it takes into account the work done for an amount of fuel. The
detail regarding saving of fuel by optimising tractor field efficiency is discussed in next
chapter.
d. Hydraulic System
There are two different hydraulic systems available today – open and closed systems,
however hybrid systems between the systems are also available.
Open Centre: Oil flows continuously round the tractor through all the valves. So oil is
pumped all day whether you are using hydraulic functions or not. As a result there is a fuel
cost in pumping all this oil.
Closed Centre - Pressure compensated: This system is a hybrid. Although oil is pumped all
the time, it does not have to travel round the whole hydraulic system. When no oil is
required, this system goes into a short circuit saving energy. Oil only flows to the valves that
operate functions when required.
Closed Centre - Pressure and flow compensated: These are the most efficient of the systems.
When there is no requirement for oil, the pump shuts down and produces no flow. This saves
energy and so saves fuel. Oil is only pumped when required at the flow rate and pressure
demanded by the service that is in operation becoming widespread.
e. Transmissions
For many power ranges there may be a choice of transmissions and there is a need to
evaluate the type and duration of tasks as well as the speed of operation. Generally the cost
increases with the degree of sophistication but so does the task and fuel efficiency, and
certainly the comfort, if correctly matched. Synchronised transmission is often fitted to
smaller lower specification tractors and is ideal for loader work especially if fitted with a
power reverser allowing clutch-less direction changes. It is good for applications at fixed
speeds e.g. fertiliser spreading and spraying will carry out tillage work but work rate will be
lower compared to tractors that can shift on the move. Partial and full Power shift
transmissions are good for field work as the transmission can perform multiple shifts under
load and can better optimise work rate. Eco Shift transmissions are available to allow the
tractor to run at maximum speed on the road at reduced rpm with fuel savings. Infinitely
Variable Transmissions are the most versatile of all the transmissions with the ability to
continuously vary the ratio to the engine power available and as a result deliver the highest
work rate. These transmissions have the ability to reduce engine rpm, so saving fuel if the
load reduces and operations where full power is not required will automatically be carried
out at reduced rpm.
f. Power Take Off (PTO)
PTOs are available on a number of speeds and shaft configurations. These are:
• 6 spline shaft, 34.9 mm (1 3/8 in) nominal speed 540 rpm
• 21 spline shaft, 34.9 mm (1 3/8 in) nominal speed 1000 rpm
• 20 spline shaft, 44.5 mm (1 ¾ in) nominal speed 1000 rpm
Typical speeds are 540, 540E, 1000 and 1000E. The economy speeds are provided for lighter
applications that allow nominal pto speed to be reached at reduced engine rpm, saving fuel.
The use of an economy pto vs full speed pto typically will result in an 18% fuel saving. So if
you have pto applications for significant hours, economy speed pto‘s should be specified and
used if possible.
g. For custom hiring or self
Tractor is purchased for operation on custom hiring operation or purchased by the

cooperative societies of the village, then tractor fitted with telemetry and GPRS will be more
suitable. Signal of its operation and some engine parameters will be sent through SMS during
the operation of tractor in remote areas. This data may be useful for better management of
tractor fleet.
h. Clutch type
There are two types of clutch available – dry and oil cooled. Dry clutches suffer some wear
every time they are disengaged and engaged. This means that a dry clutch will wear out
eventually and require replacement but may be more economical for low hour usage. An oil
cooled clutch virtually eliminates this wear so is better suited to applications that have
frequent clutch use e.g. loader work.
i. Suspension and comfort options
As well as improving comfort and allowing greater productivity front axle suspensions can
improve traction in the field effectively increasing usable power.
j. Selection of Tyres
The selection of tyres is one of the most important considerations. Even if you optimise the
specification of your chosen tractor in all areas but get tyre selection wrong, you will not be
able to apply power to the ground effectively. When selecting tyres, you must ensure they
have adequate carrying capacity for the applications you carry out and the implements used.
The only real way to determine this is to weigh the tractor with the implement and from that,
you can determine the additional weight the implement adds to the tractor axles. The
markings of load index and speed symbol are also shown on the side wall of the tyre and tell
you how much weight the tyre will carry at what speed. The figures must be looked up in a
tyre book.
Tyre choice should be made in the following order:-
1. Choose the tallest tyres that will fit the tractor. Taller tyres give a longer footprint and
reduce rolling resistance in the field. The wall of soil that the tyre has to climb up stays the
same width but the larger footprint reduces sinkage, so reduces rolling resistance. This
improves efficiency.
2. Choose the widest tyres that are compatible with your applications. A wider tyre will have
a larger footprint and reduce ground pressure. It does not necessarily reduce rolling
resistance as taller tyres do. Although the height of the soil wall is reduced, it is also wider.
3. Choose tyres of adequate carrying capacity for your most demanding application. If
cropping dictates you have to use a small narrow tyre, be aware that the tyre may not be
capable of transmitting the full power available or carrying the full weight of the tractor plus
any imposed load. So if you have a tyre that say fits your potato operation, it may not be
adequate for general cultivation work, transport with heavy trailers and large mounted
implements.
4. Choose a tyre that is adequate for the tractor hp and operate at proper pneumatic pressure
according to the operation.
Lesson 29. Optimization of Tractor Field Efficiency to Save Energy/Fuel
Tractors and related field equipment can use a lot of energy in the form of fuel on the farm,
so it makes sense to take practical steps to optimize their efficiency. Field efficiency means
completing a particular field operation while wasting the least amount of time, fuel, and farm
resources. The term refers to the time the operation should take vs. turning and other non-
productive time. For example, spending an amount of time turning around at the ends of
short, wide fields or overlapping tillage operations within a field can result in higher fuel
consumption per acre. Machine maintenance and repair also affect field efficiency –
equipment that is well-maintained and in good condition operates most efficiently. Timely
replacement of air and fuel filters and lubricants can reduce fuel use while increasing
horsepower. Repair of leaking valves and piston rings will improve engine performance and
therefore, energy efficiency. Some practical steps to optimize the tractor field efficiency are
suggested here
1. Turning time
To reduce turning time, farmers should make fields large, long, and narrow by eliminating
fence rows, ditches, or other barriers. Larger implements, if matched to tractor size, can be
more field efficient because bigger implements cover larger areas and require a smaller
number of turns. Long narrow fields can enhance the efficiency of field operations. The
concept of ―tilling off the corners‖ of the field when tilling diagonally can also save fuel by
having the turning result in a tillage operation.
2. Wheel traffic pattern
Controlled wheel traffic patterns can save fuel and reduce total soil compaction in a field. The
tractor and other machinery operate in the same tracks for all operations, improving tractive
efficiency with compaction occurring only in a narrow area. Crop growth in the
uncompacted areas of the field is considerably better than if some compaction occurred all
over; however, poor drainage or other problems may occur near the compacted zone.
3. Conservation Tillage
Conservation tillage generally uses lesser fuel than full tillage systems because the soil is
tilled less intensely and less often. These tillage practices may also allow seedbed
preparation, fertilizer application and seeding in fewer passes. Such practices are also eligible
for carbon credits.
Deeper tillage results in greater fuel use. With every inch of increase in mould board plowing
depth, approximately 0.57 more liters of diesel fuel per acre is used. There is a proportionate
increase for other tillage operations at increased depths. Secondary tillage should not be
deeper than one-half the depth of primary tillage.
For example, if a field is plowed 8 inches deep, disking should be no deeper than 4 inches.
Shallower secondary tillage has the added benefits of not only saving fuel, but reducing
compaction and lessening the amount of wet soil and weed seeds brought to the soil surface.
Water loss is also often reduced with shallower tillage, resulting in a longer period before
first irrigation is necessary and/or better overall early plant growth.
4. Matching Implement Size to the Tractor.
Using a large tractor for light loads is inefficient because extra horsepower is used to move
the larger tractor. Producers should consider using a smaller tractor if possible. On the other
hand, using a smaller tractor to perform operations that require more horsepower can
overload a smaller tractor, reducing its overall efficiency.
5. Selecting the Optimal Engine and Travel Speeds.
Most tractor engines have the highest fuel efficiency when operated at or near rated speed
and load, or maximum power. For primary tillage implements properly matched to the
tractor, the best fuel efficiency in the field is achieved by pulling loads at the fastest speed
possible within the acceptable speed range for the implement. Increasing the gear and
lowering the throttle speed can lead to fuel savings. Make sure to not overload the engine;
excessive black smoke indicates overloading.
6. Optimizing Wheel Slippage
Some wheel slippage is needed to reduce excess wear on the tires. The optimal level is
generally 10 percent, but the actual level depends on the type of tractor, the speed and the
implement being used. Properly ballasted tractors with recommended tire inflation rates can
improve fuel consumption and increase tractor efficiency by creating the required amount of
tire slippage for the specific tractor, implement and field conditions.
7. Fuel Storage and Alternative Fuels
Proper storage can save fuel before it goes into the tractor. Keep above-ground fuel storage
tanks shaded and paint them a light color to reduce the loss of fuel by evaporation. Use of
biodiesel or other bio fuels will reduce reliance on petroleum products.
Lesson 30. Alternative Fuels for IC Engines
1. Biomass based alternate fuels for IC engines:
Considerable research has been conducted and is still being carried in different disciplines of
science and engineering to find alternate renewable fuels for Internal Combustion (IC)
engines. However, agricultural scientists are more concerned about the biomass-based fuels,
as the use of biomass appears to be a viable alternative, especially for the on-farm use of fuels
in tractors, combines, and stationary diesel engines. Many biomass-based fuels have been
tried in the IC engines, either as a partial or complete substitute to the gasoline/diesel fuel.
These include alcohols derived from grains and starchy/sugar crops/plants/trees, biogas
produced by the anaerobic fermentation of biomass (dung, refuge etc.), producer gas
prepared by the partial burning (i.e. with less quantity of oxygen) of carbon rich biomass in a
gasifier, and straight or modified plant oils derived from oil-rich seeds/nuts of farm
crops/trees.
Engines or fuel modifications are required to exploit alcohol fuels in compression Ignition
(CI) because of poor self-ignition characteristics of these fuels,. The extent and magnitude of
modifications was dependent upon the proportion of diesel fuel substitution by alcohol.
Thus, it has been found to be an expensive option. Biogas has been used satisfactorily in CI
engines. However, in case of CI engines, it cannot replace the diesel completely. Because of
its poor self-ignition characteristics, some minimum amount of diesel is required to start the
ignition. Its use in IC engines for mobile operations could not be practically exploited due to
very high liquefaction pressure of methane, the main combustible constituent of biogas. Like
biogas, producer gas has also been used satisfactorily in CI engines. This gaseous fuel too has
poor self-ignition characteristics and as such is not regarded as a complete substitute of diesel
fuel in CI engines. It also has very high liquefaction pressure.
2. Plant oils as CI engine fuels:
Plant oils, straight or modified, are known to offer several advantages as engine fuel. These
include better self-ignition characteristics, compatibility with fuel injection system of the CI
engine, high-energy content, safe processing and handling. Above all, production of most
plant oils can be realized within a short period after the need is felt. For most of the
cultivated oilseed crops, the lead period is only few months. Due to relatively simple and
low-cost technology for expelling and filtering, the plant oil can be processed on the farm
itself, thus saving the transport cost, time, and energy. Based on simple calculations,
researchers have indicated that one hectare of an oil-seed crop can fetch adequate oil to meet
the energy needs of an 8 to 10 hectare farm (Bruwer et al., 1980).
In countries with shortage of edible oil, only non-edible oil need to be considered as an
alternative fuel. However, during period of petroleum shortage, it might be unavoidable to
perform certain urgent farm operations such as irrigation, plant protection, harvesting etc.
Under such circumstances, a farmer might be compelled to use even edible oil as an engine
fuel to prevent the loss/damage to the crop. As a strategy, the farmers should be encouraged
to attain self-sufficiency in their fuel needs by exploiting all alternative energy sources. They
must be encouraged to grow the most promising oil seed crops. Even if there is no short fall
in the fuel supply from conventional sources, the additional production of oil can be utilized
to meet the needs of edible oil in an area.
It has been reported that in diesel engines, crude plant oils can be used as fuel, straight as
well as in blend with the diesel (Shyam, 1984). However, during extended operation of the
engine, problems of injector coking, dilution of engine oil, deposits in various parts of engine,
etc. have been reported. These problems are found to be rather serious in the direct injection
CI engines. High viscosity of the plant oils was the major constraint although high acid value
and presence of gums/wax etc. also adversely affected the engine performance. Different
methods have been tried by different researchers to modify the plant oils. These include
cracking of the plant oils, blending of the plant oils with appropriate additives like alcohol,
heating of the plant oils before injecting into the combustion chamber, and chemically
transforming the plant oils to convert into the esters (i.e. bio-diesels) by alcoholysis.
3. Bio-Diesel as CI engine fuel:
Based on the economic and other considerations, trans-esterification of plant oils by

alcoholysis seems to be an effective way to reduce their viscosity. It converts them into
methyl esters (known as bio-diesels) thereby making them more appropriate for use in the CI
engines. This process also enhances the volatility of the fuel, which aids in better atomization
of the fuel. Various problems faced, while using the plant oils straight as fuel, like injector
coking, unusual carbon deposition on piston, cylinder head, exhaust manifold, etc. are thus
eliminated to large extent by the use of bio-diesels. The glycerol, which is a by-product of this
reaction, may be traded in the market.
There are also many environmental benefits of bio-diesel. There is a clear contribution to the
reduction of greenhouse gases at least 3.3 kg CO2-equivalent per kilogram of bio-diesel
(Korbitz, 1998); those results have been improved since then by lower inputs in raw material
production and by more efficient process technology. It is well established, that there are
significant locally impacting emissions e.g. 99% reduction of SOx-emissions, and reductions
of 20% for CO, 32% for HC, 50% for soot and 39% for particulate matter. But there is a slight
increase of NOx-emission. However, with delayed injection timing a decrease of 23% can be
obtained (Korbitz, 1998). Bio-diesel also appears to be an ideal synergistic partner for the
oxidation catalytic converter (oxicat). Not surprisingly, as a plant derivative bio-diesel has a
very low toxicity as a compound. This is also the reason for its high biodegradability (more
than 90% within 3 weeks) and a substantial reduction of toxicity risks to fresh water
organisms such as trout, daphnia, watercress and algae, which is of advantage in case of
accidental spillage.
4. Preparation of Bio-Diesels:
There are four distinct stages in the preparation of plant oil bio-diesels. These are (a) heating
of oil, (b) adding alkaline alcohol to oil, stirring and heating the mixture, (c) settling and
separation of glycerol, and (d) washing of bio-diesel with water and removal of water. For
preparing bio-diesel at farm scale, any procedure involving long time duration or requiring
controlled temperature conditions might be unacceptable to the farmer.
Excessive reduction in the time required for bio-diesel preparation may result in decreased
purity of bio-diesel i.e. lesser oil to bio-diesel conversion. It has been suggested that
esterification yields be at least 90% if the esters were to be used in CI engines (Hawkins et al.,
1982). It was, therefore, clear that for practical purposes, a small variation in oil to bio-diesel
conversion would not matter much as long as this conversion is >90%. As such, it would be
beneficial to save time and labour through a simplified process at the cost of small reduction
in oil to bio-diesel conversion.
Most of the studies relating to plant oil bio-diesels have been confined to preparation of
methyl esters either at laboratory scale or at commercial/large scale under controlled
conditions. This requires complicated procedure as well as equipment. Considering the
limitations and capabilities of a common Indian farmer and the requirements of a well
prepared bio-diesel, a simple, inexpensive and less time consuming system has been
developed at PAU for farm level bulk production of bio-diesels (Gupta, 1994). It requires not
only less time but also less heating and the whole process is completed in about five hours.
In this method, oil is heated to a little below 60°C. On the other hand, alkaline methanol is
prepared by dissolving 10 gms of sodium hydroxide pellets in 200 ml of methanol (for every
one kg of oil). This alkaline methanol is added to the heated oil and the mixture is stirred
manually for 5 minutes. The mixture is then kept for glycerol settlement. After four hours of
settlement, glycerol is left at the bottom and bio-diesel is decanted from the top. Then the bio-
diesel is washed two or three times with water to remove impurities like sodium etc. It also
removes excess methanol. Use of warm water for washing gives better results and reduces
the number of washings required. After each washing, water is allowed to settle for about 5
minutes and then it is removed from the bottom. At the end of last washing, water is allowed
to settle for 15 minutes and is then removed leaving behind the bio-diesel. The washed bio-
diesel is heated so that it becomes almost completely free of moisture.
The whole process for single batch production takes about five hours. If more number of
containers are available (for heating oil and mixing it with alkaline methanol) different stages
can be carried out simultaneously. Then the average time per batch will be quite less.
However, the quantity of bio-diesel prepared in a batch will depend upon the size of the
reaction vessel used. The process does not require any specialized equipment. Heating of oil
could be done in any metallic container available with the farmer. Dissolving of sodium
hydroxide in methanol can be done in a glass or a stainless steel container. The mixture can
be stirred with the help of a wooden stick or plastic/stainless steel/glass rod. Glycerol
settlement should be carried in an open stainless steel container, particularly at low ambient
temperature (below 15 °C), because the glycerol solidifies and does not flow at low
temperatures. At higher temperatures, final traces of bio-diesel in the glycerol can be
separated using a separating funnel.
In case of farm level bio-diesel production, the mixing and settlement can be carried in one
and the same container. But for commercial scale production, separate mixing will require
mechanical stirrers and, therefore, separate container would be required for settlement to
take care of the problems arising out of solidification of glycerol at low temperatures.
Washing of bio-diesels with water and subsequent removal of this water can be carried in
plastic bucket, again easily available with every farmer. For removing leftover traces of water
in the washed bio-diesel, the separating flask, mentioned above, can be used.
As the esterification process developed at PAU is quite simple, less time consuming and
inexpensive, it can be easily used by the farmer for preparing bio-diesels in bulk at a very
short notice and without needing much additional equipment. Some precautions are,
however, necessary to avoid any problems in bio-diesel preparation. Firstly, the oil should
not be heated beyond 60°C otherwise there would be a chance of vaporization of methanol
that has low boiling point (about 65° C). Secondly, sodium hydroxide pellets should be kept
in airtight bottles. These should be properly mixed preferably in glass containers in the whole
quantity of methanol to be used i.e. it should form almost homogeneous mixture, otherwise
saponification may take place. Thirdly, the oil should have low acid value (<1.0) otherwise
saponification may occur.
5. Characteristics of plant oils and Bio-Diesels:
Bio-diesels of several plant oils have been prepared, characterized, and used in diesel engines
and tractors at PAU, Ludhiana. Some of the characterization results are given in appendix A2
and A3.
Kinematic viscosity of bio-diesels was reduced to about one sixth of that of the parent oil. The
viscosity of the studied bio-diesels was about 1.28-2.16 times that of diesel. All the bio-diesels
had quite high flash point compared to that of diesel, which is a beneficial safety feature. All
the bio-diesels had a little lower gross heating value compared that of diesel. Esterification of
linseed oil increased the heating value. Density was a little higher in case of bio-diesels than
for diesel. Bio-diesels, in general, had lower pour point than of diesel. Distillation
temperatures were higher for bio-diesels compared to diesel.
The sulphur-free plant oil is the reason for the very low SOx-emissions of bio-diesel.
Generally the cetane number is higher for bio-diesel, resulting in a smoother running of the
engine with less noise. Bio-diesel of rapeseed oil is by nature an oxygenated fuel with an
oxygen content of about 10%. Oxygen is responsible for bio-diesel‘s favorable emission
results, but it is also the reason for calorific value a little lower than conventional diesel
(Korbitz, 1998).
6. Performance of CI engine fuelled with Bio-Diesels:
Soni and Verma (1993) used blends containing 10-25% HSD in rapeseed oil methyl ester as
alternate fuel in 3.67 kW direct injection CI engine and compared their performance with that
of HSD. Tests were conducted at fuel injection pressure of 210 Kg/cm 2 and 240 Kg/cm2. All
the fuel performed better at fuel injection pressure of 210 Kg/cm2. At this pressure, the
highest brake thermal efficiency values were recorded for blends containing 10% HSD in
RME, 25% HSD in RME, unblended RME and HSD in that order. There was no significant
difference in the exhaust gas temperature recorded for various fuels.
Gupta (1994) reported comparable performance of an unmodified, direct injection 3.67 kW

diesel engine on bio-diesels of rice bran oil, cotton seed oil, linseed oil and raya oil. The effect
of different injection timings and injection pressures on brake thermal efficiency was also
studied. It was reported that the fuel injection timings had more pronounced effect on the
brake thermal efficiency as compared to fuel injection pressure. Optimum values of fuel
injection timing and pressure were found to be 25° BTDC and 25 Mpa respectively for all bio-
diesels studied except rice-bran oil bio-diesel and unwashed linseed oil bio-diesel for which
the optimum values of fuel injection timings were below the range studied. Higher
compression ratio resulted in increased optimum value of fuel injection. Pandey (1996)
reported that sunflower bio-diesel gave brake thermal efficiency comparable to diesel.
Gupta (1994) and Pandey (1996) reported that by using bio-diesel as fuel in 5 hp (3.72 kW)
direct injection engine, the smoke number increased with load with higher rate of increase at
higher loads. However, carbon monoxide (CO) concentration in exhaust gases increased
abruptly with increase in load above 50 per cent of rated torque and hydrocarbon (HC)
emission increased abruptly with increase in load beyond 75 percent of rated torque.
7. Related research at PAU, Ludhiana:
In an adhoc ICAR project (Verma et al., 1999), investigations on methyl bio-diesels of four
plant oils, namely linseed oil, sunflower oil, rice-bran oil and Jatropha curcas oil were carried
out. In addition to characterisation studies reported above, studies were also conducted on
the following aspects:
Method for Estimation of Oil to Bio-diesel Conversion:
A spectrometric method was developed and standardized for estimating quantitatively the
oil to bio-diesel conversion during the trans-esterification process used for preparing the bio-
diesels. Oil bio-diesel conversion as well as recovery of bio-diesel was observed to be the
highest in case of linseed oil (94% and 91% respectively) while the lowest values were
obtained for rice-bran oil.
Bio-diesels could not be prepared from raw rice bran oil with very high FFA content. The oil
tried had FFA > 25%. From parboiled rice-bran oil (FFA 3%), bio-diesels could be prepared
but the percent oil to bio-diesel conversion and bio-diesel recovery were quite low (75% and
50% respectively). But for physically refined rice-bran oil, the values were 85% and 70%
respectively. Presence of wax in rice-bran oil as well as its bio-diesels created problems in
extreme winter during washing of bio-diesel. Use of warm water helped in effective washing.
Oil yield from Jatropha curcas seeds purchased from Rajasthan was quite low, possibly due
to inferior quality of seeds and non-availability of proper extraction facilities for Jatropha
curcas seeds in Punjab. However, the bio-diesel quality was quite good. Oil to bio-diesel
conversion was 91% and recovery was 78%. The quality of Jatropha curcas oil purchased
from Udaipur (Rajasthan) was not up to the mark resulting in only 85% oil to bio-diesel
conversion and 70% bio-diesel recovery.
Storage Studies:
The FFA contents of the bio-diesels after a period of 1 to 1.5 years storage increased
marginally. However, the oils had higher increase in FFA content as compared to their
respective bio-diesels. During storage, the viscosity of the bio-diesels increased by 30-60%
over a period of seven months. The highest increase was observed in case of linseed and
sunflower oil bio-diesels. The effect of storage time on weight gain of oils and their bio-
diesels was also studied. Samples were kept in half and fully filled containers. In case of
linseed oil, sunflower oil and sunflower oil bio-diesel, the weight gain was more in half-filled
containers. But in linseed oil bio-diesel, weight gain was similar in both types of containers.
There was no weight increase in case of Jatropha curcas oil and its bio-diesel. However, in
case of rice-bran oil and its bio-diesel, the weight gain was more in case of fully filled
container. Except linseed oil bio-diesel, the weight gain was partly due to absorption of
moisture and partly due to reaction with air. But in case of linseed oil, it was mainly due to
reaction with air. In case of linseed oil, linoxygen deposited on the rim of half filled container
even after 15 days of storage.
Effect of bio-diesels on Engine Components
During the studies on the effect of plant oil bio-diesels on engine components, it was found
that no significant change was observed in the dimensions of metallic components, namely
copper washer, aluminium washer and piston rings. However, the colour of copper washer
dipped in linseed oil bio-diesel and sunflower oil bio-diesel changed. The peach colour of
precipitate layer was found deposited on copper washer in case of sunflower oil bio-diesel.
Among non-metallic engine components, the maximum changes were observed in case of
rubber washer followed by insignificant changes in case of plastic pipe. However, no change
was observed in case of gaskets.
Use of Plant Oil Bio-diesels in Stationary as well as Tractor Engines
Fuel consumption tests were carried out in accordance with modified BIS engine Test Codes.
The tests included the fuel consumption test, performance test and endurance test at the
prescribed loads. The tests indicated that among the four bio-diesels, the specific fuel
consumption was the lowest in case of linseed oil bio-diesel followed by sunflower oil bio-
diesel. Specific fuel consumption was comparatively higher in case of rice-bran oil bio-diesel
and Jatropha curcas oil bio-diesel. That is why brake thermal efficiency was the highest in
case of linseed Oil bio-diesel followed by sunflower oil bio-diesel.
Long duration .testing of diesel engines using the methyl bio-diesels was also performed.
Engines were run for endurance tests on bio-diesels of linseed oil, rice-bran oil and sunflower
oil for 282, 243 and 272 hours respectively. Due to late availability of Jatropha curcas oil,
endurance tests on its bio-diesel could not be taken-up. Standard measurements of engine
components before and after the endurance tests with each bio-diesel indicated that there
was no significant wear in various components.
Exhaust emissions namely CO, NOx and total combustibles were also monitored. NOx
emissions were a little higher in case of bio-diesels compared to diesel particularly in
sunflower oil bio-diesel. On the other hand, CO emissions were significantly lower in case of
all the four bio-diesels compared to diesel. Combustible emissions were also lower in case of
the bio-diesels as compared to diesel.
An Eicher tractor of 35 hp (26.1 kW) was run on rice-bran oil bio-diesel for seedbed
preparation with a field cultivator and disc harrow. No visual smoke in the exhaust was
observed with the use of the bio-diesels. NOx emissions were marginally lower with the bio-
diesel than diesel.
On the whole, it was observed that the performance of the existing unmodified diesel engine
run on all the four plant oil bio-diesels was quite promising. In fact better thermal efficiency
was achieved and the bio-diesels were more environment-friendly as compared to diesel in
terms of exhaust emissions.
****** ☺******
This Book Download From e-course of ICAR
Visit for Other Agriculture books, News,
Recruitment, Information, and Events at
www.agrimoon.com
Give FeedBack & Suggestion at [email protected]
Send a Massage for daily Update of Agriculture on WhatsApp

+91-7900 900 676
Disclaimer:
The information on this website does not warrant or assume any legal
liability or responsibility for the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the
courseware contents.
The contents are provided free for noncommercial purpose such as teaching,
training, research, extension and self learning.
******☺******
Connect With Us:

Tractor Design and Testing

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tractor Design and Testing

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tractor Design and Testing

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tractor Design

Dr. Manjit Singh

Dr. Manjit Singh

Module 1. Introduction about design and development of Agril. Tractor

Lesson 1. Hierarchical Development in Tractor Design

II. Pneumatic Tires/Traction:

As manufacturers seek better productivity through improvements in transmissions, tires, and

III. Power Take Off (PTO):

IV. Hydraulic System:

Irish mechanic Harry Ferguson developed a tractor that incorporated an innovative

Open-center hydraulic systems include a fixed-displacement pump supplying an actuator

VI. Safety Features:

VII. Recent Advances:

Lesson 2. Different Type of Tractors Available in India/abroad & it’sImportance in

There are evidences of the revolution in agriculture brought by mechanization. Beginning

I. Type of Tractors Available in India/Abroad

Farm Tractors are classified as Follows;

1. General purpose (land utility) tractors

2. Universal row crop (row crop utility) tractors

3. Special purpose tractors

Fig. 2:1 High clearance tractor in field

(B). As per traction unit the tractors are divided into

1) Crawler (track laying) type

(a) 2 wheeled tractors (Power tillers)

Top Link Pin Diameter Lift Arm Pin Diameter

0 Up to 20 ( 10.44) 5/8 15.88 5/8 15.88

I 20 to 45 (10.44 to 33.56) 3/4 19.05 7/8 22.23

II 40 to 100 (29.82 to 74.57) 1 25.40 1⅛ 28.58

III 80 to 225 (59.65 to 167.78) 1¼ 31.75 1 7/16 26.99

IV 180 to 400 (134.23 to 298.28) and above 13/4 82.55 2 50.80

3. Global Variations in Tractors:

 Rice-land tires are used in Japan.

 Power/weight ratios are greater for tractors in Japan.

 Radial-ply tires are common in Europe for better traction.

 Tractors outside of North America have up to four PTO speeds.

 Crawler tractors are more popular in Europe and UK.

 Power tillers are common in Asia.

4. Future Engine Designs

 CI engine is well established and not likely to be replaced soon.

5. Trends in Tractor Design:

 Power transfer will be controlled automatically: The optimization of power transfer

6. Importance of Tractors in Agriculture:

Lesson 3. Recent Trends in Tractor Design

I. Power Generation System i.e. Engines:

III. Chassis Design

IV. Hydraulic Systems:

VI. Comfort and Safety:

VII. Levers and switches:

Lesson 4. Selection of engines available in the market and their performance

2. Difference between tractor and automobiles:

Table 4.1: Main design differences between tractor and automobile:

Parameter Automobile Tractor

Designed for high torque and the

There is weight transfer from front to rear wheels

Type of Fuel Diesel or Petrol Mostly Diesel engine or Biodiesel

All four wheels may or may not be same specially

4. Tractor vs. Automobile Engine:

5. Power and Torque for an Engine:

Force (F) = Torque (T) ÷ Radius (R) ... (4.1)